Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility: WESTERN RESERVE ......Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility: WESTERN...

Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility:WESTERN RESERVEHEALTH & REHABILITATION CENTERHudson, Ohio DSCA Project No.: 10.055

Project ManualAddedum #1 Issue Date: 01-09-12

DSCA #10.055 Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility: 01/06/12WESTERN RESERVE HEALTH & REHABILITATION CENTER

PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000001 - 1

SECTION 000001 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE

Project: Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility:Western Reserve Health & Rehabilitation CenterHudson, Ohio

Owner: LTC Realty I, LLC30050 Chagrin Boulevard, Suite 100 TEL: (216) 292-5555Pepper Pike, OH 44124

ADDENDUM #1 ISSUEIssued January 9, 2012

DESIGN TEAM:

Architect: Davison Smith Certo Architects, Inc. [email protected] Center Ridge Road TEL: (440) 835-3957Westlake, Ohio 44145 FAX: (440) 835-4042

Civil Engineer: Rolling Hocevar & Associates, Inc. [email protected] 257 S. Court Street TEL: (330) 723-1828Medina, Ohio 44256

Structural Engineer: Shenberger & Associates, Inc. [email protected] 8227 Brecksville Road TEL: (440) 526-3100Cleveland, Ohio 44141

Mechanical Engineer: Sandhu & Associates, Inc. [email protected] 26031-A Center Ridge Road TEL: (440) 892-4470Westlake, Ohio 44145 FAX: (440) 892-4471

Electrical Engineer: Gedeon Frederick & Co. [email protected]

26031-D Center Ridge Road TEL: (440) 892-0490Westlake, Ohio 44145 FAX: (440) 892-0486

END OF SECTION 000001

DSCA #10.055 Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility: 01/06/12WESTERN RESERVE HEALTH CAMPUS & REHABILITATION CENTER

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000010 - 1

SECTION 000010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Section 000000 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Section 000001 Title Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Section 000010 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 000020 List of Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 011000 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 012100 Allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 012200 Unit Prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Section 012300 Alternates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Section 012600 Contract Modification Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 012900 Payment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 013200 Construction Progress Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 013233 Photographic Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 013300 Submittal Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Section 014000 Quality Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 014200 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Section 015000 Temporary Facilities & Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 016000 Product Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 017300 Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 017329 Cutting and Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 017419 Construction Waste Management & Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 017700 Closeout Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 017839 Project Record Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 017900 Demonstration and Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

Section 024119 Selective Structure Demolition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Section 034100 Structural Precast Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY



Section 042000 Unit Masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

DIVISION 05 - METALS

Section 051200 Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Section 052100 Steel Joists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 053100 Metal Decking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 054100 Pre-Engineered Pre-Fabricated Light Gauge Steel/Roof Trusses . . . . . 6

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

Section 060710 Fire-Retardant Treated Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 061000 Rough Carpentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 061600 Sheathing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 066400 Plastic Paneling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 070150 Preparation for Re-Roofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 072100 Thermal Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 073113 Asphalt Shingles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 075323 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Section 077100 Roof Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 077200 Roof Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 078413 Penetration Firestopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 078446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 079200 Joint Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7



DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

Section 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 081416 Flush Wood Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 083113 Access Doors and Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 083323 Overhead Coiling Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 084133 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 084229 Automatic Entrances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Section 085313 Vinyl Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 087100 Door Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Section 088000 Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

Section 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 092900 Gypsum Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 093000 Tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 096513 Resilient Base & Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 096516 Resilient Plank Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 096813 Tile Carpeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 099113 Exterior Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 099123 Interior Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 099300 Staining & Transparent Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

Section 102600 Wall and Door Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 102800 Toilet, Bath & Laundry Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 104416 Fire Extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

Not Used

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

Section 123530 Residential Casework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3



DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Not Used

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

Section 142400 Hydraulic Elevators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

Section 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Section 220523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 220529 Hangers & Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 220700 Plumbing Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 221116 Domestic Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 221123 Domestic Water Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 221413 Building Storm Drainage Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 221423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Section 221616 Building Natural Gas Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 224000 Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5



DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL

Section 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Section 230593 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 230700 HVAC Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 230900 Controls and Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Section 230993 Sequence of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 232300 Refrigerant Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 233113 Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 233300 Ductwork Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 233400 HVAC Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 233600 Air Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 233713 Air Outlets and Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 237413 Variable Refrigerant Flow & Packaged Rooftop Heating & AC Units . . . 9Section 238126 Split System & Packaged Rooftop Heating & Air Conditioning Units . . . 8Section 238239 Electric Unit Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

Section 260519 Low-Volt Electrical Power Conductors and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 260529 Hanger and Supports for Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Section 260541 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . 8Section 260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling . . . . . . 4Section 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 260573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Section 260923 Lighting Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Section 262416 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 262726 Wiring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 262813 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Section 263213 Engine Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Section 263600 Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 264113 Lightning Protection for Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Section 265100 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Section 265600 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Section 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13


DSCA #10.055 Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility: 01/06/12BATH CREEK ESTATES

LIST OF DRAWINGS 000020 - 1

SECTION 000020 - LIST OF DRAWINGS

Number NameRevision

Title BlockDate

Title Sheet

TS.1 TITLE SHEET 7 1/09/2012

Civil

C-1 EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN 3 1/09/2012

C-2 SITE PLAN 4 1/09/2012

C-3 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS 3 1/09/2012

C-4 GENERAL NOTES AND DETAILS 3 1/09/2012

C-5 SWPP PLAN 3 1/09/2012

C-6 SWPPP NOTES AND DETAILS 3 1/09/2012

C-7 DOWNSPOUT PLAN 1 1/09/2012

C-8 DOWNSPOUT DRAIN DETAILS & NOTES 1 1/09/2012

Site

SP-1 SITE PLAN 2 1/09/2012

Demolition

D-1 DEMOLITION PLAN - BASEMENT 1 12/28/2011

D-2 DEMOLITION PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 1 12/28/2011

D-3 DEMOLITION PLAN - SECOND FLOOR 1 12/28/2011

Architectural

A1.1 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN 1 12/28/2011

A1.2 FIRST FLOOR PLAN 2 1/09/2012

A1.3 SECOND FLOOR PLAN 1 12/28/2011

A1.4 BASEMENT REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

A1.5 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

A1.6 SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

A1.7 ROOM TYPES 1 12/28/2011

A1.8 ROOF PLAN 2 1/09/2012

A2.1 NORTH & SOUTH ELEVATIONS 1 12/28/2011

A2.2 WEST & EAST ELEVATIONS 1 12/28/2011

A3.1 BUILDING CROSS SECTIONS 2 1/09/2012

A3.2 BUILDING WALL SECTIONS 2 1/09/2012

A4.1 SERVERY 202 1 12/28/2011

A4.2 FIREPLACE AT WAITING ROOM 1 12/28/2011



A5.1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 1 12/28/2011

A5.2 DOOR SCHEDULE 2 1/09/2012

Structural

S0.1 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES 1 12/28/2011

S1.1 FOUNDATION PLAN 1 12/28/2011

S1.2 FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

S1.3 SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

S1.4 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

S3.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS 1 12/28/2011

S3.2 STRUCTURAL DETAILS 1 12/28/2011



Plumbing

P1.1 BASEMENT PLUMBING PLAN - UNDERGROUND 1 12/28/2011

P1.2 BASEMENT PLUMBING PLAN - ABOVE GROUND 2 1/09/2012

P1.3 FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN 2 1/09/2012

P1.4 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

P2.1 ENLARGED KITCHEN PLUMBING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

P2.2 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS 1 12/28/2011

P2.3 ENLARGED ROOM PLUMBING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

P3.1 OVERALL STACK DIAGRAM 1 12/28/2011

P4.1 PLUMBING DETAILS 1 12/28/2011

P4.2 PLUMBING SCHEDULES 2 1/09/2012

Mechanical

M1.1 BASEMENT MECHANICAL PLAN 2 1/09/2012

M1.2 FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN 2 1/09/2012

M1.3 SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN 2 1/09/2012

M3.1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES 1 12/28/2011

M3.2 MECHANICAL SYMBOLS, NOTES &SPECIFICATIONS 1 12/28/2011

Fire Protection

FP1.1 BASEMENT FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION PLAN 1 12/28/2011

FP1.2 FIRST FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION PLAN 1 12/28/2011

FP1.3 SECOND FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION PLAN 1 12/28/2011

FP1.4 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION 1 12/28/2011

Electrical

ES1.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN 1 12/28/2011



E1.1 LIGHTING - BASEMENT 1 12/28/2011

E1.2 FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

E1.3 SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN 1 12/28/2011

E1.4 BASEMENT POWER PLAN 2 1/09/2012

E1.5 FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN 2 1/09/2012

E1.6 SECOND FLOOR POWER PLAN 2 1/09/2012

E1.7 BASEMENT SYSTEMS PLAN 1 12/28/2011

E1.8 FIRST FLOOR SYSTEMS PLAN 1 12/28/2011

E1.9 SECOND FLOOR SYSTEMS PLAN 1 12/28/2011

E1.10 SCHEDULES-LEGENDS 1 12/28/2011


E1.12 ENLARGED ELECTRICAL PLANS 1 12/28/2011

E1.13 SPECIFICATIONS-SCHEDULES 1 12/28/2011

E1.14 ELECTRICAL NOTES 1 12/28/2011


E1.16 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 2 1/09/2012


DSCA #10.055 Western Reserve Health & Rehabilitation Center 01.06.12

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Work phases. 3. Work under other contracts. 4. Use of premises. 5. Owner's occupancy requirements. 6. Specification formats and conventions.

B. See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Su mmary" for division of responsibilities for th e Work.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Skilled Nursing Facility Bath Creek Estates

1. Project Location: 1212 West Barlow Road – Hudson, OH

B. Owner: LTC Realty I, LCC 30050 Chagrin Boulevard – Suite 100 Pepper Pike, OH 44124

C. Architect: Davison Smith Certo Architects, Inc. 26031 B Center Ridge Road Westlake, Ohio 44145

D. The Work consists of the following:

1. The Work includes labor and materials for the remodeling and construction of a tw-story plus basement of an approxim ately 36,500 square foot skilled nursing facilit y with associated sitework, mech anical, electrical and plumbing as de picted in the contract documents including anew Port Cochere, parking lot addition and porch.

E. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without inte rfering with or delay ing work under t his Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

SUMMARY 011000 - 1


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

1.4 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. On-Site Work hours: Work hours shall be generally performed during normal business working hours permitted by local authorities, except as otherwise directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the following: 1. Unit-cost allowances.

B. See Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices.

1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in m aking final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of pro ducts or sy stems included in allowanc es, in the for m specified for Change Orders.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual qua ntities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Fur nish templates as required to coordinate installation.

ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1


ALLOWANCES 012100 - 2

1.5 UNUSED MATERIALS

A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is no t economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed b y Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage spa ce. Ot herwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation fo r each allowanc e with relat ed materials and installations to ensure that each allowa nce item is completely integrated and interfaced wit h related work.



UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

B. See Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount proposed b y bidders, stated on the Bid F orm, as a price per unit of measurement for m aterials or services added to or deducted f rom the Co ntract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necess ary material, plus cost for delivery , installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to ha ve this wor k measured, at Owner's expense, b y an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.





ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that m ay be added to or deducted f rom the Base Bid am ount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change e ither in the am ount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduc tion from the Contract Sum to inco rporate alternate into the Work . No other adjustments ar e made to the Contract Sum.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as nece ssary to com pletely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as pa rt of each alt ernate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and si milar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: I mmediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the st atus of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated m odifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.





CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. See Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances.

C. See Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions via memorandum authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect w ill issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not cons ider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. After receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quot ation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, w ith total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, i ncluding, but not lim ited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesti ng an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If l atent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the ch ange and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of th e proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.



2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, f urnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, deliver y charges, equipment rental, and am ounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an u pdated Contractor's Construction Sche dule that in dicates the effect of th e

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of th e Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Prod uct Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one pr oduct or sy stem for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 or similar for Proposal Requests.

1.4 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase am ount and the allo wance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasona ble allowances for cutting losses, toler ances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase am ount only where indicated as part of the allowance.

2. If requested, prepare ex planation and docum entation to subst antiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any , claimed in Ch ange Orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to est ablish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for incre ased costs be cause of a change in scope or nature o f the allowan ce described in the Contract Docu ments, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor' s handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Subm it claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Direc tive authorizing work to proceed. O wner may reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Contractor will issue a Change Order fo r signatures of Owner and Architect on AIA Document G701.



1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Chan ge Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Direc tive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparatio n of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Application for Payment, Submittals Schedule, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Arc hitect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G702 & G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Su m in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipm ent purchased or fabricate d and stored, but not yet installed.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use inform ation indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.



8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall b e complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separat e line ite ms in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubm it the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for P ayment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the fifth day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

E. Application Preparation: Co mplete every entry on form . Not arize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal d ocuments on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Con tractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Pay ment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfull y entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.



1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right t o designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Subm it waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to

Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Ad ministrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Copies of building permits. 6. Copies of authorizations and licenses fro m authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 7. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificat e of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation su pporting claim that th e Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Co mpletion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and ac cepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and pro of

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Co mpletion or w hen Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. 10. A signed and completed punchlist



PRODUCTS (Not Used)




PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ad ministrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Project meetings. 3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for a description of the division of Work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section.

C. See Division 01 Section "Execution" for proce dures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request fro m Contractor seeking interp retation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate c onstruction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure ef ficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordina te construction operations, included in different Sectio ns, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is li mited, coordinate installation of di fferent components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each pa rty involved, outlining s pecial procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attende es at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.



C. Administrative Procedures: Coor dinate scheduling and tim ing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepar e Coordination Drawings if limited space av ailability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Content: Project-specifi c information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relations hips of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conf lict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension chang es and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each sub mittal. Architect will return

one copy. 4. Electronic submittals are acceptable and preferred. Architect will return one electronic

marked up copy. 5. Refer to individual Sections for Coord ination Drawing requirements for Work in those

Sections.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct m eetings and c onferences at Pr oject site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence i s required, of date and time of each m eeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.



2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions an d agreements achieved. Distribute the

meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a pr econstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later th an 14 day s after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superint endent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other c oncerned parties shall attend the conference. Al l participants at the conference shall be fam iliar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: D iscuss items of significa nce that co uld affect p rogress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. l. Use of the premises. m. Work restrictions. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Construction waste management and recycling. p. Parking availability. q. Office, work, and storage areas. r. Equipment deliveries and priorities. s. First aid. t. Security. u. Progress cleaning. v. Working hours.

3. Minutes: General Contractor is to record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordina tion or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other constr uction activities and preparations for th e particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:



a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant confer ence discussions, agreements, and disagree ments, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to p arties who should have been present.

5. Do not proc eed with installation if the c onference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progres s meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entit y concerned with current pr ogress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include to pics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress sinc e the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation t o Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secur e commitments from parties involved to



do so. Discuss whether sc hedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: General Contractor will Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to p arties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions t o the schedu le have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and sub mit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and subm it RFIs in a prom pt manner so as to avoid delay s in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legi ble description of ite m needing interpretation and the following:



1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If C ontractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A or similar.

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

2. Electronic copies electron ically mailed to Architect and copy ing the owner are also acceptable.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will revi ew each RFI, determine action requi red, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination inform ation already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request fo r additional infor mation, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a ch ange to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contract or to subm it Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants cha nge in the Contract Tim e or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 3 working days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected p arties. R eview response and notif y Architect within three day s if Contra ctor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Pr epare, maintain, and submit a tabular l og of RFIs o rganized by the RFI number. Submit log to Architect monthly including the following:



1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change i n the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule.

B. See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Su mmary" for prepar ing a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule.

C. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.

D. See Division 01 Section "Photogra phic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finis h on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and sche duling a construction project where activities are arranged based on ac tivity relationships. Netw ork calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the netw ork schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contracto r, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both part ies as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.



F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Schedule: Submit one hard copy and one electronic copy to Architect of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit one hard copy and one electronic copy to Architect of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of sch edules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Sche dule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress re ports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for perfor ming critical elem ents of t he Work from parties involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in th e network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include ti me required for review, resub mittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the S chedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit concurrently with the first co mplete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.



2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal ele ment of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 da ys, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurem ent process activities for the f ollowing long lead items and major items, requiring a cy cle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurem ent cycle activities include, but are not li mited to, subm ittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

a. Lighting b. Doors & Hardware c. Windows & Storefront d. Structural Steel e. Plumbing Fixtures f. Mechanical units g. Trusses h. Interior finishes

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal ti mes indicated in D ivision 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review ti mes in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 3 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time fo r Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Docu ments and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

Owner. 2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.



3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed c ontract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a ti me-impact analysis using fragnets to de monstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice of Awar d. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require 3 m onths or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

C. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce.

D. Schedule Updating: Con current with making revisions to schedule, prepare t abulated reports showing the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. I ssue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each m eeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updat ed schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including , but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved sch edule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parti es identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs.

B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record Documents at Project closeout.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and buildi ng with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs.

B. Construction Photographs: Submit electronic photographs pr of each photographic view within five days of taking photographs to Architect.

1. Format: Electronic format (TIFF, JPEG or similar) 2. Identification: On bottom of each picture, provide a label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction and brief description of item photographed. d. Unique sequential identifier.

1.3 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for u nlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in unc ompressed TIFF or JPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels.


PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set o f construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

B. Digital Images: Sub mit digital im ages exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image.

C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting cons truction, take digital photographs of Project site and surr ounding properties, including existin g items to rem ain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect.

1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to proper ty before starting the

Work. 3. Take photographs of existing buil dings either on or adjoining pr operty to accurately

record physical conditions at start of construction.

D. Periodic Construction Photographs: T ake digital photographs monthly with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Pay ment. Select vantage points to show st atus of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

E. Additional Photographs: Architect may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified.

1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not lim ited to,

the following: a. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. b. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. c. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. d. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes adm inistrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. See Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for subm itting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.

C. See Division 01 Section "Photogra phic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.

D. See Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements.

E. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.

F. See Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

G. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Main tenance Data" for subm itting operation and maintenance manuals.

H. See Division 01 Section "Dem onstration and Training" for sub mitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate pr eparation and processing of su bmittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each sub mittal with fa brication, purchasing, testing, delivery , other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delay ed because of need to review sub mittals concurrently for coordination.



a. Architect reserves the right t o withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and tim e requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to tr ansmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If inter mediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 3 by 4 on label or beside title block to record Contractor' s

review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer. e. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall u se Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decim al point (e.g. , 061000.01.A)

f. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. g. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. h. Other necessary identification.

E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies ar e required for final subm ittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial subm ittal may serve as final submittal.

G. Transmittal: Package each sub mittal individually and appropriately for transm ittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transm ittal form. Architect may return submittals, without review if received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Provide the following information on the transmittal form:



a. Project Name b. Date c. Destination (To:) d. Source (From:) e. Name(s) of Subcontractor f. Submittal purpose and description g. Specifications section number and title h. Signature of transmitter

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date an d content of revision in label or title b lock and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked “No Exception Taken"

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final subm ittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating “No Exception Taken" by Architect.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES

A. General: At Contractor' s written request, copies of Architect's CAD files may be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect inf ormation into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.



f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency.

4. Number of Copies: Submit three co pies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated . Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate require ments in the Contract Docu ments. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including p ower, signal, and

control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar fu ll-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Archi tect will return one copy.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other ele ments and for a comparison of these chara cteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessor ies together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. e. Project Name f. Date



3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Sam ples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three full sets of a vailable choices where color, pattern, texture, or si milar characteristics are required to be sel ected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return two subm ittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner sp ecified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Sa mples include, but are not lim ited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated co mponents; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets ; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of S amples: Sub mit three set s of Sam ples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sam ple set as a Project Record Sample.

E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.

1. Number of Copies: Sub mit three co pies of prod uct schedule or list, unles s otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.

F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

G. Application for Payment: Com ply with requi rements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

H. Schedule of Values: Co mply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish prod ucts or equipment fabricated to a special design.

1. Number of Copies: Submit one copy of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.



1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or ot her individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Co mply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

D. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statemen ts on m anufacturer's letterhead certifying t hat Installer complies with requirem ents in the C ontract Documents and, wh ere required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepar e written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

F. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certify ing that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

G. Material Certificates: Pr epare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for com pliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Product Test Reports: Prepare written repor ts indicating cu rrent product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. B ase reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

J. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare writte n evidence, from a m odel code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdic tion, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

K. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports wr itten by a qualified testing agency , on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

L. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testin g agency's standard form, indicating and interp reting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include wr itten recommendations for primers and substrat e preparation needed for adhesion.



M. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency , on testing agency 's standard form, indicating and i nterpreting results of field te sts performed either dur ing installation of product or after product is insta lled in its final l ocation, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Co mply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic in formation, including, but not lim ited to, performance and design c riteria, list of applicab le codes and regulations, an d calculations. Include list of assu mptions and other perfor mance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Pr ovide name and version of software, if an y, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare writte n or published inform ation that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, a nd procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of produc t and name, address, and telephone num ber of manufacturer.

Q. Manufacturer's Field Rep orts: Prepar e written inf ormation documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether the y comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performan ce

complies with requirements.

R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare wr itten information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

S. Construction Photographs: Com ply with requi rements specified in Divi sion 01 Section "Photographic Documentation."

T. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect.

1. Architect will not review sub mittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal.

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professi onal design s ervices or ce rtifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Sh op Drawings, Product Data, an d other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and seal ed by the responsible design professional, for each product and sy stem specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance an d design crit eria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in perform ing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordinatio n with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Docu ments. Note corrections and field di mensions. Mark with approval stamp BEFORE submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been revi ewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not revi ew submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. No Exception Taken 2. Revise & Resubmit 3. Rejected 4. Note Exception

C. Informational Submittals: Architect wi ll review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not com ply with requirements. Architect wil l forward each subm ittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be retu rned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contr actor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not lim it Contractor's other qualit y-assurance and -control procedures that f acilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdict ion are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions , and procedures performed before and duri ng execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and re lated actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actua l products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirem ents. Services do not in clude contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size, phy sical assemblies that are constructed on -site. Mock ups are used to verify selections made under sam ple submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, wh ere indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard b y which th e Work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Wor k to verif y performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and accep table to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.



F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspec tions that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installati on of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform sp ecific tests, inspections, or both. Testi ng laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized indivi duals of a corresp onding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of two previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; bein g familiar with special requirements indicated; and ha ving complied with requir ements of authorities havi ng jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: I f compliance with two or m ore standards is specifi ed and the standards establ ish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirem ent. Refer uncertain ties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual i nstallation may comply exactly with t he minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values a re minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article t o demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.



5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and t esting and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Ce rtificates: F or Owner's records, submit copies of per mits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, juri sdictional settlements, notices, r eceipts for f ee payments, judgments, correspondence, record s, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qu alifications paragraphs in this Ar ticle establish the mini mum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or ass embling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm ex perienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of succ essful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of s uccessful in-service p erformance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A prof essional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is lo cated and wh o is experienced in pro viding engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the sy stem, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specificati ons require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations g overning the Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according



to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in in dividual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing a gency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Repres entative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and ap proved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to co mply with the fol lowing requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven d ays in advance of dates and times when m ockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construc tion that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Tests and inspections not explicitl y assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibilit y. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality -control services required of Contract or by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not em ploy same entity engaged by Owner, unless agr eed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advanc e of ti me when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.



3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor' s responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contr actor and not required b y the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Ser vices: Where indicate d, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled com ponents and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as s pecified in D ivision 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or i nspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and r einspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from whic h test samples will be taken and in which in-situ test s are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and i nspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and si milar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase th e Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Co operate with agenci es performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide r easonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of oper ations to permit assign ment of personn el. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative sam ples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing a nd inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate se quence of activities to acco mmodate required q uality-assurance and -control services wit h a m inimum of delay and to avoid necessity of re moving and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.



1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Condu cted by a qualified testing agenc y as required b y authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor pro mptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each te st, inspection, and si milar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and st ating in each report whether tested and i nspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: O n completion of testing, inspecti ng, sample taking, and sim ilar services, re pair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with inst allation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Docu ment requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor' s responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to conve y Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is lim ited to Architect's duties and responsib ilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other t erms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, a nd lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Pr oject site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assem bly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying , working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or ma y not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standar ds: Unless the Contract Docu ments include m ore stringent requirements, applicable construction i ndustry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standa rds are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.



C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be fam iliar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to pe rform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in T homson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) ABAA Air Barrier Association of America ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association ACI ACI International (American Concrete Institute) ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers AI Asphalt Institute



AIA American Institute of Architects (The) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. APA Architectural Precast Association APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) AWCI AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association



(Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association (The) BICSI BICSI BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee CCC Carpet Cushion Council CDA Copper Development Association CEA Canadian Electricity Association CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. CGA Compressed Gas Association CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council CPA Composite Panel Association CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSA Canadian Standards Association



CSA CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) CSI Cast Stone Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) DHI Door and Hardware Institute EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. ESD ESD Association FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball (The International Basketball Federation) FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) FM Approvals FM Approvals FM Global FM Global (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. FSA Fluid Sealing Association FSC Forest Stewardship Council GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal



GSI Geosynthetic Institute HI Hydraulic Institute HI Hydronics Institute HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF International Badminton Federation ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. ISO International Organization for Standardization ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association ITS Intertek Testing Service NA ITU International Telecommunication Union KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute



MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America MIA Marble Institute of America MPI Master Painters Institute MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations



NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Now ITS) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute PLANET Professional Landcare Network (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) PTI Post-Tensioning Institute RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute



RIS Redwood Inspection Service SAE SAE International SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council SIA Security Industry Association SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray

Polyurethane Foam Division) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings STI Steel Tank Institute SWI Steel Window Institute SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance TMS The Masonry Society



TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. TPI Turfgrass Producers International TRI Tile Roofing Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association USAV USA Volleyball USGBC U.S. Green Building Council USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICBO International Conference of Building Officials



(See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Docu ments, they shall m ean the recognized name of the entities in t he following list.

CE Army Corps of Engineers CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission DOC Department of Commerce DOD Department of Defense DOE Department of Energy EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAA Federal Aviation Administration FCC Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Administration GSA General Services Administration HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration PBS Public Building Service



(See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) SD State Department TRB Transportation Research Board USDA Department of Agriculture USPS Postal Service

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acrony ms are us ed in Specifications o r other Contract Docu ments, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) CFR Code of Federal Regulations DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards

F. State Government Agencies: Where a bbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities i n the following list.



CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation

CCR California Code of Regulations CPUC California Public Utilities Commission TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirem ents for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B. See Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.

C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and hum idity requirements for products in those Sections.

D. See Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As deter mined by Architect, permanent or tem porary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulat ed and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Co st or use charges for temp orary facilities shall b e included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use tem porary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: S how temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas f or construction personnel.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.



1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Per manent Facilities: Inst aller of each permanent servi ce shall assu me responsibility for operation, maintenance, and pr otection of each per manent service during its use as a construction facility before O wner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pavement: Co mply with Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving." Section "Co ncrete Paving." pavement Sections.

B. Portable Chain-Link Fenc ing: M inimum 2-inch , 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fab ric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts.

C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry"

D. Gypsum Board: Minim um 1/2 inch thick b y 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.

E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: P refabricated or m obile units with servi ceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to acco mmodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; w ith class and extingu ishing agent as required b y locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning s pace heaters, open-flame heaters, or sa lamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agenc y acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of per manent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use whe n needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and ex isting users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressu res adequate for construction.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provi de temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of c ompleted installations or for protectin g installed construction f rom adverse effects of low t emperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Hum idity Control: P rovide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a h armful effect on completed installations or elements being inst alled. Coordinate ventilation requirem ents to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power se rvice and distribution s ystem of sufficie nt size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.



1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.

H. Lighting: Provide tem porary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illu mination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and o perate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirem ents without operating entire system.

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telep hone line for each facsimile machine and com puter in each field office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including pol ice and fire departments, Contractor's home office, Arch itect's office, Owner's office, Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail in field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide incombustible construction f or offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Subs tantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved area s. Extend te mporary roads and paved area s, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and pave d areas with permanent roads and paved areas.

2. Prepare subgrade and inst all subbase and b ase for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3. Recondition base after temporary use, including re moving contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.

4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Co mpletion. Repair hot-m ix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final c ourse according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving."



C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Compl y with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that wil l not result i n flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

F. Project Identification and Tem porary Signs: Provi de Project identification and other signs as approved by Architect. Install signs w here indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collec tion containers in sizes adeq uate to handle waste from construction operations . Co mply with requirem ents of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.

H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and si milar devices used for hoisting materi als are considered " tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protecti on, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that co mply with enviro nmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway , and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedi mentation Control: Provide measur es to prevent s oil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airbor ne dust to adjacent properties and walkway s, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Stormwater Control: Co mply with authorities ha ving jurisdiction. Pr ovide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegeta tion from damage fro m construction operations. Protect tree ro ot systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to reco mmend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pest s and to perform extermination and con trol



procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests an d their residues at Substan tial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner . Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction opera tions begin furn ish and install site en closure fence in a manner that wi ll prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to en close entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations

2. Option in subparagraph below is only for projects connected to existing construction. 3. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.

G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: In stall substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockab le entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Co mply with requirem ents of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide te mporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed an d permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 3. Protect air-handling equipment. 4. Weather strip openings. 5. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of ty pes needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Co mply with NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding o perations, combustion-type temporary heating u nits, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for p ersonnel

at Project site. Review n eeds with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fi re protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purpos es only and are not to be re moved. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce stri ct discipline in use of temporary facilities. To m inimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.



B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of tem porary enclosures, heating, coolin g, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not ch ange over from using tem porary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Rem oval: Rem ove each tem porary facility when need for its service h as ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a perman ent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Co mplete or, if necess ary, restore per manent construction that m ay have been delay ed because of interfer ence with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities t hat constitute tem porary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Co mpletion, clean and renovate permanent facilities u sed during construction period. Compl y with final cl eaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; prod uct delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specifi c requirements for warranties on prod ucts and installations specified to be warranted.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The te rm "product" includes the terms " material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Item s identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation sh own or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previousl y been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of r ecycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvag ed or recy cled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Pr oduct that is demonstrated and appr oved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitut ion, to have the indicated qualities related to type, functio n, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction fr om those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," inc luding make or m odel number or ot her designation, to establish the significant qualities rela ted to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearan ce, and other characteristi cs for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A or similar 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts o f the Work and to co nstruction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant quali ties of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qua lities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durabilit y, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of si milar installations for completed projects with project na mes and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities havin g jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor' s Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified prod uct or method of construction cannot be pro vided within the Contract Tim e, include letter fro m manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 14 da ys of receipt of a re quest for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 14 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional inform ation or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot m ake a d ecision on us e of a prop osed

substitution within time allocated.

B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identi fy product or fabrication or i nstallation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable



product request within 14 day s of receipt of request, or 7 day s of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

C. Basis-of-Design Product S pecification Submittal: Comply with requirem ents in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is gi ven option of selecting between two or more products for use on Pr oject, product selected shal l be com patible with pr oducts previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handl e products using m eans and m ethods that will pr event damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Proje ct site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with label s and instruc tions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Docu ments and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight , except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product m anufacturer's written instructions for t emperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.



1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinte d written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warr anty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Pr epare a written document that cont ains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form : Modified to include Project-specific infor mation and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified for ms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provid e products that comply with the Contract Docu ments, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products co mplete with acc essories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other ite ms needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard opt ions are specified, provide standard products of t ypes that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accom panied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the ter m "match sample," sample to be matched i s Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference sta ndard requirements in the Spe cifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:



1. Product: Where Specifications nam e a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: W here Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of nam es of both pro ducts and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: W here Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products lis ted, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the m anufacturers listed, or an u nnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and di mensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or sy stem, provide t he specified product or s ystem. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specificati ons name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Sp ecifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for cons ideration of an u nnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Speci fications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with oth er specified requirements, comply with provisions in P art 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specificatio ns include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "s tandard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications i nclude the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standar d and premium items.



2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Ar chitect will consider requests for sub stitution if received with in 60 da ys after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: Architect wil l consider Contract or's request for substitution whe n the followi ng conditions are satisfied. If the following condit ions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, af ter deducting additiona l responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, in creased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received neces sary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor 's request for com parable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the followi ng conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is co nsistent with the Contract Docu ments and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attr ibutes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing executi on of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.

B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for subm itting final proper ty survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owne r-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certify ing that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

B. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor or professional engineer.

C. Final Property Survey: Submit three copies show ing the Work performed an d record survey data.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Proj ect is located and who is experienced in providi ng land-surveying services of the kind indicated.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Acceptance of Conditions: Exam ine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including com patibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, an d roofs for suitable conditions where products and s ystems are to be installed.

4. Proceed with installation onl y after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly . Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of ot her construction by field m easurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space require ments and dimensions of ite ms shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Docu ments, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the propert y survey and existing bench marks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect immediately.

B. General: Engage a land surve yor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions wit hin tolerances indicated. Do not scal e Drawings to obtain required dimensions.



3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when d eviations from requi red lines and levels exc eed allowable

tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site i mprovements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out c ontrol lines and l evels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and flo or levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer s urvey markings and elevations for use with control l ines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each surve y party me mber, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve a nd protect per manent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

B. Benchmarks: Establish a nd maintain a minimum of three per manent benchmarks on P roject site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with h orizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

D. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final propert y survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed b y land surveyor o r professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

1. Recording: At Substantial Com pletion, have the final property survey recorded b y or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct align ment and elevation, as indicated.



1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the partie s involved tem plates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and in stalling products to co mply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide ancho rs and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are n ot indicated, m ount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, tem plates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in co ncrete or m asonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Cl ean Project site and work areas dail y, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not ho ld materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 da ys if t he temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitar y waste mat erials separately from other wast e. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.



B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progr ess to the l evel of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper exec ution of t he Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according t o written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using o nly cleaning m aterials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not reco mmended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Bury ing or burning waste materials on-site wi ll not be per mitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clea n and pr otect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide m aintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction perio d. Adjust and lubricate operable co mponents to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction op erations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating co mponents to confirm proper operat ion. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating com ponents for pro per operation without binding. Adjus t equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Serv ice: If a factory -authorized service r epresentative is required to inspect field-assembled com ponents and equi pment installation, com ply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."



3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure inst alled Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repai red without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate prope rly. Remove and replace operat ing components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 1

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specifi c requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

C. See Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 7 days before the time cutting and patching will be perfor med, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how t hey will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: De scribe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mech anical/Electrical Systems: List services/sy stems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or aff ect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be tem porarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and pa tching involve adding reinforc ement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integ ration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structura l elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and re lated components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increase d maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.



C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-ca rrying capacity, that results i n reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenanc e or decreas ed operational life or safety

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch c onstruction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or dam aged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before pat ching, verify compatibility with and suitabilit y of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation onl y after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.



B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent dam age. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electri cal Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be rem oved, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/ systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other co nstruction, and subsequently patch as r equired to re store surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power t ools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and choppi ng. Cut holes and slots as small as po ssible, neatly to size required, and with m inimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Te mporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete & Masonry: Cut using a cutting m achine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilli ng: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31

Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in w alls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Pr ovide materials and co mply with installation require ments specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and in spect patched areas after co mpletion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Rest ore exposed fini shes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoini ng construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.



3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if nec essary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas an d spaces wh ere cutting and patching are performed. Com pletely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

B. See Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.

C. See Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.

D. See Division 04 Section "Stone Masonry " for disposal require ments for excess stone and stone waste.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Buil ding and site improvement materials resulting from dem olition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Rem oval off-site of demolition a nd construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator accep table to authorities havi ng jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: R ecovery of dem olition or cons truction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.


A. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site



1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Im plement waste management plan as approved by Owner. Provide han dling, containers, storage, signag e, transportation, an d other items as required to im plement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

B. Waste Management Coordinator: En gage a wast e management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review

plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduc t waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walk s, walkways, and other adjacent occupied a nd used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necess ary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlli ng dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor

C. Procedures in paragraph a nd subparagraphs below describe the "source separat ed" method for handling recyclable waste. If space at Project site is limited, consider revising below to allow "co-mingled" method, which takes less space beca use it per mits all recy clable waste to be placed in a single container that is separated later at the recycling facility.

D. Procedures: Separate re cyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separa te recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.



1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bin s for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with ot her materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction ar ea. Do not stor e within dri p line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recy cling receiver o r

processor.

3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliv eries using pallets to rem ove pallets fro m

Project site. For pallets t hat remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into com ponent wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site.

C. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be sal vaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally di spose of them in a landfil l or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.



2. Remove and transport debris in a m anner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and pro cedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.

B. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Pay ment for Substantial and Final Completion.

C. See Division 01 Section "Photographi c Documentation" for subm itting Final Co mpletion construction photographs.

D. See Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

E. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Mainte nance Data" for operation a nd maintenance manual requirements.

F. See Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.

G. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cl eaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requ esting inspection for dete rmining date of Substant ial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of item s to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of item s on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, work manship bonds, maintenance s ervice agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. In clude occupancy permits, operating certificates, and si milar releases.

5. Prepare and subm it Project Record Docume nts, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement survey s, property surveys, and similar final record information.



6. Deliver tools, spare part s, extra materials, and si milar items to l ocation designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver key s to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspectio n for Substantial Co mpletion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with in spection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certif icate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Cont ractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of co mpleted inspection wi ll form the basis of r equirements for Fi nal Completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting fi nal inspection for determining date of Fi nal Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a fin al Application for Pa yment according to Division 01 Section "Pay ment Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), end orsed and dated by Architect. The certified cop y of the list s hall state that each ite m has b een completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, contin uing insurance coverage compl ying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and m aintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final in spection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a fi nal Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notif y Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.



1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Subm it three hard copies of list and one electronic copy . Include nam e and identification of each spac e and area affected by construction operations for incom plete items and items needing correction including, if necess ary, areas dist urbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on requ est of Architect for designated portions o f the Work where co mmencement of warranties other than date of Substanti al Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bon ds in heav y-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by -11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the nam e, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and sp ine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and a gents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents tha t are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cl eaning and waste-removal operations to co mply with local laws and ordinances and Federa l and local environm ental and antipollution regulations.



B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations be fore requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are n either planted n or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipm ent, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a di rt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and sim ilar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior su rfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from lim ited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, re moving debris a nd excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing com pounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other da maged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surf aces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactoril y repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and sim ilar labels, including m echanical and electrical nameplates.

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and el ectrical equipment and si milar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and m ortar droppings, and other f oreign substances.

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures t o a sanitary condition, free of stains, i ncluding stains

resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean perm anent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean light fixtures, lam ps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noti ceably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluoresce nt and mercury vapor fixtures to com ply with requirements for new fixtures.

r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.



C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection an d rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property . Do not discharge volatile, har mful, or dangerous materials into drainage sy stems. Remove waste materials from Project sit e and dispose of lawfully.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and proce dural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Emergency manuals. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and m aintenance of products, materials, finishes,

systems and equipment.

B. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manual: Submit two copies of each manual in final form at least 7 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 14 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect 's comments. Submit two copies of eac h corrected manual within 14 days of receipt of Architect 's comments to owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate s ection for each piece of equipm ent not part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.



C. Table of Contents: List each product in cluded in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the vol ume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section num ber in Project Manual.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageab le size. Arran ge contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipm ent. If possible, asse mble instructions for subs ystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folde d oversize sheets.

a. Identify each binder on fr ont and spi ne, with print ed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plas tic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include t yped list of products and major components of equipment included in the se ction on each divider, cross-re ferenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent pl astic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings t o same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bin d envelopes in rear of manual. At appropri ate locations i n manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a s eparate section for t ype of emergen cy, emergency instructions, and emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicabl e for each type of emerge ncy indicated below, include instructions and procedure s for each sy stem, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component for. fire, flood, gas leak, water leak, power failure, water outage, equipment failure, and chemical release or spill

C. Emergency Instructions: Desc ribe and explain warnings, tro uble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include r esponsibilities of Owner' s operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside norm al operating lim its, and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.



2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirem ents in this Section, includ e operation data required in individual Specification Sections and equipm ent descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break -in, and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, norm al, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and dia gram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, m aterial, and fini sh. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each produc t included in manual, identified by pr oduct name and arranged to match manual's table of contents . For each product, list na me, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents , methods o f cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions.



E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of material s and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warran ties and bonds and lists of circu mstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each sy stem, subsystem, and piece of equipm ent not part of a sy stem, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, m aintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings a nd diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and com ponents, and recommen ded spare parts for each co mponent part or piece of equipment:

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, trouble shooting guide, disassembly instructions, and adjusting instru ctions that detail e ssential maintenance procedures:

E. Maintenance and Servic e Schedules: Include service and l ubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Infor mation: Include lists of replacement a nd repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manuf acturers' maintenance documentation and lo cal sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copi es of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warran ties and bonds and lists of circu mstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and b y Owner's operating personnel for t ypes of emergencies indicated.



B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a co mplete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation a nd maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipm ent not part of a system.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identif y each product or component incorporated in to the Wor k. If data incl ude more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings suppl ementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawi ngs with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of ope ration and m aintenance manuals.

F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes adm inistrative and proce dural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.

B. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Mainte nance Data" for operation a nd maintenance manual requirements.

C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Subm it one set of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will return prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal.

b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.

B. Record Specifications: Subm it one cop y of Project's Specifications, includi ng addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain o ne set of blue- or bl ack-line white prints of the Con tract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that sh own originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or ent ity is Installer, s ubcontractor, or similar entity, to pr epare the marked-up Record Prints.



a. Give particular attention to inform ation on concealed ele ments that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Record data as soon as po ssible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, com pletely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

3. Mark record sets with er asable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to di stinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

4. Note Construction Chan ge Directive num bers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Pri nts and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include ide ntification on cover sheets.

2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to in dicate the actual product i nstallation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention t o information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name a nd model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product i nstallation where installati on varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention t o information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product de livered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.



3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Rec ord Drawings wher e applicable.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each subm ittal during the construction pe riod for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office a part from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry , legible c ondition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

B. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit two copi es of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in tr aining or education with a record of successf ul learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factor y-authorized service r epresentative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training.

D. Coordinate content of training m odules with c ontent of approved emergency, operation, an d maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction pro gram that includes individ ual training modules for each sy stem and equipment not part of a s ystem, as required by individual Specifica tion Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that pa rticipant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Require ments, and Criteria: Include system and equipment descriptions, operating standard s, regulatory requirements, equipment function, operating characteristics, limiting conditions, and performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review emergency , operations, and maintenance manuals; Project Record Documents; iden tification systems; warranties and bonds; and maintenance service agreements.

3. Emergencies: Include instructions on stopping; shutdown instructions; operating instructions for conditions outside normal ope rating limits; instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

4. Operations: Include startup, break-in , control, and safety procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, a nd weekend operating instructions; operating procedures for emergencies and equipment failure; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Adjustments: Include alignm ents and checking, noise, vibration, econo my, and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include diagnostic instructions and test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include in spection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of

cleaning, procedures for preventive and routin e maintenance, and instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: In clude diagnosis, repair, and disassembly instructions; instructions for identifying parts; and review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qua lified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coor dinate between Contractor and Owner for num ber of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner 's personnel to adj ust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.



C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on tim es. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least 14 days' advance notice.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each tra ining module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a performance-based test.



SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. See Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Man agement and Disposal" for disposal of demolished materials.

C. See Division 31 Section " Site Clearing" for s ite clearing and rem oval of ab ove- and below-grade improvements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach item s from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dat es for each activit y, interruption of utili ty services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.

B. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of a djoining construction and sit e improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as da mage caused by selective demolition operations. Co mply with Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.

C. Landfill Records: I ndicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facilit y licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

1. Comply with submittal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Wast e Management and Disposal."




A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in dem olition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualificati ons: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Com ply with gove rning EPA not ification regulations before beginning selective dem olition. Com ply with hauling and dispos al regulations of authoritie s having jurisdiction.

D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bi dding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered i n the Work.

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: M aintain existing ut ilities indicated to remain in service and protect the m against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or dam aged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with re quirements indicated to determ ine extent of selective demolition required.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or st ructural elements that conflict with intende d function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural defici ency or unplan ned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, and preconstruction photographs.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation."

G. Perform surveys as the Work pr ogresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to rem ain and protect the m against damage during selective demolition operations.

B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before

proceeding with selective dem olition provide temporary services/systems that by pass area of selective dem olition and that maintain continuity of services/sy stems to other parts of building.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.



3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: C onduct selective dem olition and debris-rem oval operations to ensure m inimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkway s, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with require ments for acc ess and protection specified i n Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide tem porary barricades and ot her protection required to preve nt injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finis hes to remain, and to preven t unexpected or uncont rolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Dem olish and rem ove existing construction only to the extent required b y new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut o penings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill f rom the exposed or finished si de into concealed surfaces to avoid m arring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until wor k area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operati ons. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and rem ove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirem ents in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:



1. Clean and repair item s to functional cond ition adequate for inte nded reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Co mply with installation requirem ents for new

materials and equipm ent. Provide con nections, supports, and m iscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective dem olition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Divisio n 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and im provements of dust, dirt, and debris caus ed by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective dem olition operations began.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general pr ovisions of Contract, including General and Su pplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of cast-in-place c oncrete is s hown on drawings. This Section includes the following miscellaneous materials associated with cast-in-place concrete:

1. Waterstops. 2. Premolded joint filler. 3. Underslab moisture barrier.

B. Work Provided by Others:

1. By the Owner – Pa yment of costs for concrete testing and inspection as

hereinafter described. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Specification: To be com plete, this specification section requires the use of ACI 301-05 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildin gs”. This specification section is intended to supplem ent and modify ACI 301, and will take precedence wher e conflict exists. Requirements of ACI 3 01 shall govern the work, except as noted herein. The following Chapters of ACI 301 do not apply on this Project.

13 - Architectural Concrete 14 - Massive Concrete 15 - Prestressed Concrete

B. Field References: Attent ion is called to requirement (see ACI 301, Section 1.6) for

keeping a copy of ACI S P-15 Field Reference Manual, in the C oncrete Installer’s field office at all times. Supervisor y personnel shall be familiar with ACI 301 and ot her standards contained in SP-15, as well as with this project specification.


A. Source Quality Control: Materials are subject to inspection and tests in field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve contractor of responsibility for providing m aterials in co mpliance with specification requirem ents. Promptly remove and replace materials or components which do not comply.

1. The reinforcing steel sup plier shall c ertify that all reinforcing steel ha s been

manufactured in the U nited States and meets the desig nated ASTM specifications.



2. If this cannot be done, t he reinforcing steel supplier shall set up a test program that is acceptable to the Engineer. All costs relating to this testing shall be paid by reinforcing steel supplier. This test program shall be set up so as not to delay the construction schedule.

B. Testing:

1. As per ACI 301, Section 1.6, except as noted.

2. Required testing services of Section 1.6.4. 1 will be performed by an independent

testing laboratory employed by the Owner. Remedial testing services required in Section 1.6.4.4 shall be performed by same laboratory but at Contractor’s expense.

3. All samples shall be taken after any addition of water at the job site is co mplete.

When pumping or pneumatic equipment is used, samples shall be taken at discharge end. This is for both cylinders and slump tests.

4. Mold and cure three specimens (cylinders) in accordance with ASTM

C31/C31M. Three specimens constitute a strength test. Test one cylinder at 7 days and 2 at 28 days. Acceptance of structure will be based on results of 28 day tests.

5. Air Content:

a. Determine air content of concrete for each strength test by either the

pressure method (ASTM C 231) or the volum etric method (ASTM C 173). The “chase” air indicator shall not be used.

b. A minimum of one air content test shall be made in the morning and one

in the afternoon. Air content tests sh all be made on all concrete whether the concrete is designated as air-entrained or not.

c. Additional air content test s, for concrete specified as air-entrained, shall

be made when any of the following conditions occur:

1. A change in appearance or consistency of concrete.

2. Possible reduction of air content due to tim e delays of truck and/or hot weather.

3. When air temperature is over 80°F, check each truckload.

d. Inform Engineer immediately of any slump and/or air content tests that

do not meet these specifications. If str ength, durability or aesthetics of the structure would be impaired, that concrete shall not be used.

6. Concrete test reports shall contain the f ollowing information: concrete supplier,

quantity of concrete represented, location of sa mples taken, design strength requirement at 28 day s, list of all materials and admixtures used with quanti ty and brand or source, actual slu mp, actual air content, air tem perature, concrete



temperature, weather, cylinder weight as received, date molded, number of days on job site, date tested, test results fo r 7 and 28 days, and any other information necessary to evaluate test results.

7. Send one cop y of report s on all req uired laboratory testing directly to t he

Structural Engineer, two copies to the Architect, one copy to the Contractor and one copy to the concrete supplier. A copy of all test reports shall be in Engineer’s office within a minimum of 5 worki ng days from date of test or inspection.

8. Verbal information on a ny concrete not meeting these specifi cations shall be

communicated to the Engineer immediately by phone.

C. Contractor’s Responsibility: Provide a box f or storing concrete test specimen s while on job; maintain temperature in the box between 60 and 80°F; prevent loss of moisture from specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31.

D. Evaluation and acceptance of concrete: Section 1.7 and as follows: any test results on

in-place concrete conducted without prior knowledge and input of the Engineer, will not be accepted. Engineer reserves the right to re ject any non-destructive test results that he considers improperly calibrated or correlated.

E. Acceptance of Structure: Section 1.7 and as follows: if 28 da y test results do not m eet

requirements of Section 1.6.7. 1, the Engineer shall have the right to order a change in mix proportions for remaining porti ons of structure. He may require core tests in accordance with Section 1.6.5.3 to be made at Contractor’s expense. Any such testing shall be done by an independent testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

F. Testing agencies affidavit that construction is in conformance with the dra wings and

specifications. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Subm it data for propri etary materials and item s, including ad mixtures,

patching compounds, waterstops, joint sy stems, curing compounds, finish materials, and others as requested by Architect/Engineer.

B. Shop Drawings/Reinforcement: See ACI 301, Section 3.1. Detailing shall conform to

ACI 315-99 “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement”.

C. Shop drawings shall indicate the date of the structural drawings that were used to prepare the shop drawings.

D. Shop drawing submittals shall be returned to t he Architect after review by the Structural

Engineer. Allow ten (10) working days for review of shop drawings b y the Structural Engineer.

E. Mix Design: See paragraph 2.7 herein for submittal requirements.



1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. See ACI 301, Section 3.1.2. B. Store reinforcement off the ground to avoid soiling by foreign materials.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Where applicable, reference is made herein to material requirements given in ACI 301. B. Use manufactured materials in accordance with ma nufacturer’s recommendations. If

such recommendations differ from requirements specified herein, call to Engineer’ s attention before proceeding. Generally, the more stringent requirements will apply.

2.2 FORM MATERIALS

A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 2.2, except as noted. B. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork for

exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. F urnish in largest practic able sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint s ystem shown on drawings. Pro vide form material with sufficien t thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without bow or deflection.

C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed

in finished structure with ply wood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.

D. Form Coatings: Provide co mmercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not

bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.3 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcement: As per ACI 301, Section 3. 2, with selections and suppl ements as

follows:

1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade as noted on drawings.

2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185 for plain wire.

3. Steel Fibers: Steel fibers shall be “Novocon 1050” Steel Fibers as supplied by SI concrete systems of Chattanooga, TN.

a. Fibers shall be manufactured specifically for concrete reinforcement using

cold drawn steel wire, deformed, with hooked ends. b. Fiber material to conform to ASTM A820, Type I, low carbon, cold drawn,

deformed steel wire with a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 152 ksi.



c. Fiber length shall be 2 inches. d. Average equivalent diameter of fibre of 0.039 inch, with an aspect ratio of

approximately 50. e. Deformations: Hooked ends.

B. Supports for Reinforcement: Provi de such items as bolsters, chairs and spacers for

supporting, spacing and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wi re fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications, unless otherwise acceptable. Supports shall be of the following types:

1. Class C (Plastic Coated): Support for members with soffits exposed to view, and

where plaster or other coatings are to be applied directly to concrete.

2. Class A (Bright Basic): Supports for all other soffits.

3. Precast Concrete Blocks: Support reinforcement for slabs on grade. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Cements, admixtures, water and aggregates shall conform to ACI 301, Section 4.2, with selections and supplements as specified herein.

B. Cements: All cements used shall be Portland Cements conforming to ASTM C 150,

Type I or II I, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. Use one brand of ce ment throughout project.

C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Type C or Type F.

1. Use of fly ash not to exceed 25% of cement content by weight. 2. Use permitted in non-exposed foundation base concrete only.

D. Admixtures:

1. Conform to the following requirements.

a. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

b. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, T ype A, containing no t

more than 0.1% chloride ions.

c. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasti-cizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions.

d. Water-Reducing, Nonchloride Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494,

Type E, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions.

e. Water-Reducing, Retarding Adm ixture: ASTM C 494, Type D, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions.



f. Certification: Upon Enginee r’s request provide ad mixture manufacturer’s written certification th at chloride ion content c omplies with specified requirements.

g. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions

are not permitted.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, ad mixtures used shall be products of one of the following. Where more than one admixture is used in a concrete mix, they shall be of same manufacturer.

a. Chem-Masters Corp. b. Euclid Chemical Co. c. Construction Products Div/W.R.Grace & Co. d. Master Builders Div/Martin Marietta Corp. e. Sika Corp.

3. When requested by Engineer or Contr actor, a qu alified concrete technician

employed by the adm ixture manufacturer shall be available to assist in proportioning concrete mixes, to advise on proper use of ad mixture(s), and to make subsequent adjustment of mixes to suit job and climatic conditions.

4. Procedures and equi pment for use of superplasticizer shall be subm itted to the

Engineer for review with mix design. Proposed procedure shall have been tested under job conditions with actual materials to be used in the mix.

E. Aggregates:

1. Upon Engineer’s request furnish test reports from an approved testing laboratory showing compliance of aggregates with specifications.

2. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, and as herein specified, from a single

source.

3. Local aggregates not co mplying with ASTM C 33 but which h ave shown by special test or actual s ervice to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to the Engineer/Architect.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 5. 3.6, with selections and supplements as specified herein.

B. Curing Compound: (See Section 5. 3.6.4 paragraph curing and protection herein for

restrictions on use of curing compound.)

1. Liquid membrane-forming type (sodium silicate type not appr oved) meeting all requirements of ASTM C 309, T ype 1-D clear or translucent, having a fu gitive dye to facilitate visual check of coverage. Use of Type 2 white pigmented type is recommended during hot weather.



2. Instructions on containers of compound delivered to the job shall clearly state the maximum coverage rate which meets ASTM C 309 water retention requirement (0.55 kilogram/sq. meter/72 hr.).

3. On slabs to be exposed, curing com pound shall also perform the additional

functions of hardening, dustproofing, etc.

C. Moisture-Retaining Sheet Materials: Any of the types listed in and meeting requirements of ASTM C 171: waterproof paper, 4 mil (.004”) polyethylene film, white burlap/polyethylene sheet.

D. Sealing Materials: For laps in sheet covering, provide pressure sensitive tape,

nonstaining mastic, or other effective adhesive recommended by covering manufacturer.

E. Finishing Aid: Spray able material designed to for m a monomolecular film on fresh plastic concrete, and to retard moisture evaporation prior to finishing; such as Confilm of Master Builders Co.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell type of centerbulb type waterstops at construction

joints and other joints as indicated, sized to suit joints, either rubber, Corps of Engineers (CE) CRD-C 513, or polyvinyl chloride (pvc), CE CRD-C 572.

B. Premolded Joint Filler: (See ACI 301, Section 6.2). For use in expansion or isolation

joints, size ½” thick x full depth of slab; either ASTM D 1751 or D 1752, and compatible with type of joint sealant used.

C. Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base mater ial where

indicated. U se only materials which are resistant to decay when t ested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:

1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 10 mils thick. 2. Water resistant barrier paper consisting of heavy Kraft papers laminated together

with glass fiber reinforcement and overco ated with black poly ethylene on each side; Moistop of Fortifiber Co., or approved equal.

D. Bonding Compound: Use where fresh concrete is placed on or against hardened concrete

for repairs (see paragraph 3.5A herein).

1. For uses where concrete will not become wet under norm al service conditions; polyvinyl acetate or acry lic base, rewet table type. Subject to com pliance with requirements, acceptable products include:

a. Polyweld; Chem-Masters Corp. b. EucoWeld; Euclid Chemical Co. c. Daraweld C; W.R.Grace. d. Weldcrete; Larsen Products. e. Everbond; L & M Construction Chemicals.



2.7 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 4.2.3, except as noted. B. No concrete shall be placed until the pr oposed concrete mix has been submitted in

writing and reviewed by the Engineer.

C. All concrete shall be normal weight concrete, 145 pcf, except where otherwise specified. Concrete shall conform to the following water-cement ratios if proportioning by trial mix or previous experience as outlined in ACI is unavailable:

Normal Weight Concrete: Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days Maximum Water-Cement Ratio: 0.58 (non-air-entrained) 0.46 (air-entrained) Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days Maximum Water-Cement Ratio: 0.46 (non-air-entrained) 0.36 (air-entrained)

D. Use of Admixtures:

1. All concrete shall conta in the speci fied water-reducing adm ixture. When increased workability or pumpability, lower water-cement ratio and higher ultimate and/or initial stre ngths are required, superpl asticizer may be used. Ai r-entraining admixture shall be used w here required to achieve specified ai r content.

2. Concrete containing superplasticizer shall have a maximum slump of 8” after the

addition of superplasticizer at the tr uck unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. This concrete shall arrive at the job site having slum p between 2 and 3”, be verified, and then the superpla sticizer added to reach approved slump level. Other concrete shall have a maximum slump of 4”.

E. Selection of Proportions:

1. Proportions for all classes of concrete sh all be selected by one of the methods described in Section 4.2.3 of ACI 301. Mixes must be approved by the Engineer before use on the job. No deviations from the approved mixes will be permitted without Engineer’s prior approval.

2. Mix designs proportioned on the basis of previo us field exp erience or trial

mixtures (Section 4.2. 3.1) shall have been prepared by an indep endent testing laboratory within the past 12 months.

3. For computation of standard deviation re ferred to in Section 4.2.3.2 of ACI 301,

show data in tabular form.



2.8 CONCRETE PRODUCTION A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 5, except as noted. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Use for all work, ex cept that when small quantities (not over ½

cu yd) are needed for iso lated or relat ively unimportant items, concrete may be batch mixed at site, subject to Architect’s prior approval.

C. Delivery Ticket: In addit ion to information required on the delivery ticket in ASTM C

94, the following data regarding water, e xpressed in gal./cu yd, shall be shown on the delivery ticket or on an attached batch ticket for each truckload of concrete:

1. Mix design water requirement. 2. Free water in aggregate. 3. Water added at plant. 4. Permissible water to add at job site.

D. Mixing Time: Concrete which has at tained its initial set or has contained water for

longer than listed below, shall not be deposited in the work.

Concrete Temperature Maximum Time At Time of Placement, °F Before Placement, Hr.

Under 80 1-1/2 80 to 85 1-1/4 86 to 90 1 Over 90 1, with Architect’s approval dependent on slump and use.

2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 3.2.2, except as follows:

1. No welding of reinforci ng bars will be perm itted without approval of the Engineer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK

A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 2.3.1, except as noted. B. Form Design and Construction: Design, erect , support, brace and m aintain formwork to

support vertical and lateral loads that m ight be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete s tructure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation a nd position. Arrange forms and supports to be readily removable without i mpact, shock or da mage to cast-in-p lace concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.

C. Earth Forms: Earth cuts may be used as for ms for footing vertical surfaces, if sides are

sharp and true, and not exposed in finished structure.



D. Form and Shore Removal: See Section 2.3.2 of this specification.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCMENT

A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 3.3.2. B. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing St eel Institute (CRSI) reco mmended practice fo r

“Placing Reinforcing Bars”, for details a nd methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified.

3.3 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.6, with joint locations as noted. B. Construction Joints: L ocate and install c onstruction joints as indicated, o r if no t

indicated, locate so a s not to im pair strength and appearance of structure. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2” deep in construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; except bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. Place construction joints perpendicular to m ain reinforcement. Continue reinforce ment across construction joints unless noted otherwise.

1. Construction joints shall be spaced at the following maximum distances:

a. Exterior and interior walls – 30 feet

b. Footings – 125 feet

C. General: It is this Contractor’s responsibilit y to coordinate with all trades for the setting

of the sleev es, anchors, dovetail slots, inserts, frames, flashing reglets, and other embedded items and provi de all openings required for the installation of other work in accordance with the Contractor’s shop drawings and certified prints.

D. Structural Integrity: Provide no sleeves or op enings in structural concrete unless shown

on the structural drawings or approved by the Engineer. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 5.3, except as noted. B. Preparation Before Placing:

1. Cleaning: Remove loose mill scale an d rust, dirt and other coatings that would

reduce or destroy bond from reinforcing steel. Thorou ghly clean forms of hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris.

2. Sprinkling Slab Underbed: At slab ar eas on ground where there is no moisture

barrier, sprinkle granular underbed sufficiently and uniformly with clean water to eliminate loss of water from concrete.



C. Placing: No concrete shall be pla ced except when Architect or independent testin g laboratory representative is present, unless this requirement is specifically waived by the Architect. Give adequate notice to the Ar chitect, the te sting laboratory, and all contractors affected before placing concrete. Allow adequate time for installation of all necessary parts.

D. Hot Weather Placing:

1. When hot weather conditions exist th at would im pair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.

2. Cool ingredients before mixing to mainta in concrete te mperature at ti me of

placement below 90°F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.

3. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if i t becomes too ho t, so that

steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel and subgrade just before concrete is placed.

3.5 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS

A. General: As per ACI 30 1, Section 5.3.7, except that conceale d concrete s urfaces not

exposed to view upon completion, may be patched with nonshrink mortar in lieu of ACI specified mortar.

3.6 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 5.3.3, with selections as follows:

1. Rough Form Finish: Use for formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work.

2. Smooth Form Finish: Use for form ed concrete surfaces to be covered with a

coating or covering material applied direc tly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system.

3. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Use for formed concrete surfaces ex posed to view,

except use sm ooth form finish for expo sed overhead surfaces, whether or not painted.

3.7 SLABS

A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.3, except as noted. B. Float Finish: Do not overwork concrete: Work only sufficiently to achieve the following

flatness levelness tolerances:

Slab on Grade Mall: FF 25 FL 20 min local FF 17 FL 15



Upper level slab shall be placed to achieve a level surfa ce. Beams and girders ar e approximately cambered for the weight of the concrete.

C. Saw-cut slab on grade as soon as possi ble after final finishing. Damage to surface by

raveling of cut edges by sawing is to be avoided. Use ‘Soff-Cu t’ sawing method with skid plate.

3.8 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: As per ACI 301, Section 5.3.6, except as noted. Requi rements for curing and

protection specified in ACI 301 shall be strictly observed, with particular emphasis on the following:

1. Initial curing may be accom plished by an y of the methods given in ACI 301,

Section 5.3.6.4, except as noted, using materials specified herein.

2. Maintain initial curing for approximately 12 hours after finishing. Increase this period to 24 hours when air temperature is 75°F and above.

3. Total curing period shall consist of 7 cu mulative days, (3 da ys for high-early

strength concrete) not necessarily consecutive, during which air in contact with concrete is above 50°F.

4. For formed surfaces, keep wood forms in contact with concrete wet, as well as

steel forms heated by the sun. After fo rm removal, maintain curing for any time remaining of required curing period.

B. Weather Requirements:

1. Warm, Dry, or Windy Weather: Use finishing aid specifi ed herein to reduc e moisture evaporation from freshly placed concrete when it is exposed to rapid drying conditions: direct sunlight, low humidity, heated interior, high wind, etc. Prepare dilute solution and spray apply on rate of 10 to 20 gallons solution/5000 sq.ft. If drying conditions are particularly severe, make additional applications as required following various finishing steps.

C. Use of Curing Methods: Maintain curing protection in good condition during required

period. Repair, reapply or replace when necessary.

1. Water: When excessive amounts of water are used for curing, provide means for removal so that harmful effects to other construction and to earth surfaces will be minimized.

2. Waterproof Sheet Materials: These will be permitted for initial curing only. Use

largest practical size shee ts. Lap joints not less than 4” and seal carefully. Anchor covering securely in place.

3. Curing Compounds:

a. Restrictions on Use: Do not use curing com pound on surfaces over

which homogeneous sheet material will be applied. For surfa ces to



receive other finishes, subm it well in advance of time for curing application, written acceptance of curing com pound by bot h the manufacturer and the installer of the finish m aterial, relative to compatibility therewith of finish material, including primers, adhesives, and similar materials. If manufacturer of finish material has n ot been determined, General Con tractor shall be responsibl e for coordi nating such acceptance.

b. Application: Apply uniformly at a coverage rate not less than that stated

by manufacturer which meets ASTM C 309 moisture retention requirement (0.55 kilogram/sq. meter/72 hr.).

4. Reflective Materials: During hot sunny weather (generally 75°F and above) use

of white or light colored curing materials is reco mmended to help keep do wn concrete surface temperature. White or gray pigmented curing compound shall not be used when determined by the Architect to be objectionable.

3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by

other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place a nd cure concrete as he rein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete i s

still green and steel-trowel ing surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersection s and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using specified non-m etallic nonshrink

grout.

END OF SECTION


STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 034100 - 1

SECTION 034100 - STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general pr ovisions of Contract, including General and Su pplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.


A. Extent of structural precast concrete work is shown on drawings and in schedules.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 04200 – Mortar

2. Section 07900 – Joint Sealants 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise indicated:

1. ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings”.

2. ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete”.

3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual of Standard Practice”.

4. Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL 116, “Manual for Quality Control for Plants

and Production of Precast Concrete Products”. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Su bmit manufacturer’s specifications and i nstructions for manufactured materials and products. I nclude manufacturer’s certifications and l aboratory test reports as required.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings showing com plete information for fabrication an d

installation of precast concrete units. Indicate member dimensions and cross-section; location, size and type of reinforcement, including special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection.

2. Indicate layout, dimensions, and identification of each precast unit corresponding

to sequence and procedure of installation. Indicate welded connections b y AWS standard symbols. Detail inserts, conn ections, and joints, including accessorie s and construction at openings in precast units.



3. Include erection procedure for precast units and sequence of erection.

C. Calculations: Provide co mplete design calculations prepared by a Registered Engineer, licensed in State where project is erected.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times to assure continuity of installation. Store units at project site to preven t cracking, d istortion, staining, or o ther physical damage, and so that markings are visible. Lift an d support units at designated lift points.

B. Deliver anchorage items which are to be embedded in other construction before start of

such work. Provide setting diagrams, tem plates, instructions and directions as required for installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESTRESSING TENDONS

A. Uncoated, 7-wire stress-relieved strand complying with ASTM A 416, Grade 250. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III.

B. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, or C 330.

C. Water: Drinkable and free fro m foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete and embedded steel.

2.3 CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates: Structural quality, hot-rolled carbon steel, ASTM A 283, Grade C.

B. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, low-carbon steel bol ts, regular hexagon nuts and carbon steel washers.

D. Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, a nd other accessories required for installation of

project units and for support of subsequent construction or finishes. 2.4 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/ 2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

B. Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Pre-mixed, nonmetallic, no ncorrosive,

nonstaining product cont aining selected s ilica sands, portland cement, shrinkage



compensating agents, plas ticizing and wate r reducing agents, com plying with CRD-C621.

2.5 HOLLOW SLAB UNITS

A. Type: Precast prestressed concrete units with open voids running full length of slabs.

B. Furnish units which are free of voids or honeycomb, with straight true edges and surfaces.

C. Provide “Standard Finish” units unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fabrication: Manufacture units of concrete materials which will provi de a mini mum

3500 psi com pressive strength at ti me of initial prestress and a 28 day compressive strength of 5000 psi.

E. Adequately reinforce slab units to resist transporting and handling stresses.

F. Include cast-in weld plates where required for anchorage or lateral bracing to structural

steel members.

G. Cooperate with other trades for installation of items to be cast- in hollow slab units. Notify Contractor of items not received in ample time so as not to delay work.

H. Provide headers of cast-in-place concre te or structural steel shap es for openings larger

than one s lab width in accordan ce with hollow slab unit manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Welding: Pe rform welding in compliance with AWS D 1.1, incl uding qualification of welders. Protect units from damage by fiel d welding or cutting operations and provide noncombustible shield as required.

B. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Do not u se powder-actuated fasteners for surface

attachment of acc essory items in prec ast prestressed unit, without prior approval of precast manufacturer.

C. Installation Tolerances: Install precast units without exceeding t he following tolerance

limits:

1. Variations from Level or Elevation: ¼” in any 20’ run; ½” in any 40’ run; total plus or minus ½” at any location.

2. Variation from Position in Plan: Plus or minus ½” maximum at any location.

3. Offsets in Alignment of Adjacent Members at Any Joint: 1/16” in any 10’ run;

¼” maximum.



D. Grouting Connections and Joints: After pr ecast concrete units have been placed and secured, grout open spaces at connection and jo ints with cement grout or nonmetallic nonshrink grout, as follows:

1. Provide forms or other acceptable method to r etain grout in place unt il

sufficiently hard to support itself. Fill spaces 100% with grout material, and compact until voids are filled and all bonding surfaces coated 100%.

2. Place grout to finish smooth, plumb, and level with adjac ent concrete surfaces.

Keep grouted joints dam p for not less t han 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove excess grout material from exposed surfaces before it hardens.

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL EVALUATIONS

A. The Owner may employ a separate testing laboratory to evaluate precast manufacturer’s quality control and testing methods.

B. The precast manufacturer shall allow Owner’ s testing facility access to materials storage

areas, concrete production equipm ent, and c oncrete placement and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner’s testing laboratory and provide samples of materials and concrete mixes as may be requested for additional testing and evaluation.

C. Dimensional Tolerances:

1. Units having dimensions smaller or greater than required, and outside specified

tolerance limits, will be subject to additional testing as herein specified.

2. Precast units having dimensions greater than req uired will be rej ected if appearance or function of the structure is adversely affected, or if large r dimensions interfere with other constr uction. Rep air, or rem ove and replace rejected units as required to meet construction conditions.

D. Strength of Units: The strength of precast concrete units will be considered potentially

deficient if manufacturing processes fail to co mply with any requirements which may affect strength of precast units, including the following conditions:

1. Failure to meet compressive strength test requirements.

2. Reinforcement, pretensioning and d etensioning of tendons of prestressed

concrete, not conforming to specified fabrication requirements.

3. Concrete curing and protection of precast units against extremes in temperature, not as specified.

4. Precast units damaged during handling and erection.

E. Testing Precast Units: When there is ev idence that the strength of precast concr ete units

does not m eet specification requirements, the conc rete testing service shall take core s drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination, complying with ASTM C 42 or as follows:



1. Take at least 3 representative cores from precast units of suspect strength, from locations directed by Architect.

2. Test cores in an air-dry condition per AC I 318 if concrete will be dry during use

of completed structure; in a saturated-s urface-dry condition if concrete will be wet during use.

3. Strength of concrete for each seri es of cores will b e considered satisfactory if

their average compressive strength is at least 85% of the 28 da y design compressive strength.

4. Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are made, with copies

to the Architect, Contractor, and precast manufacturer. Include in test reports the project identification name and num ber, date, name of precast conc rete manufacturer, name of concrete testing service, identification letter, name, and type of m ember(s) represented by core tests, d esign compressive strength, compression breaking strength and ty pe of break (corrected for length-diam eter ratio), direction of applied load to core with respect to horizontal plan of concrete as placed, and moisture condition of core at time of bearing.

F. Patching: Where core test results are satisfactory and precast units are acceptable for use

in work, fill cores solid with patching m ortar, and finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces.

G. Defective Work: Precast concrete units which do not conform to specified requirements,

including strength, tolerances, and finishes, shall be replaced with precast concrete units that meet requirements of this Section. Contractor shall also be responsible for cost of corrections to their work affected by or resulting from corrections to precast concrete work.

END OF SECTION


UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Face brick.

2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).

B. See Division 05 Section " Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles fo r unit masonry.

C. See Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing m anufactured reglets installed in masonry joints for metal flashing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For re inforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit m asonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."

C. Samples for each type and color of exposed masonry units and colored mortars.

D. Material Certificates: Fo r each ty pe of produc t indicated. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirem ents including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.

1. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 67. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140. 3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780



4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistanc e ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing a nd inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other m eans, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.

1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Co mply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requir ements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Sub ject to co mpliance with requirements, products th at may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

B. Exposed Masonry Units: Match existing.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Shapes: Provide special shapes for li ntels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2150 psi (14.8 MPa).

2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.



2.3 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBX.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).

2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm ) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67.

3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been t ested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced."

4. Size (Actual Dimensions): To match existing.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Ty pe III may be used for cold-w eather construction.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 Type S.

D. Mortar Pigments: Iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend m ade from portland cem ent and lime or masonry cement and m ortar pigments, all co mplying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.

1. Formulate blend as required to produce color to match existing.

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) th ick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.



1. Available Products: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA. d. Or Approved equal.

I. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951; mill galvanized, carbon-steel wire for interior walls and hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.

1. Wire Size for Side Rods W2.8 or 0.188-inch (4.8-mm) diameter. 2. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch (4.8-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W2.8 or 0.188-inch (4.8-mm) diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 5. Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 6. Multiwythe Masonry:

a. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) in width, plus 1 side r od at each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) or less in width.

b. Tab type, with 1 side rod at each f ace shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

c. Adjustable (two-piece) type, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with ties that extend into facing wythe. Ties engage e yes or slots in reinforcement and extend at least halfway through facing w ythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at le ast halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16- mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 m m) wide.



1. Wire: Fabricate from 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors

1. General: Provide anchors that allow ver tical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows:

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wir e tie and a metal anchor section.

a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, and slotted holes for inserting wire tie.

b. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections from 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, st eel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

c. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated fro m 0.188-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Metal Drip Edges: Fabric ate from stainless steel. Extend at lea st 3 inches (75 mm ) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge be nt down 30 degrees and hemmed.

2. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and out to exterior face o f wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

3. Metal Expansion-Joint St rips: Fabricate fro m stainless steel or copper to shapes indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: For fl ashing not exposed to t he exterior, use one of t he following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft . (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth.

2. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite fl ashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt com pound, bonded to a high-den sity, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).

3. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing pr oduct consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy 0.025 inch (0.6 mm) thick, with a 0.015-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick coating of rubberized-asphalt adhesive.



4. EPDM Flashing: S heet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Pre molded filler strips com plying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made fro m styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and d esigned to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: As phalt-saturated, organic roofing felt co mplying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear buty rate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89 mm) long.

2. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, fl exible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inc h (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

3. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining m esh, made fro m polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Strips, full-depth of cavit y and 10 inches (250 mm) wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep.

b. Strips, not le ss than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 10 i nches (250 mm ) wide, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and pre vent weep holes from being clogged with mortar.

c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.

2.9 INSULATION

A. Loose-Granular Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for water repellency and li mited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface tr eated for wa ter repellency and to limit dust generation).



B. Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation f ormed by t he expansion of poly styrene-resin beads or granules in a clo sed mold to com ply with ASTM C 578, Type I. P rovide specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units.

C. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, closed-cell product ex truded with an integral skin.

D. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I (aluminum-foil-faced), Class 2 (glass-fiber-reinforced).

2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer' s standard-strength cleaner designed for rem oving mortar/grout stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use produ ct approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to portland

cement and lime. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same ra te for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. 4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions use Type N.

C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cem ent product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

B. Select and ar range units for exposed unit mas onry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

C. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:

1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door ja mbs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurat e spacing of surface bond patterns wit h uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, m ovement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, p articularly at corners, ja mbs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonr y: Unless ot herwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal f ace dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sectio ns. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs full y bedded in mortar in grouted m asonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fu lly bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.



B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head j oints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints a nd shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thum bprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

A. Pour granular insulation into cavities to fill voi d spaces. M aintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been confirmed. Limit the fall of insulation to 1 story in height, but not more than 20 feet (6 m).

3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or face s structural members to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 in ch (13 m m) in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors em bedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated , but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall fram ing and/or concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and/or to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners.

2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 1 inch (25 mm ) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.

4. Space anchors as indicated , but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 s q. ft. (0.25



sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 i nches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.

3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install em bedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated

B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are s mooth and free fro m projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with m ortar. Before cover ing with m ortar, seal penetrations in flashing as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

3. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexibl e flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

C. Install weep holes in head joints in e xterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with

loose-fill insulation.

D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to co mply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork an d Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to pr ovide shape, line, and d imensions of co mpleted masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Bra ce, tie, and support forms to maintain position an d shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not rem ove forms and shores unt il reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight a nd other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until enti re height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.



1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for c leanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspectors: Owner may engage qualified indepe ndent inspectors to perfor m inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors a ccess to scaffolding and work area s, as needed to perform inspections.

1. Place grout only after inspectors have v erified compliance of grout space s and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

B. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests f or each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or por tion thereof.

D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.

F. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each m ix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.

3.11 PARGING

A. Parge exterior faces of be low-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm) with a steel-trowel finish. F orm a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.12 CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit m asonry as wo rk progresses by dry brus hing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sam ple wall pane l; leave one-half of panel uncleaned fo r comparison purposes.

2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall sur faces with water before a pplying cleaners; re move cleaners pro mptly by

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.



4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cl eaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste Disposal as Fill M aterial: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soi l-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. 2. Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and

other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general pr ovisions of Contract, including General and Su pplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Sect ion. Shop drawing submittal shall conform to the requirements of this Section.


A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections, and type of stee l required.

B. Structural steel is that work defined in the American Institute of Steel Con struction

(AISC) “Code of Standard Practice ” and as otherwise shown on drawings. It includes steel columns, base plates, beams, and other steel ite ms which are a part of the building structure.

C. Furnish to the installer involved such items as bolts, anchor bolts, inserts, clip angles, and

sleeves, required for attach ment of ite ms specified in this Section, together wit h placement drawings and tolerances. This includes all plates and beam anchorage.

D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 03300 – Setting anchor bolts and embedded plates in concrete.

E. Work Provided by Others:

1. By the Contractor – Pay ment of costs for “Normal Testing and Inspection” and

as described hereinafter. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator shall have AISC Quality Certification: Standard for st eel building structures (STD).

B. The contractor shall provi de all shop and fiel d tests as required by AISC, in addition to

field quality control “Special Inspections” as outlined in the Structural General Notes and these specifications. The owner will hire a qualified, licensed Special Inspector to perform structural inspections. However, th ese inspections will not relieve the structural subcontractor from performing all of the quality control inspections listed.

C. Source Quality Control: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection

and tests in mill, shop, a nd field, conduc ted by a qualified inspection agency. S uch inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply.



1. The structural steel supplier shall certif y that both the structural steel and high strength bolts have been manufactured in the U nited States and meet the designated ASTM specifications.

2. High strength bolts without the manufacturer’s identifying symbol shall not be

used.

D. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Codes and S tandards: C omply with provisions of the foll owing, except as otherwise

indicated:

1. AISC “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” (2005).

a. Paragraph 3.3 of the abov e Code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: “Discrepancies exist between Design Drawings and Specifications, the Design Drawings shall govern.” Replace with: “In case of discrepancies between drawings and specifications for buildings, the more stringent requirements govern, unless deter mined otherwise by the Architect/Engineer.”

b. Paragraph 4.1 of the above Code is hereby modified as follows: Desig n

Drawings, that are provided as part of a contract bid package, are not to be considered to be released for construction.

c. Paragraph 4.4 of the abov e Code is hereby modified by deletion of the

following sentence: “These drawings shall be returned to the Fabrication within 14 calendar day s.” Add the fo llowing: “The Fabricator shall include a sufficient amount of time for return of shop drawings to allow 10 working days for review by the Structural Engineer. This may be waived on specific sub mittals with prior concurrence of Structural Engineer. F abricator shall subm it proposed schedu le of shop drawing submittals at start of detailing.”

d. Paragraph 4.4.2 of the above Code is hereby modified by addition of the

following: “If any of the additions, del etions or changes marked on the shop drawings results in an additio nal cost and/or time requ ired to fabricate and erect; a proposed Change Order, deta iling the added cost and/or time required, shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. This Change Order shall be approved before the work affected proceeds.”

e. Paragraph 9.4.1 of the above Code is hereby modified by addition of the

following: “ If any of the revisions results in an ad ditional cost and/or time to fabricate and erect; a proposed Change Order, detailing the added cost and/or time required, shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. This Change Order shal l be approved before t he work af fected proceeds.”



2. AISC “Specifications for Structural Joints using AS TM A 325 o r A 490 Bolt s” approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation.

3. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code”.

4. ASTM A 6 “General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes,

Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use”.

5. AISC “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel”.

6. All construction procedures and detailing and fabrication of structural steel shall conform with the latest OSHA requirements and recommendations.

F. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualif y welding processes and welding operators in

accordance with AWS “ Standard Qualification Procedure”. P rovide certification that welders to be employed in work have s atisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor’s responsibility.

G. Erectors shall have AISC Quality Certification: CSE. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Subm it producer’s or manufacturer’s specifications and i nstallation instructions for following products. If requested, submit laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications, including specified standards.

1. Structural steel and high strength bolt certification as noted in quality assurance.

2. Structural steel (each ty pe), including certified copies of mill reports covering

chemical and physical properties.

3. High strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.

4. Structural steel primer paint.

5. Shrinkage-resistant grout.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the s upervision of a registered Structural Engineer, including complete details and schedu les for the fabrication and assembly of structural ste el members, procedures and diagrams. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each

weld. Provide setting drawings, tem plates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. Provide calculations used for designing connections.



3. AISC standard double angle connection details shall be used for all connections that are not otherwise deta iled on the drawings. Where the reacti ons of beams and girders are not shown on the drawings, the connections shall be designed to support the maximum allowable uniform load as indicated in th e load tables of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction for the given beam size and span.

4. Shop drawings shall indicate the date of the structural drawings that were used to

prepare the shop drawings.

5. Shop drawing submittals shall be returned to the Architect after review by the Structural Engineer. Allow ten (10) working da ys for revie w of the shop drawings by the Structural Engineer.

C. Test Reports: Sub mit copy of reports of tests conducted on field bolted and welded

connections. Include data on t ypes of tests conducted and test results. Submit one copy directly to the Engineer of Record, on a ti mely basis, for review and for documentation records.


A. Deliver materials to site at such inter vals to insure uninterrupted progress of work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage de vices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay work.

B. Store materials to perm it easy access for in spection and identification. K eep steel

members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or oth er supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

C. Do not store materials on structure in a manne r that might cause distortion or damage to

members or supporting structures. Repair or replace dam aged materials or structures as directed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are sm ooth and free of surface blemishes including pitti ng, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Rem ove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating a nd applying of surface finishes.

B. Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A992, Grad e 50. Angles, Channels, Plates and Bars:

ASTM A36 as a minimum.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade A, black, except where indicated to be galvanized.

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 36, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.



F. High Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts,

and hardened washers, of quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 325TC for tension criti cal bolts. Al l bolts shall be marked with the manufacturer’s identifying symbol.

G. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.

H. Structural Steel Primer Paint:

1. Fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal primer; selected for good

resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish pai nt systems indicated and for capabilit y to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolo nged exposure; complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645.

2. Where prime painted steel is to receive sprayed-on fireproofing, the substrate

shall provide adequate adhesion. Coor dinate with fireproofi ng installer in selecting primer paint to be used to assure this requirement is met.

3. Primer paint shall be com patible with finish coat s on architecturally expos ed

steel.

I. Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Pr e-mixed, noncorrosive, nonstaining product containing selected silica sands, por tland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE-CRD-C621. Gr out shall attain 5,000 psi compressive strength at 3 days and 9,000 psi at 28 days.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indi cated on fina l shop drawings. Pr ovide camber in structural members where indicated. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

B. Connections:

1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.

2. All field connections shall be bolted. Only use field welded connections where

detailed on structural drawings. Each field welded connection shall be fully detailed on erection drawings.

3. All field welded connections surfaces shall be unprimed.

4. Provide high strength threaded fasteners for all bolted connections.

5. Do not paint adjoining surfaces at slip-critical connections.



C. High Strength Bolted Construction: Install in accordance with AISC “Specifi cations for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts”.

D. Welded Construction: Com ply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and qualit y

of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

E. Equipment Supports and Mechanical Opening Framing: Framing shown on structural drawings is for general arrangement only and may require modification to suit the actual purchased equipment. Coordinate with mechanical trades f or necessary certified drawings before starting fabrication. Steel Fabricato r shall provide a complete job ready for installation of equipment, and Contract price shall cover this r equirement regardless of subsequent modifications to fram ing shown on drawings, a t no extra cost to the Owner.

F. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required fo r securing other work to structural steel

framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. Cut, dr ill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flam e cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop prime structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Pain t embedded steel which is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2” of embedded areas only.

1. Do not paint surface s which are to b e welded or high-strengt h bolted with

friction-type connections.

B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatte r, slag or flux de posits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:

1. All other steel SP3 power tool cleaned.

C. Painting: Immediately after surface pr eparation, apply structural steel pri mer paint in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 m ils. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces (apply two (2) coats of paint to those surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection). Runs shall be minimized.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Before starting erection of structural st eel, verify all bearing elev ations and anchor bolt locations. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer. Do not proceed until corrections have been made.



3.2 ERECTION A. All construction and fabrication procedu res shall conform with OSHA requirements and

local code requirements. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with

connections of sufficient strength to bear i mposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignm ent of structures as erectio n proceeds.

C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to

effectively complete work.

D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work . Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations.

E. Erect mall steel concurrently from both ends of mall starting at both Macy’s and

Nordstroms.

F. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates:

1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducin g materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices.

2. Tighten anchor bolts after supporte d members have been positioned a nd

plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if p rotruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout.

3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no

voids remain. Finish exposed surface s, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Field Assembly:

1. Set structural frames accurately to line s and elevati ons indicated. Align and

adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact be fore assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

2. Level and plum b individual members of structure within sp ecified AISC

tolerances. For beams which support steel joists, maintain such tolerances as will assure specified minimum joist bear ing. Temperature corrections shall be applied so that the structure will be pl umb and will have clearances specifi ed at 70 degrees F.



3. Splice members only where indicated on structural drawings or as accepted on shop drawings. Mem bers over 60 feet in length m ay be field s pliced at third point unless noted otherwise.

4. Tighten slip-critical bolts in accordan ce with A ISC by the turn-of-the nut

method, by the direct tension indicator or by properly calibrated wrenches.

5. Bearing bolts shall be tightened such that all plies of connecting material have been brought into snug contact with a minimum torque of 75 to 100 ft-lbs.

H. Erection Bolts: On AESS and other exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts,

fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

I. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, ad equacy of temporary connections, alignment, and rem oval of paint on s urfaces adjacent to field welds. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondar y bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

J. Cutting and Fitting: Should any difficulties be encountered, the Contractor shall request

written instructions from the Engineer, before proceeding with the work. No cutting of sections, either flanges, webs, stem s or angl es shall be done with out permission of t he Engineer, unless cutting is shown on the drawings.

K. Touch-Up Painting: All touchup painting of steel to receive fin ish paint shall be the

responsibility of the steel contractor. Touch-up of st eel not receiving finish paint is not required.

3.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing and inspection ag ency (see Special Inspections Schedule on drawings) shall be engaged to inspect hi gh-strength bolted co nnections and welded connections and to perfor m tests and prepare test reports. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each repor t whether test speci mens comply with requirements, noting any deviations therefrom.

B. Testing work shall be done under supervision of a registered engineer. After completion

of the work of this Section, testing agency shall certify that work conform s to structural drawings. This certification shall bear registered engineer’s seal.

C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated

or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Engineer reserves right, at any time before final ac ceptance, to reject material not comply ing with specified requirements.

D. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test reports

have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor’s expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work.



E. Field Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. Check at least one bolt on every connection. Bearing bolts tightened to a snug fit condition onl y require a visual inspection. Friction b olts require a turn-of-the-nut or calibrated wrench method of inspection.

F. Shop and Field Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication and/or erection of structural

steel. Certify welders and conduct ins pections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required an d performed to correct deficiencies. Perform visual inspection of all w elds, and perform ultrasonic tests of all full penetration welds in accordance with ASTM E 164.

END OF SECTION


STEEL JOISTS 052100 - 1

SECTION 052100 – STEEL JOISTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specificati on Sections, apply to work of this Section. Shop drawing submittal shall conform to the requirements of this Section.


A. Extent of steel joists is shown on dra wings, including basic layout and t ype of joists required. The work includes steel joists, br idging, headers, erection bolts and joist end anchors.

B. Definition: The term “Steel Joists” as used herein includes not only the applicable Series

units as classified by the Steel Joist Institute, but also joist girder units, all as indicated.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 05120 – Structural steel including loose individual or continuous bearing plates, and bolts or anchors for such plates.

D. Work Provided by Others:

1. By the Owner – Payment of costs for testing and inspection as described herein.


A. Standards: Provide joist s fabricated in co mpliance with the Steel Joist Instit ute (SJI) Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for types of joists indicated, and as herein specified.

B. All construction procedur es and detailing and fabri cation of steel joists shall conform

with the latest OSHA requirements and recommendations.

C. Qualification of Field Welding:

1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in ac cordance with the American Welding Society (AWS) Standard Qualification Procedure.

2. Joists welded in place are subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of steel joists for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove and replace work fo und to be defective and provide new acceptable work.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Upon Engineer’s request, s ubmit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist and accessories. Include manufacturer’ s certification that joists comply with SJI Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of j oist units, special connections,

jointing and accessories. Include mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bri dging. Pr ovide design cal culations and section pro perties for all joist girders and for joists with special loading requirements.

2. Provide templates or location drawings for installation of anchor bolts and/ or

bearing plates.

3. Shop drawings shall indicate the date of the structural drawings that were used to prepare the shop drawings.

4. Shop drawing submittals shall consist of a direct reading transparency plus 2

prints of each drawing. The transparency and one (1) print will be returned to the Architect after review by the Structural Engineer. Allow ten (10) working days for review of the shop drawings by the Structural Engineer.


A. Deliver, store and handle s teel joists as recommended in SJI Specifications. Handle and store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Comply with SJI Specifications.

B. Bolts:

1. High strength threaded fasteners shall conform to ASTM A325.

2. All erection bolts shall conform to ASTM A325.

C. Steel Primer Paint: Comply with SJI S pecifications; asphalt type coating not permitted. Primer paint shall be co mpatible with finish coats on architecturally exposed joists (if any).

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI Specifications. Joists in place shall be capable of resisting uplift loads as indicated on drawings. ( See Structural General Notes).



B. Holes in Chord Members: Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing other work to steel joists; however, deduc t area of holes from the area of chord when calculating strength of m ember per AISC Part 5, Specifications and Codes, Section B. Butt welded splices in bottom chord will not be permitted in middle 50% of span without a splice plate.

C. Extended Ends: Provide ex tended ends on joists where sho wn, complying with

manufacturer’s standards and requirements of applicable SJI Specifications a nd load tables.

D. Bridging: Provide horizontal and diagonal type bridging for open web joists, complying

with SJI Specifications. Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or beams. [ For joist girders, provide bottom chord bracing as shown or as required by manufacturer.]

E. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent construction,

complying with SJI Specifications.

F. Header Units: Provide header units to suppor t tail joists at openings in flo or or roof system not framed with steel shapes.

G. Shop Painting: Rem ove loose scale, heav y rust, and other foreign materials fro m

fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint. Apply one shop coat of primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 2.0 mil.

H. Identification: Use manufacturer’s standard method to identify steel joists before leaving

shop, attached in manner to be visible after erection. Show identification code on shop drawings.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Before starting erection of steel joists, verify all be aring elevations and that minimum bearing tolerances specified by SJI are pr ovided. Report any discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer. Do not proceed until corrections have been made.

3.2 ERECTION

A. General: Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI Sp ecifications, final shop drawings, and as herein specified.

B. Placing Joists:

1. Do not start placing steel joists until s upporting work is in place and secured.

Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening.

2. Provide minimum 2-1/2” bearing for K-series joist on steel.



3. Provide minimum 4” bearing for K-series joist on masonry or concrete.

4. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction. Where open web joist lengths are 40 feet and longer, install a center row of bolted bridging to provide lateral stability before slackening of hoisting lines.

C. Bridging: Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads

are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or beams.

D. Fastening Joists:

1. Field weld joists to supporting ste el framework in accordance with SJI

Specifications for t ype of joists u sed. Coor dinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists.

E. Touch-Up Painting For Joists That Receive Fini sh Coats: After joist installation, paint

field bolt heads and nuts, and welded a reas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting.

3.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing and inspection ag ency (see Special Inspections Schedule on drawings) shall be engaged to inspect welded connections and to certify that the work is in accordance with structural drawings. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, noting any deviations therefrom.

B. Testing work shall be done under supervision of a registered engineer. After completion

of the work of this Section, testing agency shall certify that work conform s to structural drawings. This certification shall bear registered engineer’s seal.

END OF SECTION


METAL DECKING 053000 - 1

SECTION 053000 – METAL DECKING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specificati on Sections, apply to work of this Section. Shop drawing submittal shall conform to the requirements of this Section.


A. Extent of metal decking is indicated on drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 09900 – Field painting of underside where exposed.

C. Work Provided by Others:

1. By the Owner – Pay ment of costs for testing and inspection as describ ed

hereinafter. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Com ply with provisions of the followin g codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated or specified:

1. AISI “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

2. AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code”.

3. SDI “Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks”.

B. All construction procedur es and detailing of m etal deck shall conform with the latest

OSHA requirements and recommendations.

C. Qualification of Field Welding: Qua lify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS “Welder Qualification” procedures of AWS D1.1.

D. Testing: Welded decking in place is s ubject to inspection and testing. Re move work

found to be defective and replace with new acceptable work.

E. FM Listing: Provide metal roof deck units which have been evaluated by Factory Mutual and are listed in “FM Approval Guide” for Class I construction.



1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Upon Engineer’s request, s ubmit manufacturer’s specifications and

installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories. Include manufacturer’s certification showing compliance with these specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Subm it detailed drawings s howing layout and types of deck panels,

anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing or other accessories.

C. Shop drawings shall indicate the date of the structural drawings that were used to prepare

the shop drawings.

D. Shop drawing submittals shall be returned to t he Architect after review by the Structural Engineer. Allow ten (10) working days for review of shop drawings b y the Structural Engineer.

E. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof i nstallation

acceptance certification as may be necessar y in connection with fire an d extended coverage insurance.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Bowman-E.G. Smith Div/Cyclops Corp. 2. Epic Metals Corp. 3. Mac-Fab Products Inc. 4. Roll Form Products Inc. 5. United Steel Deck Inc. 6. Vulcraft Div/Nucor Corp. 7. Wheeling Corrugating Co Div/Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel for galvanized metal roof deck and accessories shall conform to ASTM A653-94 Structural Quality grade 33 or higher.

1. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A924-94 with a minimum coating class of

G60 as defined in A653-94.

B. Steel for non-co mposite centering deck at fro st slabs: High tens ile steel (galvanized) with a maximum fiber stress not exceeding 30 ksi under total dead and live loads and a maximum live load deflection of 1/240.

C. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized.



D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized surfaces complying with Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships).

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports, with flush, telescoped or nested 2” laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps.

B. Quality of D eck: When delivered to the s ite, deck units shall be accur ately formed,

reasonably flat, in alignment and free from warp, so that installation, fitting with other units, and att achment to supports can be satisfactorily performed. Deck sections not meeting these requirements, in the Architect/ Engineer’s opinion, will be rej ected and shall be replaced at no extra cost.

C. Roof Deck Units: Prov ide deck co nfigurations complying with SDI “Roof Deck

Specifications”, of metal thickness, depth and width as shown.

D. Noncomposite Floor Deck Units (Centering): Provide fluted sections of metal thickness, depth and width as shown.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate fro m single piece of 14 gage galva nized sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct wate r flow to drain. Provide sum p pans of adequate size to rec eive roof drains a nd with bear ing flanges not less than 4” wide. Recess pans not less than 4” below roof d eck surface, unless otherwise required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field.

B. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for openin gs between decking and

other construction, of 18 gage sheet steel. Form to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of flutes and sides of decking.

C. Provide metal pour stop at all edges of concrete construction (including floor openings)

except where edge angle is detailed. Pour stop sh all be of gag e as reco mmended by manufacturer for specific conditions with a minimum of 20 gage.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install deck units and acces sories in accordance with m anufacturer’s recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein.

B. Placing Deck:

1. Place deck units on supporting steel framewo rk and adjust to fina l position with

ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporti ng members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.

2. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles

to prevent overloading of structural members.



3. Do not use deck units for storage or working pl atforms until perm anently

secured.

C. Fastening Deck:

1. Fasten deck units to steel supporting members by welding as noted on drawings.

2. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and qualit y of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Use welding washers where indicated on drawings.

3. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units as noted on drawings.

D. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accesso ries around other work

projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown.

E. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additi onal metal reinforcement and clo sure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work shown.

F. Roof Sump Pans: Place over openings provided in roof decking and weld to top decking

surface. Space welds not more than 12” oc with at least one weld at each corner.

G. Hanger Slots or Clips: T he use of hanger slots or cli ps to receive hangers for s upport of ceiling construction, air ducts, diffusers or lighting fixtures, is not permitted.

H. Touch-Up Painting: After decking i nstallation, wire brush, clean and touch-up scarred

areas, welds and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and s upporting steel members.

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing and inspection agen cy shall be engaged to inspect deck installation including deck welding, and to cer tify that the work i s in conformance with Contract Documents.

B. Inspection work shall be done under supervis ion of a registered engineer. After

completion of the work of this Section, testing agency shall certify that work conforms to Contract Documents. This certification shall bear registered engineer’s seal.

END OF SECTION


COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.


A. Type of cold-formed metal framing required is C-shaped load-bearing steel studs. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Component Design: Com pute structural properties of studs i n accordance with AISI “Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

1. Design supports for exterior curtain wa ll areas to withstand both positive and

negative wind pressures and gravity loads, with maximum deflection of L/600.

2. The supplier shall follow the design intent shown on architectural and structural drawings for the design of connections and framing members. Any deviation of this design needs to be approved by the architect/engineer.

3. Use wind load values in a ccordance with governing Building Code or Factory

Mutual Loss Prevention Data 1-7, taking into account elevation ab ove grade and pressure coefficients.

B. Welding: Use qualified welders and comply with AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code

– Sheet Steel”.

C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire-resistance rating, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Subm it manufacturer’s product information and installation instructions for each item of cold-formed framing and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings stamped by an engineer registered in the state of Ohio

for all framing components and connections.

C. Shop drawings shall indicate the date of the structural drawings that were used to prepare the shop drawings.

1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deli ver to proje ct site in manufacturer’s unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, t ype



and grade. Store off gr ound in a dry ventilated space or protect with breathabl e waterproof coverings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FRAMING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with require ments, manufacturers offering C-shaped, loadbearing steel studs which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. 2. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. 3. Dale Industries Inc. 4. Inryco Inc/Milcor Div. 5. Marino Industries Corp. 6. United States Gypsum Co.

B. System Components: With each ty pe of metal framing required, provide manufacturer’s

standard steel runners (tracks), bracings, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.

C. Materials and Finishes:

1. Fabricate metal framing components of steel sheet, ASTM A 446, with a

minimum yield point of 40,000 psi.

2. Provide galvanized finish on m etal framing components and accessories complying with ASTM A 525 for minimum G60 coating.

D. C-Shaped Studs: Manufacturer’ s standard load-bearing steel st uds of size, shape, and

gage indicated or as determined b y design requirements, with 1.625” flange and flange return lip.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS Code.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized surfaces complying with Military Specification MIL-P-21035 (Ships).

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accord ance with manufacturer’s printed or written instr uctions and reco mmendations, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. All connection s are to be d esigned to re sist wind and gravi ty loads.



B. Set vertical studs plumb; diagonal studs in accurate alignment to form true plane.

C. Where stud system abuts structural columns, beams or walls, inc luding masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure.

D. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever

walls, partitions, canopies and soffits are indi cated to support fixtures, equipm ent, services, and similar work. Where type of suppl ementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer’s recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported.

E. Installation of Stud S ystem: Secure studs to r unner tracks b y either welding or screw

fastening at both inside and outside flang es unless otherwise noted on drawings. Seat studs completely in track.

1. Frame both sides of expansion and co ntrol joints, with separate studs; do not

bridge the joint with components of stud system.

2. Install horizontal stiffener s in stud sy stem, spaced at not m ore than 4’-6” oc. Weld at each intersection.

3. Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and vertical

junctures) to produce flush, even, true to line joints.

4. Field Painting: Touch-up galvani zed surfaces da maged during handling a nd installation, using galvanizing repair paint.

5. Contractor shall coordina te installation of edge angles with steel erection and

metal stud contractor to ensure proper alignm ent of angles fo r metal stud installation.

END OF SECTION


PRE-ENGINEERED PRE-FABRICATED 054100 - 1 LIGHT GAUGE STEEL/ROOF TRUSSES

SECTION 054100 - PRE-ENGINEERED, PRE-FABRICATED LIGHT GAUGE STEEL ROOF TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pre-engineered, pre-fabricat ed light gauge col d-formed steel fram ing elements. Work includes:

1. Light gauge cold-formed steel roof trusses. 2. Anchorage, bracing and bridging.

B. Related Work

1. Drywall attachment. 2. Roofing, fascia and soffit.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Reference standards:

1. ASTM:

a. ASTM A653/A653M "Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process." 2007

b. ASTM A780 "Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings."

2. American Welding Society (AWS)

a. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." b. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. AISI "Specifications". Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel truss members according to AISI's "Speci fication for the Design of Cold-Form ed Steel Structural Members, 2001 with 2004 Supplement."

B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabr icate, and erect cold-form ed steel trusses to

withstand specified design loads within limits and under conditions required.

1. Design Loads: As specified. 2. Deflections: Live load deflection meeting the following (unless otherwise specified):

a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection less than or equal to 1/240 of the span

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathin g failure, co nnection failure, undue strain on fasteners and



anchors, or other detri mental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of 120° F (67°C).

4. Specifically, the prefabric ated light gauge steel roof truss manufacturer (vendor) shall

provide the following services:

a. Design and supply a complete light gauge steel roof sy stem stamped by a registered engineer in the state of Ohio to include all of the following components:

1.) Light gauge steel trusses for gravity and lateral loads with truss sizes, gauges and

connections at truss joints. 2.) Design and stamp truss to t russ connections and truss to bearing connections fo r

gravity, lateral and uplift loads. 3.) Design and stam p the top cord, b ottom cord an d web permanent bracing

locations. 4.) Design and stamp the roof deck structural support at eave edge, v alley, hip and

ridge transition planes to support corrugated steel or plywood decking. 5.) Design the r oof deck shear transfer fr aming required to transfer the roof deck

shear to the building structure. The Engineer-Of-Record or Architect i s responsible to determ ine the roof dia phragm, to determine the location and magnitude of the roof shear transfer and to determine location within the building structure through which this shear will pass.

6.) Provide stamped calculations and shop drawings for project sub mittal requirements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of cold-formed steel framing and accessory required.

B. Submit shop drawings showing m ember, type, location, spacing, size and gauge of member,

method of attach ment to supporti ng members and all necessary details. Indicate supplemental bracing, strapping, splices, bridging, accessories and details required for proper installation

C. Submit detailed roof truss layouts. D. Submit truss drawings, sealed and signed by a qualified registered Professional Engineer in

the state of Ohio, verif ying the tr uss ability to m eet local code and design requirements. Specifically include the engineering and design for all of the following:

1. Description of design criteria. 2. Engineering analysis depicting member stresses and truss deflection 3. Truss member sizes, gauges and connections at truss joints; truss to truss attachment

details. 4. Truss reaction at all bearing locations; truss to bearing attachment details. 5. Top chord, b ottom chord and web permanen t bracing requirements; construction an d

temporary bracing per the Light Gauge Steel Engineers Associ ation (CFSEI 5000) ‘Field Installation Guidelines’ dated May 2000.

6. Eave edge, valley, hip and ridge structur al support for roof corrugated or ply wood decking.



7. Roof deck shear transfer framing required transferring the roof deck shear to the building structure.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricatio n shall be p erformed by a cold-for med steel truss fabricator with experience in designing and fabricating cold-formed steel truss systems equal in material, design, and extent to the systems required for this Project.

1. Cold-formed steel truss system installation shall be performed by an experienced

installer approved by the steel truss system fabricator.

B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Struct ural Welding Code-Steel." And AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel."

1. Quality welding processes and welding opera tors in accordance with AWS "Standard

Qualification Procedure." 2. Welding of any nature to these trusses is specifically prohibited unless permission is

received from the manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified by name brand, type and grade. Exercise care to avoid damage during unloading, storing and erection.

B. Store trusses on blocking pallets, platforms or other supports off the ground and in an upright

position sufficiently braced to avoid damage from excessive bending.

C. Protect trusses and accessories from corrosion, deformation, damage and deterioration whe n stored at job site. Keep trusses free of dirt and other foreign matter.


A. During construction, adequately distribute all loads applied to trusses so as not to exceed the carrying capacity of any one joist, truss or other component

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS

A. Provide manufacturer's standard steel truss mem bers, bracing, bridging, blocking, reinforcements, fasteners and acc essories with each ty pe of steel framing required, as recommended by the m anufacturer for the applications indicated and as needed to provide a complete light gauge cold-formed steel truss package.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Materials:

1. All component gauges: Fabricate components of structural quality steel sheet per ASTM A653/A653M with a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi.



2. Bracing, bridging and blocking members: Fabricate components of commercial qualit y

steel sheet per ASTM A653/A653M with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.

B. Ultra-Span steel truss components: Provide sizes, shapes and gauges indicated.

1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 20 gauge, 0.0350 inch (0.91 mm). 2. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 18 gauge, 0.0460 inch (1.20 mm). 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.0570 inch (1.52 mm). 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 14 gauge, 0.0730 inch (1.90 mm).

C. Finish: Provide com ponents with protective zinc coating co mplying with ASTM A653/A653M, minimum G60 coating.

D. Fastenings:

1. Manufacturer recommended self-drilling, self-t apping screws with corrosion-resistant

plated finish. Fasteners s hall be of sufficie nt size and number to ensure the strength of the connection.

2. Welding of any nature to these trusses is specifically prohibited unless permission is received from the truss manufacturer.

3. Other fasteners as accepted by truss engineer. 2.03 FABRICATION

A. Factory fabricate cold-formed steel trusses plu mb, square, true to line and wit h connections

securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section. 1. Fabricate truss assemblies in jig templates. 2. Cut truss members by sawing or shearing or plasma cutting 3. Fasten cold-formed steel truss members by screw fastening, or other methods as standard

with fabricator. Wire tying or welding of framing members is not permitted.

a. Locate mechanical fasteners and insta ll according to cold-for med steel t russ component manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads.

B. Care shall be taken durin g handling, delivery and erection. Use of a crane or lull with a

spreader bar is recommended for trusses longer than 30 foot. Brace, block or r einforce truss as necessary to minimize member and connection stresses.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: F abricate trusses to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from

plumb, Level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3mm) from plan location. Cum ulative error shall not ex ceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Sequences: Fabricate each cold formed steel truss to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3mm).



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine structure, substrates and installation conditions. Do not proceed with cold-formed

steel truss installations until unsatisfactor y conditions have been corrected. Verify that the bearing elevations are correct before trusses are installed.

B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibilit y for satisfactory

performance. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General:

1. Erection of trusses, including proper ha ndling, safety precautions, temporary bracing and other safeguards or procedures are the responsibility of the General Contractor and the Installation Subcontractor. The use of a crane or lull with a spreader bar is recommended for trusses over 30 foot.

2. Exercise care and provi de erection bracing required to p revent toppling or dominoeing of trusses during erection as identified in the Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association (CFSEI 5000) publication “Field Installation Guide For Cold-Formed Steel Roof Trusses” May, 2000.

B. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical and parallel to each other, accurately located at

design spacing indicated. C. Provide proper lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at lift

points recommended by truss fabricat or and use spreader bars for larger span trusses. Exercise care to avoid damage to truss members during erection and to keep horizontal bending of the trusses to a minimum.

D. Provide framing anchors as indicated or accepted on the engineering design drawing or

erection drawings. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points and the anchor must be attached to the correct side of the truss as shown in the truss drawings and attachment details.

E. Install roof framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely

fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations. 1. DO NOT cut truss members without prior approval of truss manufacturer. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel roof fram ing by mechanical fasteners only per truss

manufacturer’s recommendation. Wire ty ing or welding of r oof framing is not permitted.

a. Welding of any nature to these trusses is strictly prohibited unless specific permission is received from the truss manufacturer.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and inst all according to cold-formed roof framing manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads.

c. Install roof f raming in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated.



d. Provide temporary bracing per Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association (CFSEI 5000) publication “Field Installation Guide For Cold-Formed Steel Roof Trusses” and leave in place until trusses are permanently stabilized.

F. Erection Tolerances: Install trusses to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb,

level, and true to line of 1/4 inch in 10 feet (1:480) and as follows:

a. Space individual trusses no more than plus or m inus 1/4 inch from plan location. Cu mulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.05 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and rep air damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and

installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION


FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD 060710 - 1

SECTION 060710 – Fire Retardant Treated Wood

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire Retardant treatment of lumber and plywood.

1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

NFPA 255 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristic of Building Materials

U.L. 723 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

NFPA 703 – Standard for Fire Retardant Treated Wood and Fire Retardant Coatings for Building Materials

ICC ES AC363 – Acceptance Criteria for Surface Applied Fire Retardant Coatings

Anderson Laboratories: Evaluation of the Acute Inhalation Toxicity of the Combustion of Materials Using the University of Pittsburgh Test Method

Hazelton Laboratories of America: Code of Federal Regulations, Vol. 16 Part 1500.30 - Evaluation of Acute Oral Toxicity Study

Hazelton Laboratories of America: Federal Substance Act, 16 CFR 1500.41- Evaluation of Primary Dermal Irritation Study

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and product.

1. Manufacturers printed product information including ICC Evaluation Service Report.



2. Preparation Instructions and recommendations.

3. Storage & Handling Instructions.

4. Application methods.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of the fire retardant treatment type required, and w hose products have been in satisfactory use i n similar service for a minimum of fifteen years.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Applicator shall be a firm experienced in the installation of fire retardant treatments similar in type and scope to that required for this project and is certified by the manufacturer for installation of the product specified.

C. Fire Retardant: Manufacturing of t he fire re tardant shall be listed under a qualit y control inspection program as administrated by Underw riters Laboratories Inc. (AA-668) and all containers of the fire retardant shall bear the Underwriters laboratories Classification Mark.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Provide fire retardant treatment that com plies with the following codes:

1. 2006 International Building Code (IBC)

2. 2006 International Fire Code (IFC)

3. 2006 International Existing Building Code (IEBC)

E. Delivery Storage and Handling:

1. Store fire retardant in original containers between minimum ambient air temperature of 33 degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum of 120 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage or installation of fire retardant treated lumber. Store materials under cover or shelter and off of the ground.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. acceptable manufacturer includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Northeast Fireshield, Inc. (www. northeastfireshield.com)

2. Approved Equal.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fire retardant treatment:

1. Product: Pr ovide treatment with “I NSPECTA-SHIELD PLUSa” as manufactured by Northeast Fireshield Inc. or approved equal.

2. Product acceptance and li stings: ICC-ES Evaluation report (ESR-2019); UL FUS AA-668.

3. Toxicity: Product shall be listed as non-toxic as tested under Test Methods prescribed by Code of Federal Regulations, Vol. 16 Part 1500.30 and Federal Substance Act, 16 CFR 1500.41. Product shall be listed as NO More Toxic that the treated substrate when tested under the Pittsburgh Test Method of Acute Inhalation Toxicity of Combustible Materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION FOR FIELD TREATMENT

A. Do not begi n application until substrates have been properl y prepared or environmental conditions are outside of the Manufacturers absolute limits.

B. Examine for wet conditions; do not apply product to substrates that are wet unless they can be dried to the maximum moisture content as specified by the manufacturer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to application of the fire retardant.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 PRODUCT APPLICATION

A. Materials to be treated shall be free of dust, dirt, oil, paint, stain, varnish or sealant. Thoroughly mix product before application. Apply product at a coverage rate of 300 square feet per gallon by air spray apparatus in one coat or at the rate listed by the product m anufacturer if an “approved equal” product is used. Apply product when air temperature is between 33 degrees F and 120 degrees F. The maximum moisture of the substrate to be treated prior to application of product shall not exceed 25 percent. In field appli cations, certified applicator shall perfor m field testing when required b y the authority having jurisdiction as our-lined in manufacturer’s ICC_ES Evaluation Report (ESR-2019). Fire retard ant treated substrates shall be identifiab le with the use of an ultravi olet black light after the product has cu red for a period of 48 hours. Fire retardant treated substrates delivere d to th e field shall be labeled with a per manent ink marking as follows:

1. Product manufacturers name



2. Product Name.

3. ICC Evaluation Service report Number

4. Meets NFPA 703 Class A Finish.

3.4 SURFACE BURNING CHARECTERISTICS

A. The product shall provide a flame spread index of 25 or less and a smoke development index of 200 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 and shall qualify as a Class A finish in accordance with NFPA 703.

1. The flame spread and smoke-development indices shall be applicable when the product is over-coated with two layers of acrylic paint or one lay er of wood stain over-coated with one layer of polyurethane.

3.5 CONFORMANCE CERTIFICATION

A. The manufacturer shall provide written certificati on for the substrates treated for meeting the required code of the aut horities having jurisdiction. Notarized Certificates of Flam e-Proofing shall be issued where required.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1. Include data for wood-pre servative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certific ation by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and de sign values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with buildin g code in effect for Project:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.



B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipm ent support bases, blocking, stripping, a nd similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and si milar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furri ng attached directly to t he interior of below-grade exterio r masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Co mply with perfor mance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).

1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof fra ming, framing in attic

spaces, and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropr iate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and as necessary to maintain UL rating.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lum ber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lum ber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipm ent Backing Pane ls: DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal thickness.



2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weathe r, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative hu midity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.


A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fibe r-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form , for use as a sil l sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, co mpressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rub berized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Where wood-preservative-treated lu mber is inst alled adjacent to m etal decking, i nstall continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

B. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal fram ing to com ply with m anufacturer's written instructions.

C. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of pres ervative-treated lumber.

E. Securely attach rough carpentr y work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

3.2 PROTECTION (Not Used)



MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior wood trim.

1.2 SUBMITTALS (Not Used)


A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forest s certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to co mply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship": 1. Interior wood trim.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grad ing agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provi de lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM

A. General: Provide kiln-dried finished (surf aced) material without finger-jointing, unle ss otherwise indicated.

B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Clear red oak.

C. Lumber Trim for Opaque (Painted) Finish: Eith er finger-jointed or solid lumber, one of the following species and grades: 1. Grade A yellow poplar; NHLA.

D. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7 and graded according to WMMPA WM 4.


MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 2

1. Moldings for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: N-grade red oak. 2. Moldings for Opaque (Painted) Finish: P-grade yellow poplar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut , and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for a ccurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and si milar supports to co mply with requi rements for attaching other construction.

B. Wood Trim Installation: Install with minim um number of joints practical, u sing full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lum ber available. Cope at returns and m iter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.

1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint-finishing operations are completed. 3. Install to tole rance of 1/8 inch in 96 inch es (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plum b.

Install adjoining finish carpentr y with 1/ 32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.



SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Building paper. 4. Building wrap. 5. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment.

SUBMITTALS

B. Product Data: For each t ype of process and f actory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-pre servative treatment and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated ply wood complies with requirements.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following:

1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Building wrap.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fir e-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical t o those of assemblies tested for fir e resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forest s certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to co mply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":

1. Plywood. 2. Oriented strand board.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack plywood and ot her panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.

2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.

B. Mark plywood with appropriate classifi cation marking of an ins pection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat item s indicated o n Drawings and plywood in contact with m asonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27.

1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated ply wood with a ppropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or anot her testing and ins pecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.

2.4 WALL SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.

2.5 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: PS-1 Ex posure 1 sheathing See General Structural Notes for more information. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).



2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated.

1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, pr ovide fasteners with corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

2.7 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER

A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.

B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air reta rder; with flam e-spread and sm oke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively , when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Available Products: Sub ject to co mpliance with requirements, products th at may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. b. Tyvek CommercialWrap. c. Approved Equal.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 152g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).

C. Building-Wrap Tape: Tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer.

2.8 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elasto meric silicone joi nt sealant r ecommended by sheathing manufacturer.

B. Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers.


A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Form ulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rub berized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roo f

Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's "Uniform Building Code." 4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's "BOCA National Building Code." 5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in SBCCI's "Standard Building Code." 6. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Mem bers," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "Inte rnational Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."

7. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Mem bers," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code."

B. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant i nstallation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture.

C. Do not bridge building expansi on joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable reco mmendations in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."

1. Comply with "Code Plus" installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph above.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continu ous bead of glue to fram ing members at edges of wall sheathing panels.

b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-i nch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load- bearing construction abuts

structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4- mm) gap where they abut masonry or sim ilar

materials.



3.4 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION

A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.

C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

3.5 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT

A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper s ecurely fastened to framing. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed.



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1

SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. 4. Shop finishing of woodwork.

B. Interior architectural woo dwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging stri ps unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show lo cation of each item , dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

C. Samples:

1. Lumber and panel product s for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.

2. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and color, with exposed surface finished.

3. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 4. Thermoset decorative panels, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.

D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Progra m certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI' s "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program for woodwork, including installation.

C. Forest Certification: Prov ide interior a rchitectural woodwork produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is co mplete, and HVAC sy stem is opera ting and maintai ning temperature and rela tive humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, provide i nterior architectural woodwork by one of the following:

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, plain sawn or sliced

B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Paint grade poplar

C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Ty pe): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches ( 63.5 mm) deep, and 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.

D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;

zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high

and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or

24 inches (600 mm) wide. 4. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2; for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and 24

inches (600 mm) wide.

E. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.



F. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed ha rdware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 651 for steel base.


A. Handrail Brackets: Cast from stainless steel with wall flange drilled for exposed anchor and with support arm for screwing to un derside of rail. Sized to provide 1-1 /2-inch (38-mm) clearance between handrail and wall.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Complete fabrication to max imum extent possible bef ore shipment to Project si te. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Premium. 2. Shop cut o penings to maxim um extent possibl e. Sand edges of cutouts to rem ove

splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

B. Interior Standing and Running Trim:

1. For transparent-finished trim items wider than available lum ber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.

2. Backout or groove backs of flat tri m members and kerf backs of ot her wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.

3. Assemble casings in plant except whe re limitations of acc ess to place of ins tallation require field assembly.

C. Wood Cabinets for Transparent Finish (see Section 123530):

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay. 2. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 3. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center-balance match. 5. Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodi es: Same species and cut indicated for

exposed surfaces. 6. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood lumber. 7. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 8. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above

compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

D. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as follows:

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.



b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.. d. Edges: Grade HGS.

3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Match sample. 4. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect fro m laminate manufacturer's

full range of solid colors or patterns in matte finish. 5. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above

compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

E. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect fro m laminate manufacturer's

full range of solid colors & patterns in matte finish. 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 4. Core Material at Sinks: marine-grade plywood.

2.6 SHOP FINISHING

A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabri cation shop. Defer onl y final touchup, cleaning, a nd polishing until after installation.

B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Acrylic lacquer. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-

grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 6. Sheen: Flat, 15-30 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

D. Opaque Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish. 3. Color: Match sample. 4. Sheen: Flat, 15-30 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, co ndition woodwork to average prevailing h umidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for co mpletion and com plete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Shim as required with concealed shims.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.

F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-len gth pieces (from maximum length of lum ber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any , between top of base an d wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

G. Railings: Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) variation from a straight line. 1. Wall Rails: Support rails on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.

H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings p roperly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in ope nings and to provide unencumbered operation.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not m ore than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws si zed for 1-inch (25-mm ) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing throug h corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Caulk space between back splash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."



PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1

SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing ide ntical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualifie d testing agency . Iden tify products with appro priate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING

A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with require ments, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not l imited to, the following: a. Marlite or approved equal.

2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.075 inch (1.9 mm). 3. Surface Finish: Smooth. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer 's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.


PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2

1. Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.

1. VOC Content: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

1. VOC Content: 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that could im pair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.

B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel jo ints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C. Install trim accessories with adhesive. Do not fasten through panels.

D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner tri m in a bead of sealant.

E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

F. Remove excess sealant and smears a s paneling is installed. Clean with solvent reco mmended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.



PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING 070150.19 - 1

SECTION 070150.19 - PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Roof tear-off. 2. Partial roof tear-off. 3. Roof re-cover preparation. 4. Removal of base flashings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Temporary Roofing: Incl ude Product Data and description of temporary roofing system. If temporary roof will remain in place, submit surface preparation requirements needed to receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing membrane manufacturer stating acceptance of the temporary membrane and that its i nclusion will not adversel y affect the roofing s ystem's resistance to fire and wind.

C. Photographs: Show existing conditi ons of ad joining construction a nd site improvements, including exterior and interior finish s urfaces, that might be misconstrued as having bee n damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer of new membrane roofing system.

B. Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Owner may occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Con duct reroofing so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations.

1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust or water leakage covers over sensitive equipment or furnishings, shut down HVAC and fire-alarm or -detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below the work area.

2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to e vacuate occupants from below the affected area. Verify that occupants below the work area have been evacuated before proceeding with work over the impaired deck area.



B. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent build ings, walkways, site i mprovements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.

C. Limit construction loads on roof to rooftop equipment wheel loads and for uniformly distributed loads.

D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecast ed weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing s ystem or building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary reroofing preparation materials recommended by roofing s ystem manufacturer for intended use and co mpatible with components of existing and new membrane roofing system.

B. Base Sheet F asteners: C apped head, factory -coated steel fasteners, listed in FM Approval's "Approval Guide."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofin g work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork.

B. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday . Prevent debris fro m entering or bl ocking roof drains and conduc tors. Use ro of-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.

C. Verify that rooftop utilities and service piping have been shut off before beginning the Work.

3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF

A. General: Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed for that day.

B. Roof Tear-Off: Rem ove existing r oofing and other membrane roofing system components down to the deck. 1. Remove fasteners from deck.



3.3 DECK PREPARATION

A. Inspect deck after tear-off of roofing system.

B. If broken or loose fasteners that secure deck pane ls to one another or to structure are observed or if deck appears or feels inadequately attached, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect.

C. If deck surfa ce is not suitable for rece iving new roofing or if st ructural integrity of deck is suspect, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect.

3.4 TEMPORARY ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Install approved temporary roofing membrane over area to be reroofed.

B. Remove temporary roofing membrane before installing new roofing membrane.

3.5 ROOF RE-COVER PREPARATION

A. Remove blisters, ridges, buckles, and other substrate irregularities from existing roof sheathing replacing any boards as necessary.

1. Broom clean existing substrate. 2. Verify that existing substrate is dry before proceeding with new roofing 3. Spot check substrates with an electrical capacitance moisture-detection meter. 4. Remove materials that are wet or damp.

3.6 EXISTING BASE FLASHINGS

A. Remove existing base flashings around parapets, curbs, walls, and penetrations.

1. Clean substrates of contaminants such as asphalt, sheet materials, dirt, and debris.

B. Do not damage metal counterflashings that ar e to rem ain. Replace metal counterflashings damaged during removal with counterflashings

3.7 DISPOSAL

A. Collect and place de molished materials in containers. Promptly dispose of dem olished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 070150.19


BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1

SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing. 2. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation dur ing application of dam pproofing in enclos ed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with re quirements, provide pro ducts by one of the following:

1. ChemMasters Corp. 2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. 3. Koppers Inc. 4. Tamms Industries, Inc. 5. Approve Equal

C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I, Class 1, fibered.

D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I, fibered .

E. VOC Content: 250 g/L 2.5 lb/gal. (300 g/L) or less.



2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING


B. Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with re quirements, provide pro ducts by one of the following:

1. ChemMasters Corp. 2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. 3. Koppers Inc. 4. Tamms Industries, Inc. 5. Approve Equal

C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

D. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

E. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.

F. VOC Content: 0.25 lb/gal. (30 g/L) or less.

2.3 PROTECTION COURSE

A. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type: ASTM D 6506, premolded, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, multi-ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sand wiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film.

B. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced on one or both side(s) with plastic fil m, nominal thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm), w ith compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per ASTM C 272.

C. Protection Course: Unfaced, fan-folded, extr uded-polystyrene board insulation, nom inal thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm) with com pressive strength of not le ss than 8 ps i (55 kPa) per ASTM D 1621.

D. Protection Course, Roll-Roofing Type: S mooth-surfaced roll roofing co mplying with ASTM D 6380, Class S, Type III.


A. Cut-Back Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with wat er as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of project ions and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.

3.2 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer' s written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.

B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opp osite side of wall f aces building interior.

1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top o f footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing.

2. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend ont o surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.

3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, construction join ts, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-co ated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dam pproofing coat fo r embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.

3.3 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. On Concrete Foundations and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat, or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq. m).

B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 1 tr owel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq. m).

3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. On Concrete Foundations and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.6 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat, 1 fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.2 L/sq. m), or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq. m).

B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 1 tr owel coat at not less than 5 gal./100 sq. ft. (2 L/sq. m).



3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE

A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Compl y with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection course.

1. Support protection course with spot a pplication of adhesive of t ype recommended b y protection board manufacturer over cured coating.

2. Install protection course on same day of installation of dampproofing (while coating is tacky) to ensure adhesion.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Perimeter insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Cavity-wall insulation. 3. Concealed building insulation. 4. Vapor retarders. 5. Sound attenuation insulation.


A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling ple nums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Grow th and Humidit y Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm (13-m/s) air velocity.

2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to th e effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 da ys at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product test reports.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.


A. Retain ASTM test method below based on pr oduct and kind of fire-resistance charact eristic specified for each product in Part 2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics, by UL or another testi ng and inspecting agency acceptable to au thorities having jurisdiction. Identif y materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requir ements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Sub ject to co mpliance with requirements, products th at may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, VI, 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. M), with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:

1. Available Manufacturers or approved equal: a. Dow Chemical Company. b. Owens Corning.

2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without mem brane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a fl ame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced wit h foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.

D. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:

1. 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of R-11 minimum. 2. 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of R-19 minimum. 3. 9-1/2 inches (241 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of R-30 minimum

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) for walls and 10 mils thick for floors.



B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of ty pe recommended b y vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive ta pe of ty pe recommended by insulation manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.

B. Adhesive for Bondi ng Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Prefor med, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized t o fit between roof fram ing members and to provi de cross ventilat ion between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.

2.6 INSULATION FASTENERS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at a ny time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thic kness indicated to envelo p entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with in sulation. Rem ove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located with in insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected fr om manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insul ation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) belo w exterior grade line.



B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely la y insulation units according to m anufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specifi c method is indicated, bon d units t o substrate with adhesive or u se mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foa m-plastic insulation un its by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit t o form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in com pleted installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

2. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 3. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at

vented eaves. 4. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320

and as follows:

a. With faced b lankets having stapling flang es, secure insulation by inset, stapli ng flanges to sides of framing members.

b. With faced blankets having stapling flang es, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to mainta in continuity of vapor retarder once fi nish material is installed over it.

D. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into m iscellaneous voids and cavit y spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equalin g a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrat es, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood fram ing at to p, end, and bottom edges; at pe rimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

C. Seal joints caused b y pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and si milar items penetrating v apor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects an d vapor retarder.



D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders i mmediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.



ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 1

SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Underlayment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and blend specified.

C. Product test reports.

D. Research/evaluation reports.

E. Maintenance data.

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which m anufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphal t shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first three years nonprorated.

2. Algae-Discoloration Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor five y ears from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES

A. Multitab-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with require ments, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not l imited to, the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Owens Corning. e. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc.

2. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. 3. Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226 or ASTM D 4869, Type I or Type II, asphalt-saturated organic fe lts, nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil- (1.0-mm-) thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.

2.3 RIDGE VENTS

A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard, rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles.


a. Air Vent, Inc.; a Gibraltar Industries company. b. Cor-A-Vent, Inc. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Mid-America Building Products. e. Owens Corning. f. RGM Products, Inc. g. Trimline Building Products.



2. Minimum Net Free Area: 16.90 sq. In. per linear foot.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.

B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-di p galvanized-steel wire shingle nails, m inimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm -) diameter, shank, sharp -pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 m m) through OSB or pl ywood sheathing.

1. Where nails are in contac t with metal flashing, use nails made from sa me metal as flashing.

C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low-profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum diameter.

2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Sheet Metal: to be approved by Architect - Stainless steel, Zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel, Zinc-tin alloy-coated steel, or aluminum.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and tri m to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Met al Manual" that appl y to design, di mensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Single-Layer Felt Underlay ment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 m m). Fasten with nails.

1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck n ot covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches (150 mm) over self-adhering sheet underlayment.

2. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch (900 mm) o.c.



C. Double-Layer Felt Underlayment: at areas with a ro of slope 4:12 or less - Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Install a 19-inch- (485-mm-) wide starter course at eaves and completely cover with full-widt h second course. Install succeeding courses lapping previous courses 19 inches (485 mm) in shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). Stagger end laps between succeed ing courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten wit h nails. 1. Install felt underla yment on r oof sheathing not covered b y self-adhering sheet

underlayment. Lap edges over self-adhering sheet underlay ment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction to shed water.

2. Terminate felt underlayment extended up not less than 4 inches (100 mm) against sidewalls, curbs, chimneys, and other roof projections.

3. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch (900 mm) o.c.

D. Self-Adhering Sheet Und erlayment: Install, wrinkl e free, on ro of deck. Comply with lo w-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicab le. Install a t locations indicated on Dra wings, lapped in directio n to shed wate r. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.

3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: In stall metal flashings and other sh eet metal to com ply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Install metal flashings according to reco mmendations in ARMA' s "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

3.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer 's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Resid ential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt sh ingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip at least 7 inches (175 mm) wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.

1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch (13 mm) over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge.

C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's reco mmended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.

D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with roofing nails located ac cording to manufacturer's writt en instructions. 1. Where roof slope is less t han 4:12, se al asphalt shi ngles with as phalt roofing ce ment

spots.



2. When ambient temperature during installati on is below [ 50 deg F (10 deg C)], seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

E. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle stri ps from one side of valley 12 inches (300 mm) beyond center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in valley. Fasten with extra nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to a str aight line 2 inches (50 mm) short of valley centerline. Tri m upper conceal ed corners of cut-back shingle strips.

F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

G. Ridge Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water a way from direction of pre vailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.



ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 1

SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Adhered EPDM membrane roofing system.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (Not Used)

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Research/evaluation reports.

C. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to recei ve manufacturer's special warranty.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain com ponents included f or membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing.

C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof s lopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing material s by a qualified testing agency . Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

D. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installa tion only when existing and fore casted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced uniform, flexible EPDM sheet.


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Johns Manville.

2. Thickness: 45 mils (1.1 mm), nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black.

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall com ply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-m il- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer' s standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.

E. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet f lashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet fl ashings, reinforced EPD M securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.



2.3 ROOF INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

B. Tapered Insulation: Provi de factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 i nch per 12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide preformed saddles, cric kets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes wh ere indicated or where necessary for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates co mplying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing s ystem components so insulation is not exp osed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or gr eater, install two or more layers with joints of eac h succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.

E. Mechanically Fastened In sulation: Install ea ch layer of insulation and secure to deck usi ng mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fast ening specified board-ty pe roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3.2 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and a llow to relax before installing.

B. Accurately align membrane roofing and m aintain uniform side and end la ps of m inimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.



C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not appl y to splice area of membrane roofing.

D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at ter minations, penetrations, and perimeters.

E. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to m anufacturer's written instructions to ensure a w atertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations.

F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

3.3 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and un derside of sheet flash ing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and fie ld-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sh eet flashing.

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firm ly roll side a nd end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a wat ertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

B. Repair or re move and re place components of membrane roofing sy stem where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 2. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 4. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show in stallation layouts of sh eet metal flashing and trim , including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.

1. Include details for form ing, joining, su pporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seam s, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.

D. Maintenance data.


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.


1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sh eet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluorop olymer finish containing not

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restri cted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality.

2. Surface: Manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluorop olymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minim um 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm ) thick, consisting of slip-resis ting polyethylene-film top surface la minated to la yer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper back ing; cold applied. Provide prim er when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29

deg C).

C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fast eners, solder, weld ing rods, protective coatin gs, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.



B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular thr eaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-lo cking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: H eads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength alum inum or stain less-steel rivets suitable f or metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Sa me material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according

to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent ti n and 50

percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-p aper backing. Pr ovide permanently elastic, nonsag, nont oxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release buty l rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with lim ited movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorr osive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonm oving joints, including riveted joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.4 REGLETS

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated.

1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. 2. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.



2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other charact eristics of ite m indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil can ning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indi cated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provis ions where possible. Exposed fastener s are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Sealed Joints: For m nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of inter meshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with but yl sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fabricate cleats and attac hment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonm oving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams w ith flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricat e to cross sec tion indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories a s required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricat e expansion joints, expansion-joint covers and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.

1. Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer Valley baffles.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular do wnspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Aluminum: [0.024 inch (0.61 mm)] thick.



C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dim ensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches (100 mm) beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] thick.

D. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.

2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3- m-) long, sections. Fabricat e joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm).

B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.

2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in m inimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, bu t not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under co pings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and sim ilar flashings to extend 6 inches (1 50 mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- (50- mm-) high, end dams w here flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill fl ashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlay ment: Install sel f-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer



rather than nails for installing underla yment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less t han 6 inches (150 mm ) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for ther mal and structural m ovement so that com pleted sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, l eak, or loosen, and shall remai n watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and tri m to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be cov ered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not m ore than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissim ilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where i nstalling metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlay ment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no j oints allowed within 24 inches (6 00 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fast eners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/ 2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinning wh ere pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.



G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage item s to prod uce complete roof drainage sy stem according to SMACN A recommendations and as i ndicated. Coordinate ins tallation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join se ctions with ri veted and soldered joints or with lappe d joints seale d with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets, straps or twisted straps sp aced not m ore than 36 inches ( 900 mm) apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at lo cations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-i nch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provi de hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.

D. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts dischar ge on roofs . Set in adhesive material compatible with the roofing.

E. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppe rs where indicated throug h parapet. Continuousl y support scupper, set t o correct el evation, and seal flange s to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.

F. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (2 5 mm) below scupper discharge.

G. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-join t covers at locations and of configurati on indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA 's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work wi th laps, joint s, and seams that will be perm anently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anc hor to resist uplift and outward forces a ccording to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continu ous cleat anchor ed to substrate a t staggered 3 -inch (75-mm) centers.

C. Copings: A nchor to resist uplift and outwa rd forces ac cording to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.



1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of copi ng with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch (400-mm) centers.

D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterfl ashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elasto meric sealant, extending a m inimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installatio n of counterflashing with installation of base flashin g. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receiver s and fit tightl y to base flashing. Exte nd counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm ) over base flashing. Lap count erflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant.

F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating m oisture according to SMACN A recommendations and as i ndicated. C oordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surface s of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation a nd weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and stri ppable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.



ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Copings.


A. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufa cture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locati ons, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Product test reports.


F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufactu rer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Mill Finish: As manufactured. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepare , pretreat, and apply coating to exposed meta l

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer,

fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluor opolymer topcoat, with both color co at and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

B. ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

2.2 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and tem per recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.


A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minim um 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm ) thick, consisting of slip-resis ting polyethylene-film top surface la minated to la yer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper back ing; cold applied. Provide prim er when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29

deg C).


A. General: Provide materials and ty pes of fasten ers, protective coatings, se alants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer 's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads match ing color of sheet metal.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.



C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

2.5 COPINGS

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of for med-metal coping cap in section lengths not e xceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps.


a. Architectural Products Company. b. Castle Metal Products. c. Hickman Company, W. P. d. Johns Manville. e. Metal-Era, Inc. f. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. g. MM Systems Corporation. h. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Coping-Cap Material: F ormed aluminum, thickness a s required to m eet performance requirements.

a. Finish: -coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded. 4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on, fabricated from coping-cap material. 5. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches (300 mm)

wide, with integral cleats. 6. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet or stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, s eparators, sealants, and o ther miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties lev el, plumb, true to line and elevation; with li mited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.



4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Install underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to

shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separa ting dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces wi th bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of ro of specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maxi mum of 12 feet (3.6 m) with no joints within 18 inches (450 mm) of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint m embers for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use f asteners of sizes that will penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

E. Seal joints with sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

3.2 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements.

1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anc hor plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing th at meets performance requirements.


A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed.



ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof curbs. 2. Roof hatches.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories.


A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of u nits, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not lim ited to, manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with re quirements, provide pro ducts by one of the manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coated.



2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS (Not Used)

2.4 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof Curbs: Provi de metal roof curbs, in ternally reinforced and capab le of suppor ting superimposed live and de ad loads, including equipment loads and o ther construction to be supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral metal cant and i ntegral formed m ounting flange at p erimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

1. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

a. Colony Custom Curbs. b. Commodity Products Company, Inc. c. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc. d. Curbs Plus Inc. e. Custom Curb, Inc. f. LM Curbs. g. Loren Cook Company. h. Metallic Products Corporation. i. Pate Company (The). j. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. k. Roof Products, Inc. l. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. m. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. n. Uni-Curb, Inc. o. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Load Requirements: as indicated. 3. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick.

4. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish. 5. Factory install wood nailers at tops of curbs. 6. Factory insulate curbs with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick, fiber board insulation. 7. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base

flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm) , unless otherwise indicated.

8. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.

2.5 ROOF HATCHES

A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double-wall curb frame with integral d eck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weatherti ght perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware.

1. Available Manufacturers or approved equal: a. Bilco Company (The).



b. Custom Curb, Inc. c. J. L. Industries, Inc. d. Metallic Products Corporation. e. Precision Ladders, LLC. f. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. g. ThyCurb; Div of Thybar Corporation. h. Wasco Products, Inc.

2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) internal loads. 3. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches (750 by 900 mm). 4. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick.

5. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board. 6. Interior Lid Liner: Manu facturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as

outer metal lid. 7. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of sa me material and finish as

metal curb. 8. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 9. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate hatch curbs with height

tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 10. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, but t- or pintle-t ype hinge

system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

11. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and ca pable of resisting forces specified. Use fa steners, separators, sealants, and other m iscellaneous items as required for com pleting roof accesso ry installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through- penetration firestop systems for penetrations through f ire-resistance-rated constructions, includi ng both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.


A. General: For penetration s through fire-resistance-rated constructions, inclu ding both empty openings and openings containing p enetrating items, provide through- penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resi st spread of fire according to requireme nts indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistanc e rating of construction penetrated.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-pe netration firestop systems with the following ratin gs determined per ASTM E 814:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistanc e rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: For th e following conditio ns, provide through- penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:

a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop sy stems are indicated in sm oke barriers, provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft (0.0152 4cu. m/s x sq. m) at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F (204 deg C).

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traf fic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For floor penetrations wit h annular spaces exceeding 4 inches ( 100 mm) in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop sy stems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.



D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively , as deter mined per ASTM E 84.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each through- penetration firestop sy stem, submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency , showing each ty pe of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoini ng construction, and t ype of penetrating item.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equiv alent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors."

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the foll owing requirements and those speci fied in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency . A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection ser vices for firestop sy stems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop s ystems are identi cal to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetratin g items to ensure that thro ugh-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

E. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will beco me concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency(s) and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Sub ject to co mpliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Wo rk include, but are not limited to, those sy stems indicated that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Specified Technologies Inc. 5. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 6. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 7. USG Corporation.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING

A. Compatibility: Provide t hrough-penetration firestop systems that are co mpatible with one another; with the substrates fo rming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for e ach through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to com ply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and appro ved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: In stall through-penetration firestop sy stems to co mply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop sy stem manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross- sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill m aterials and allowing them to fully cure, rem ove combustible forming materials and other accessori es not indicated as per manent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids a nd cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.



2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill m aterials that will rem ain exposed after com pleting Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

D. Identification: Identif y through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of ed ge of the firestop s ystems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to re move penetrating items or fires top systems. Use mechanical fasteners for m etal labels. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Distur b. Noti fy Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop sy stem designation of applicable testing and inspecting

agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engag e an independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent in specting agency shall c omply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including th ose related to qualifi cations, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through- penetration firestop s ystems so th ey comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction onl y after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indic ated, they refer to alpha-alpha-num eric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-0000 to 0999.

C. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-1001-1999 or W-J-1000-1999.

D. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:




E. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables:


F. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-5000 to 5999 or W-J-5000-5999.

G. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-6001-6999.

H. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:


I. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 8000-8999 or W-J-8000-8999.



FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 1

SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following: 1. Head-of-wall joints. 2. Wall-to-wall joints.


A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint s ystems that are produced and installed to resist sprea d of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed.

B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-R esistance-Rated Constructions: Provide sy stems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, indicated as determined by UL 2079.

1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test.

C. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For join ts between edges of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings indicated below and those indicated in the Fire-Re sistive Joint System Schedule at the en d of Part 3, as determined by NFPA 285 and UL 2079.

1. UL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint.

2. OPL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Barrier Systems: F-ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint.

D. For fire-resistive sy stems exposed to view, pr ovide products with flam e-spread and sm oke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system.




A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved b y FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors."

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-r esistive joint s ystems that com ply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Fire-resistance tests are perfor med by a qualified testing and inspecting agency . A qualified testing and inspe cting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection serv ices for fire-resistive joint sy stems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to th ose tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following:

a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Fire-resistive joint s ystems correspond to those ind icated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint sy stems are installed according to specified requirements.

E. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until inspecting agency and building inspector of a uthorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Su bject to compliance with requirements, fire-resistive joint s ystems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3.

B. Products: Subject to com pliance with requirements, provide o ne of the fire-resistive jo int systems indicated for each application in the Fire -Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Compatibility: Provide fi re-resistive joint s ystems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint sy stem manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to i nstall fill mate rials and to com ply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistiv e joint s ystem manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire-resistive joint sy stems to co mply with Part 1 "Performance Requi rements" Article and fire-resistive joint sy stem manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated.

B. For fill materials that will rem ain exposed af ter completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire-resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports.

B. Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of fire-resistive joint s ystems shall take place in suc cessive stages as install ation of fi re-resistive joint sy stems proceeds. Do not proceed with installation of joint s ystems for the next area until inspecting agency determines completed work shows compliance with requirements.

1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report wh ether inspected fire-resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements.

C. Remove and replace fire- resistive joint sy stems where inspections indicate that the y do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joi nt systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and fire-resistive joint systems comply with requirements.

3.3 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Provide UL-classified fire resistive joint systems as required for conditions of construction and for the required fire resistance rating of the adjacent wall/partition construction.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Preformed joint sealants. 5. Acoustical joint sealants.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


E. Warranties.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualifi ed according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.


1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufactur er's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish join t sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint seal ant specified, including t hose referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicat ed for Use I for joints that will be continuousl y immersed in li quids, provide products that have undergone testing according to AST M C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deioni zed water, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealan ts are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing acco rding to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.


a. BASF Building Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. d. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M). 3. Grade: Pourable (P) or nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 100/50.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.




a. BASF Building Systems. b. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M). 3. Grade: Pourable (P) or nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 100/50.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or silic onized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems. b. Tremco Incorporated.

2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer 's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foa m with minimum density of 1 0 lb/cu. ft. ( 160 kg/cu. m) and im pregnated with a nondr ying, water-repellent agent. Factor y produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick for m to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.


a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co. d. Schul International, Inc. e. Willseal USA, LLC.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaini ng latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.




a. Pecora Corporation. b. USG Corporation.

2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherw ise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Pol yethylene tape or othe r plastic tape reco mmended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealan ts and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Cl ean out joints i mmediately before insta lling joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with ch emical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues cap able of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of seal ant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross- sectional shapes and dept hs of installed sealants re lative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that co mply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and dept hs relative to j oint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Seal ants: I mmediately after sealant appli cation and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads o f configuration indicat ed; to eli minate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figur e 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwi se

indicated.

F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Co mply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cle aning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:



2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Re sults: Seal ants not evidencing adhesive failure fr om testing or noncom pliance with other indicated re quirements will be cons idered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint s ubstrates during testing or to co mply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants co mply with indicated requirements.

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces[ <JS-#>].

1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints in dimension stone cladding. e. Joints between different materials listed above. f. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. g. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and overhead surfaces. h. Other joints as indicated.


C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces[ <JS-#>].

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated.




D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between i nterior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows.. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interi or joints i n vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated.


F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include el evations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labele d by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: , provide doors that have a maxim um transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

B. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject t o compliance with re quirements, available m anufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Firedoor Corporation. 4. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 5. Security Metal Products Corp. 6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 7. Windsor Republic Doors.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for ex posed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 (ZF120 metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coatin g designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Grout: AST M C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 in ches (102 m m), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.

H. Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing."

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt m astic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15- mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honey comb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core: As req uired to provid e fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (1.057 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or i nverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end

closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated fro m metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:



1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

a. Width: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.

C. Interior Doors: Face she ets fabricated from cold-rolled steel shee t Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below b y referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

a. Width: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Borrowed Lights Same as adjacent door frame].

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less th an 0.042

inch (1.0 mm) thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.



2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 LOUVERS (Not Used)

A. Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles form ed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame.

2.8 ACCESSORIES (Not Used)

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

B. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide o verlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of d oors where required b y

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in se ctions, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to fra me at b ack of hardware mortises in fra mes to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anc hors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not m ore than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.



4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

5) Two anchors per head for fram es more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollo w metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Sche dule and tem plates furnished as specifie d in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontem plated, mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 26 electrical Sections.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and m oldings around glazed lites where indicated. For m corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with t ype of glazing and type of installation indicated.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: ANSI/SDI A250.3.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.



b. Where frames are fabricated in s ections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locati ons by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for in stallation only after fra mes have be en

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to ba cks of fram es that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide fl oor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-act uated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust holl ow metal door fram es for squareness, alignment , twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or m inus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm ), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow m etal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6

mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch (19 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Glazing: Co mply with in stallation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not m ore than 2 inches (50 mm ) o.c. from each corner.



3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust opera ting hardware item s immediately before final inspection. Leave work in com plete and proper operating condition. Remove and repl ace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand sm ooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abr aded areas and repair with galv anizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate l ocation, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Quality Standard: In addition t o requirements specified, comply with A WI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated”.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors co mplying with NFPA 80 that are lis ted and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing by UL.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject t o compliance with re quirements, available m anufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Chappell Door Co. 2. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 4. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: P rovide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to elim inate

through-bolting hardware. 3. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead

of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

B. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specifi ed or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: Match Existing. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 6. Core: Match Existing. 7. Construction: Five p lies. Stiles and rails are bonde d to core, then entire uni t abrasive

planed before veneering.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Op enings in Fi re-Rated Doors: Manuf acturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching ve neer species of door faces and appr oved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated . Include concealed m etal glazing clips whe re required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.



2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indi cated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.6 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish : Shop prime doors w ith one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09 Section. Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Com plete fabrication, including fitting doors for openi ngs and machining for hardware that is not surface applie d, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edge s, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish system. 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish. 5. Sheen: Semigloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."



B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edg es of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, ja mbs, and bet ween pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door t o top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.



ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, lat ching or locking provisions, and ot her data pertinent to installation.


A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units co mplying with N FPA 80 that are identical to assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and la beled by UL or a nother testing and inspecting age ncy acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. If retaining this Article, also retain "Schedule" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article.

B. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors need ed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concea led work, a nd indicate in the sched ule specified in "Submittals" Article.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.



B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plat e: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled f rom plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

C. Steel Sheet: cold-rolled steel sheet substrate com plying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc coating.

E. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Ar chitectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer.

F. Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with re quirements, provide pro ducts by one of the following or approved equal: 1. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 2. Cendrex Inc. 3. Dur-Red Products. 4. Jensen Industries. 5. J. L. Industries, Inc. 6. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 7. MIFAB, Inc. 8. Milcor Inc.

C. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal. 3. Frame: Minim um 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-1/ 4-inch- (32-mm

wide, surface-mounted trim. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano. 5. Latch: Cam latch with interior release.

D. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Acce ss Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim : Fabricated from steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes.



4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch (0.9 mm.

5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide, surface-mounted trim.

6. Hinges: Continuous piano. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by flush key with interior release.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Pro vide access door a nd frame assemblies manufactured as integral u nits ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

C. Doors and Fra mes: Grind exposed welds s mooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnis h attachment devices and fasteners of ty pe required to secure access panels to t ypes of supports indicated.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.

E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish num ber required to hold do ors in flush, smooth plane when closed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach se curely to supports with plane of face pan els aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.


A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.



OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1

SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Counter doors.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for sp ecial components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment ass emblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of fi eld assembly, com ponents, and location and size of each field connection.


D. Maintenance Data.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of i nterlocking metal slats in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechani cal properties recommended by door manufacturer f or performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face.



B. Bottom Bar for Counter D oors: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated from metal to match curtain slats and finish.

C. Astragal for Interior Doors: Equi p each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.

D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's s tandard angles or channels and angles o f same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated , with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

1. Removable Posts and Jamb Guides for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard.

2.2 HOOD

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating m echanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wa ll face. Eq uip hood w ith intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

2.3 COUNTER DOORS

A. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia fo r Counter Door: Welded sheet metal assembly of the following sheet metal:

B. Integral Metal Sill for Counter Door: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of Type 304 stainless steel in manufacturer's standard thickness with No. 4 finish.

2.4 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device A ssembly: Fabricat e with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: Provide cy linders standard with manufacturer and key ed to building keying system.

2. Keys: Provide Three for each cylinder.

2.5 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES (Not Used)

2.6 MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring m ounted around a steel sh aft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel r ings. Use gr ease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.



B. Brackets: M anufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or c old-rolled steel plate.

2.7 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator unless another type of door operator is indicated.

2.8 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS (Not Used)

2.9 DOOR ASSEMBLY (at SERVERY areas)

A. Counter Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.


a. ACME Rolling Doors. b. Overhead Door Corporation. c. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 10,000.

C. Door Curtain Material: Stainless steel.

D. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) center-to-center height.

E. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia for Counter Door: Stainless steel.

1. Mounting: Face of wall.

F. Sill Configuration for Counter Door: No sill.

G. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Locking Device Assembly: locking bars, operable from inside with cylinders.

H. Manual Door Operator Manufacturer's standard crank operator.

I. Door Finish: 1. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 (polished directional satin).



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equi pment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment s upports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily , free of warp, twist, or distorti on. Lubricate b earings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representa tive to train Owner' s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for window walls.


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effect s of the following performance requirements without exc eeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design alum inum-framed systems, including com prehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer , using perform ance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller

E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide alu minum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:



1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

2. Test Durations: 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Provi de aluminum-framed systems with maxi mum air l eakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Pr ovide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazi ng and framing areas when test ed according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed sy stems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of prov isions for system expansion and contraction and for d rainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the s upervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

E. Product test reports.

F. Maintenance data.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.



D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Ae sthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one anot her, and to adjoini ng construction. Perform ance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification b y one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

E. Accessible Entrances: C omply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Co mpliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessib ility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

F. Source Limitations for Alum inum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source fro m single manufacturer.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer 's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace com ponents on which fini shes do not comply with requirem ents or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject t o compliance with re quirements, available m anufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 3. TRACO. 4. Tubelite. 5. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for t ype of use and finish indicated.



1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's s tandard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immedi ately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to reco mmendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: M anufacturer's standard high-strength alu minum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer 's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaini ng, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasten ers are s ubject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

D. Concealed Flashing: Ma nufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleedi ng flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer 's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.



2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS (Not Used)

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locatio ns to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and weldi ng oxides fro m exposed surface s by descaling or grinding.

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate com ponents that, when assem bled, have the followi ng characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for ther mal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection de vices that are concealed from view t o greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project a ccording to Shop Drawings.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).

1. Color and Gloss: White with gloss as select ed by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.



5. Install anchors with separ ators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and el ectrolytic deterioration.

6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissi milar metals, protect against galvanic a ction by painting contact surf aces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing jo ints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignm ent with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."


A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections.

B. Repair or re move work i f test r esults and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and ins pecting, at Contractor 's expense, will be performed to determ ine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

D. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass test s and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS (Not Used)



AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229 - 1

SECTION 084229 - AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances.


A. Opening-Force Requirements:

1. Power-Operated Doors: Not m ore than 50 l bf (222 N) required to m anually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width.

B. Entrapment Force Requirements:

1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not m ore than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent stopped door from closing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Activation and safety devices. 3. Include hardware schedule and indic ate hardware types, functions, quantities, and

locations.

C. Sample: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Product certificates.



G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.




A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.

E. Emergency-Exit Door R equirements: Com ply with requirements of authorities hav ing jurisdiction for automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer 's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of a utomatic entrances that fail in materi als or workmanship wit hin specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace com ponents that show evide nce of dete rioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for t ype of use and finish indicated.

1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's st andard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreat ment. Select surface preparation methods according to r ecommendations in SSPC -SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.



C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

E. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

F. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

G. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Pr emixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107; of consistency suitable for application.

H. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer 's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaini ng, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

2.2 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

A. General: Provide manufacturer' s standard au tomatic entrances including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation.

B. Sliding Automatic Entrance :


a. Bi-parting-Sliding Units:

1) Besam Automated Entrance Sy stems, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2) DORMA Automatics; Div. of DORMA Group North America. 3) Horton Automatics; Div. of Overhead Door Corporation. 4) KM Systems, Inc. 5) Nabco Entrances Inc. 6) Stanley Access Technologies; Div. of The Stanley Works.

2. Configuration: Bi-parting sliding door(s), with transom and sidelite(s).

a. Traffic Pattern: Two way. b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaf(leaves) only.

3. Operator Features:

a. Power opening and closing. b. Drive System: Chain or belt. c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. d. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds. e. Obstruction recycle. f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator.



4. Sliding Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly that allows vertical a djustment; consisting of n ylon- or delrin-covered, ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a con tinuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a n ylon- or de lrin-covered, continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly.

a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two anti -rise rollers for each active leaf.

5. Sliding Door Threshold: Manufacturer' s standard threshold members and bottom-guide track system, with stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels.

a. Configuration: No threshold across door opening and guide track sy stem at sidelites.

6. Combination Activation and Safety Device: Combination motion/presence sensor. 7. Activation Device: Moti on sensors mounted on door header to detect ped estrians in

activating zone, Push-plate switch on each side of door to activate door operator. 8. Safety Devices Presence sensor m ounted on each side of door header and one

photoelectric beam mounted in sidelite j ambs to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.

9. Sidelite Safety Device: Presence sensor, mounted above each sidelite on side of door opening through which doors travel, to det ect obstructions and to prevent d oor from opening.

10. Finish: Finish fra ming, door(s), sidelite(s), and header with finish matching adjacent storefront.

a. Color: to match adjacent storefront system.

2.3 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS

A. Framing and Transom Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Extruded Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wall thickness.

B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick, gl azed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- (3. 2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile an d rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails.

1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extru ded-aluminum stops an d manufacturer's standard preformed gaskets.

2. Stile Design: Medium stile, 3-1/2-inch (90-mm) nominal width. 3. Rail Design: 5-inch (125-mm) nominal height.

C. Sidelite(s) and Transom : Manufacturer's sta ndard 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) deep sidelite(s) and transom with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design and finish.



1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door. 2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extru ded-aluminum stops an d

manufacturer's standard preformed gaskets.

D. Headers: Fabricated fro m minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded alu minum and extending full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operator s and controls. Provide hinged or rem ovable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators an d controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.

1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Capacity: Capable of supp orting doors up to 175 lb (79 kg) per leaf over spans up to 14

feet (4.3 m) without intermediate supports.

a. Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 14 feet (4.3 m).

E. Signage: Affixed to both sides of each door as for type of door and its operation.

1. Application Process: Door manufacturer's standard process.

2.4 DOOR OPERATORS AND ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES

A. Door Operators: Provide door operato rs of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of expos ure; and for long-term , maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.

1. Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads.

2. Electromechanical Operators: Concea led, self-contained, overhead unit powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power off.

B. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-freque ncy, microwave-scanner units with metal or plastic housing; adjustable to provi de detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds.

1. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection. 2. For one-way-traffic entrances, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are

fully closed.

C. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, infrared-sc anner units with meta l or plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds. Sensors shall remain active at all times.

D. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed.

E. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted.



2.5 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish.

B. Manual Opening for P ower-Operated Swinging Doors: Pr ovide hardware that in a p ower failure allows door to open with a manual force not to exceed 30 lbf (133 N) according to BHMA A156.10.

C. Breakaway Device for Po wer-Operated Doors: Pr ovide breakaway device that allows door to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force to open door shall be 50 lbf (222 N) according to BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of door operator while in breakaway mode.

D. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thu mb turn, with minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) long throw bolt; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, six-pin mortise type.

a. Keying: Integrate into building master key system. 2. Two-Point Locking for Biparting-Folding Doors: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, mortise-type,

laminated-steel hookbolt mounted in stile of ac tive door leaf that engages active leaf of opposite door when oper ated by cylinder; and with concealed, vertical fl ush bolts mounted in each hinge stile that engage header when operated by cylinders.

E. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or n ylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

2.6 ACCESSORIES (Not Used)

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.

B. Framing: Provide automatic entrance s as pref abricated assemblies. Co mplete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.

C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware.

D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.

E. Glazing: Fabricate fra ming with minimum glazing edge clearan ces for thickness and type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."



F. Hardware: F actory install hardware to greatest extent possible; re move only as required f or final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors.

G. Activation and Safety Devices:

1. General: Factory install devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel.

2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jam bs of sidelites, with dimension above finished floor as follows:

a. Top Beam: 48 inches (1219 mm). b. Bottom Beam: 24 inches (610 mm).

3. Install photoelectric beams in sides of guide rails, with dimension above finished floor not less than 24 inches (610 mm).

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).

1. Color and Gloss: White with gloss as select ed by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.

1. Where aluminum will contact dissi milar metals, protect against galvanic a ction by painting contact surfa ces with primer or by applying sealant or tape reco mmended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

B. Entrances: Install autom atic entrances plumb and true in alignment w ith established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.

1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers operating brackets, and guides leve l and true to location with anchorage for

permanent support. 3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring withi n framing

members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. 4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.



C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution s ystem as specified in Division 26 Sections.

D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control sy stem as specified in Division 28 Sections.

E. Activation and Safety Devices: Inst all and ad just devices to provide detection field and functions indicated.

F. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

G. Sealants: Comply with require ments specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to provide weathertight installation.

1. Set bottom-guide track system, framing members and flashings in full sealant bed. 2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.

H. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door as required by referenced door standards.

I. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bu ndle, lace, and train conductors to ter minal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bendi ng radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

J. Inspection: Owner may engage a certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrances and prepare test and inspection reports. 1. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

K. Adjusting: Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for weathertight closure; comply with requirements in BHMA A156.10.

1. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of co mpleted installation equivalent to 3 da ys' use b y normal traffic (100 to 300 c ycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts.

L. Demonstration: Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances.



VINYL WINDOWS 085313 - 1

SECTION 085313 - VINYL WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes single hung, fixed and transom vinyl framed windows.


A. General: Provide vi nyl windows to match existing capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

B. Structural Performance: Provide vinyl windows capable of withstanding th e effects of the following loads, based on testing units representativ e of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:

1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in m iles per hour (meters per seco nd) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 m/s). b. Importance Factor: 1.15 c. Exposure Category: C.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of vinyl window indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hard ware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and installation details.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish.

D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.



B. Glazing Publications: Com ply with publis hed recommendations of glass m anufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer 's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflec tion, water leakage, air infiltration, or

condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.

2. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Vinyl Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to com pliance with requirements, provide windows to match existing or a comparable product approved by Architect:

2.2 WINDOW

A. Window Type: Fixed and single hung.

B. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 1. Performance Class and Grade: As indicated.

C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide vinyl windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 65.

D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide vinyl window s with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velo city and winter condition tem peratures when tested according to ASTM E 1423.

1. U-Factor: 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.0 W/sq. m x K) or less.



E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide vin yl windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.50, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.

2.3 GLAZING

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Match existing. Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed vinyl window units.

B. Glazing System: M anufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.

2.4 INSECT SCREENS

A. General: Match Existing . Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tig ht-fitting, removable arrangement, with a m inimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Dividers (False Muntins): Provide dividers in designs indicated for each sash lite to m atch existing.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate vinyl windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.

B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator.

C. Mullions: Provide mullions and co ver plates as shown, co mpatible with window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window u nits. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for m ovement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Pro vide mullions and cover pl ates capable of withstandi ng design loads of window units. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units.

D. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchor s for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to m atch window units. Pro vide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units.

E. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap -on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section "Glazing" and glazing s ystem indicated. Provi de glazing stops to m atch sash and ventilator frames.

2.7 VINYL FINISHES

A. Integral Finish and Color: Uniform, solid, homogeneous interior and exterior to match existing.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

B. Install windows level, plum b, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding t hermal movement, anchored securely in place to struct ural support, and in proper relation to w all flashing and other adjacent construction.

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electroly tic action at points of contact with other materials.

E. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, scr eens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping fo r smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

F. Clean exposed surfaces immedi ately after installin g windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

G. Clean factory-glazed glass i mmediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cle aning and maintenance. Rem ove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or da maged during construction period.



DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Commercial door hardware. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware.

B. See Division 08 door sections for astragals and door silencers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, including wiring diagrams.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish.

D. Product certificates & test reports.

E. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and asse mbly of door hardware, as well a s procedures and diagrams.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, f ire rating, and material of each door and frame.

2) Type, style, function, size, quantit y, and finish of each door hardwar e item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.

3) Complete designations of every ite m required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer.

4) Description of each electri fied door hardware function, i ncluding location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared b y or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.




A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hard ware Consultant and who is experienced in pro viding consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and exten t to that indicated for this Project.

C. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and insp ecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labele d by a testing a nd inspecting agency acceptable to au thorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.

E. Keying Conference: Conduct confer ence at Project site to com ply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Co ordination." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Distribute do or hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer 's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within speci fied warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:

a. Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: Five y ears from date of Substantial Completion.



b. Exit Devices: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule or approved equal.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and co mparable in quality to nam ed products on door and hardware schedules.

B. Designations: Requirem ents for desig n, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indi cated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufactur er and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products com plying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.

2.2 HINGES, GENERAL

A. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.

C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors.

D. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head;. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

2.3 HINGES

A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.



B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.

C. Available Manufacturers (or approved equal):

1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI). 3. Hager Companies (HAG). 4. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 5. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).

2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the lat ch. Locks shall not require use of a key , tool, or special knowledge for operation.

C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA A156.25.

D. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Schlage D series or approved equal 2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

E. Lock Throw: Co mply with testing requirem ents for length of bo lts required for labeled fire doors.

F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: Function num bers and descriptions indicated in door hardware s ets comply with the following:

1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2. 2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.

B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Series 4000.


a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). b. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). c. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hard ware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

(CR).



d. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL). e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). f. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). g. Security Door Controls (SDC). h. Weiser Lock; a Masco Company (WEI).

C. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A156.13; Series 1000.

1. Available Manufacturers or approved equal: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). b. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). c. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hard ware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

(CR). e. Folger Adam Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (FAS). f. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL). g. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). h. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). i. Security Door Controls (SDC).

2.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS

A. General: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered, of strength and configuration indicated; with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door.

1. Type: Full exterior or full interior, as required by application indicated. 2. Strength Ranking: 1500 lbf (6672 N)

B. Delayed-Egress Locks: BHMA A156.24.

1. Means of Egress Doors: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force not more than 15 lbf (67 N) for not more than 3 seconds, as required by NFPA 101.

2. Security Grade: Activated from secure side of door by initiating device. 3. Movement Grade: Activated by door movement as initiating device.

C. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

1. Door Controls International (DCI). 2. Dortronics Systems, Inc. (DS). 3. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LSE). 4. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 5. Security Door Controls (SDC).

2.7 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS

A. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1, surface mounted, battery powered, housed in metal case; with red-and-white lettering reading "EMERGENCY EXIT PUSH TO OPEN--AL ARM WILL SOUND."



B. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

1. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). 2. Detex Corporation (DTX). 3. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

2.8 DOOR BOLTS

A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirem ents for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors.

B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

C. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

1. Flush Bolt Heads: Mini mum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter rods of stainless steel with minimum 12-inch- (305-mm-) long rod for doors up to 84 inches (2134 mm ) in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches (2134 mm).

2. Available Manufacturers or approved equal: a. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). b. Door Controls International (DCI). c. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). d. Hager Companies (HAG). e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). f. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). g. Trimco (TBM).

D. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; designed for mortising into door edge.


a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). b. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). c. Door Controls International (DCI). d. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). e. Hager Companies (HAG). f. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). g. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). h. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). i. Trimco (TBM).

2.9 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).



C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Co mply with NFPA 101. E xit devices shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the lat ch. Locks shall not require use of a key , tool, or special knowledge for operation.

D. Panic Exit Devices: Li sted and lab eled by a te sting and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are li sted and labe led by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

F. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3.

G. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Through Bolts: For exit devices and .

I. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). 2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). 3. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 4. Door Controls International (DCI). 5. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Mem ber of The DORMA Group North America

(DAH). 6. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). 7. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LSE). 8. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 9. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD).

2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tu mbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Six.

B. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; with interchangeable cores.

C. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:

1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cy linders with feature that perm its voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.



D. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.

E. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

1. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ABL). 2. ASSA, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ASA). 3. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). 4. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 5. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 6. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).

2.11 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, co mplying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference into master or grandmaster key system.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide three cylinder change keys and five master or grand master keys.

2.12 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM (Not Used)

2.13 OPERATING TRIM (Not Used)

2.14 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS (Not Used)

2.15 CLOSERS

A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

1. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 2. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. 3. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Com ply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width.

C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface inte gral smoke detector and closer device with fire alarm system.

D. Size of Units: Unless otherwi se indicated, com ply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers dependi ng on size of do or, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide f actory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.



E. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Pro vide type of ar m required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.


a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hard ware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

(CR). c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America

(DAH). d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). f. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

F. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15.

1. Life-Safety Type: On release of hold open, do or becomes self-closing. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection sy stem, loss of power, sp rinkler system, or fire alarm.


a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hard ware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).

b. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH).

c. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). d. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). e. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). f. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

G. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.

2.16 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Size: 2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1 inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets.

B. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from material indicated in door hardware sets.

1. Material: 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel. 2. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). b. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). c. Hager Companies (HAG). d. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). f. Pawling Corporation (PAW).



g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). h. Trimco (TBM).

C. Plastic Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled 4 sides; fabricated fro m material indicated in door hardware sets 1. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

a. Balco Inc. (BAL). b. Construction Specialties, Inc.; a C/S Group company (CS). c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). d. Hager Companies (HAG). e. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). g. Korogard Wall Protection Sy stems, Inc.; Div. of RJF International Corporati on

(KWS). h. Pawling Corporation (PAW). i. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). j. Trimco (TBM).

2.17 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

1. Provide wall stops for doors unless floor or other type stops are sc heduled, indicated or necessary. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.

B. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

C. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15.

D. Silencers for Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubbe r; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

E. Available Manufacturers or approved equal: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 2. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 3. Door Controls International (DCI). 4. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Mem ber of The DORMA Group North America

(DAH). 5. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). 6. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 7. Hager Companies (HAG). 8. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 9. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 10. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 11. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 12. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 13. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).



2.18 DOOR GASKETING

A. Standard: BHMA A156.22.

B. General: Provide contin uous weather-strip g asketing on exterior doors and provide smoke , light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Appl y to bott om of door, fo rming seal with threshold when door is

closed.

C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assem blies complying with NFPA 105 that are li sted and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdictio n, for sm oke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are lis ted and labeled b y a testin g and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide onl y those units where re silient or flexible se al strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

G. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).

2.19 THRESHOLDS

A. Standard: BHMA A156.21.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

D. Available Manufacturers or approved equal:

1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 4. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).



2.20 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE (Not Used)

2.21 FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufac turer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a qualit y equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or form ing methods if different from specified standard.

B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to co mmercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except alum inum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire-rated applications.

C. Finishes: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Steel Doors and Fram es: Comply with DHI A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied door hardware according to ANSI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.

C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Fram es: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Custom Steel Doors and Fra mes: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders ' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."

3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

D. Install each door hardware item to com ply with manufacturer's written instructions. Whe re cutting and fitting are required to i nstall door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way , coordinate removal, storage, and reinsta llation of surface protective trim units with finishing w ork specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not inst all surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant co mplying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Adjustment: Adjust and c heck each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of ever y unit. Replace units that canno t be adjusted to operate a s



intended. Adjust door c ontrol devices to co mpensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required b y authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep

period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading e dge of the door.


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultan t: Owner may engage a qualif ied independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS (See Drawings) END OF SECTION 087100


GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the follow ing products and applications, includi ng those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Storefront framing. 4. Glazed entrances. 5. Interior borrowed lites.


A. Delegated Design: Desig n glass, including com prehensive engineering analysis ac cording to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass

to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 4. Differential Shading: D esign glass t o resist thermal stresses induced by differential

shading within individual glass lites.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Co mpatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and com patibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are s ubmitted based on pre vious testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glas s product ot her than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List gl ass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. U se same designations indicated on Drawings.


GLAZING 088000 - 2

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to thes e publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for I nsulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or anothe r certification agency acceptable to authoritie s having jurisdiction. Labe l shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agenc y acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test stan dard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or oth er openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

D. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Perman ently marked either on spacers or on at le ast one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer 's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to repl ace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterior ation of coated g lass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated gla ss contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and ot her indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Gla ss: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replac e laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deteriorati on of laminated glass is defined as defects develo ped from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to m anufacturer's written instructions. Defect s include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, a nd blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


GLAZING 088000 - 3


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Gl ass: Manufacturer's standar d form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that dete riorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated , it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Strength: Where float gl ass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Perfor mance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing t hat passes basic protectio n testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade.

D. Thermal and Optical Per formance Properties: Pr ovide glass with perfor mance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test dat a, based on proc edures indicated below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Vis ible Transmittance: C enter-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

1. Products: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.


GLAZING 088000 - 4

b. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

2.3 LAMINATED GLASS (Not Used)

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Manufacturers: Subject t o compliance with re quirements, available m anufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. 2. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separ ated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and co mplying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

2.5 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agenc y acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on t esting according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.

A. GLAZING GASKETS Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or m olded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gas kets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to m aintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft com pression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing seal ants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seal s of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under c onditions of service and app lication, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.


GLAZING 088000 - 5

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and gl ass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazi ng Products: Prod ucts that are approved b y testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-re sistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

2.7 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent so lids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to c ontinuous

pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for gla zing applications in which tape is not subject to co ntinuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Clo sed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhe sive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

C. Spacers: E lastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Edge Blocks: Elasto meric material of hardness nee ded to lim it glass lateral movement (side walking).

E. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is u sed for application and fire-protection rating indicated.


GLAZING 088000 - 6

2.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Interior Borrowed Lites: Clear heat-strengthened float glass. 1. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.10 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Vinyl window glass: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 0.25”. 3. Outdoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface. 7. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Storefront glass: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 0.25”. 3. Outdoor Lite: clear heat-strengthened float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface. 7. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.11 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES (Not Used)

2.12 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with com bined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, seal ants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel d imensions as required by Project conditions duri ng installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.


GLAZING 088000 - 7

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to com ply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise require d by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or need ed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as reco mmended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

2.13 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when com pressed by glass, t heir exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place agai nst faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

2.14 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths reco mmended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and fra me or fixed s top so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces o f removable stops. Start gasket applicat ions at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant reco mmended by gasket manufacturer.


GLAZING 088000 - 8

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Cent er glass lites in openings on s etting blocks and press firmly against soft com pression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, apply ing pressure uniformly to compression gas kets. Co mpress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without de veloping bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

2.15 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face cl earances and to prevent sealan t from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control dept h of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ens ure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Re move nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass fro m contact with contaminating substances r esulting from constructi on operations. If, despite suc h protection, conta minating substances do co me into contact wi th glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exte rior concrete a nd other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a m onth, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abra ded or that is da maged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).

1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that i ncorporate non-load-bearing steel fr aming, provide m aterials and c onstruction identical to those tested i n assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in asse mbly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Co mply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: m anufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coat ing, soft temper, 0.0625-i nch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:



1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for a ttaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, wit hout failure, a load equal to 5 tim es that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical or expansion anchor.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabrica ted from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for atta ching hangers of ty pe indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 t imes that imposed by construction as deter mined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet 1 by 3/16 inch (25.4 by 4.76 mm).

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Resilient Furring Channel s: 1/2-inch- ( 12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

F. Grid Suspension Sy stem for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


2. Products: Subject to com pliance with requirem ents, provide o ne of the following or approved equal:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.



1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not le ss than indicated for studs, installed wit h studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thicknes s not less than i ndicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel s heet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to i nterior partition fram ing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

C. Firestop Track: As specified in Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for bl ocking and bracing in length and wi dth indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.7 mm).

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with m inimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-

mm-) thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1. 37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjust able, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-

steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonsl otted web, face flange of 1 -1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 m m), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.



2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of ty pe, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 in ch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in AS TM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with require ments in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Isolate suspension systems from building structur e where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to m iss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts an d other construc tion within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in th e form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.



3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each othe r and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structu ral supports or substrates above suspended ceilings , except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Conti nue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of fra ming systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw v ertical studs at jambs to jam b anchor clips on do or frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for i nstallation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Inst all framing to com ply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.



C. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

D. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section " Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. Except at ext erior corners, securely attach narrow f langes of furring m embers to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed fo r masonry attachment, or po wder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior c orners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with sh ort flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attach ed channel. At in terior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

E. Installation Tolerance: Ins tall each framing member so fastening surface s vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on

same backing indicated for Work.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested i n assembly indicated according t o ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in asse mbly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with require ments, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not l imited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:

a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum. c. Lafarge North America Inc.



d. USG Corporation.

B. Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1.


2. Products: Subject to com pliance with requirem ents, provide o ne of the following or approved equal:

a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

3. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.



B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use form ulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, beveled panel e dges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat : For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable toppi ng

compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxilia ry materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or join t compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws com plying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, u se screws of type and s ize recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without m embrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.



1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, jo b-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.


a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Regency Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene. b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT.

2. Texture: Medium.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject pane ls that are wet, moisture damaged, and m old damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied t o non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/ 2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of pane ls are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gy psum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lu mber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:



1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

3.3 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.

C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, a ttach to fra ming with s ame fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, att ach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joi nts according to ASTM C 840 and in s pecific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior a ngles, edge trim, contro l joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, excep t those with trim having flanges not inte nded for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

3. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.



a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved sample free of starved spot s or other e vidence of t hin application or of application patterns.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive t exture finish by covering them with masking agents, pol yethylene film, or other m eans. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surf aces, immediately remove droppings a nd overspray to prevent dam age according to texture-finish manufacturer 's written recommendations.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed product s from damage fro m weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or m oisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not lim ited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



TILING 093000 - 1

SECTION 093000 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic tile. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Tile backing panels.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples:

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.


1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Fu rnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of am ount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE PRODUCTS

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. Kitchen tile: Unglazed square-edged quarry tile.



TILING 093000 - 2

a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. b. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. c. Florida Tile Industries, Inc.

2. Face Size: 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm). 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 4. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes a nd coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base: Coved with surface bullnose top edge, face size 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm).

C. Tile Type Decorative thin wall tile.


a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. b. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. c. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. d. Florida Tile Industries, Inc.

2. Module Size: as indicated on drawings. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. 5. Finish: Bright, opaque glaze. 6. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 9. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles factory asse mbled and grouted with manufacturer's

standard white silicone rubber. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes a nd coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base: module size as indicated on drawings. b. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose cap, module size as indicated on drawings. c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Inst allations: Bullnose shape, same size as

adjoining flat tile. d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle

pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.


TILING 093000 - 3

2.2 THRESHOLDS (Not Used)

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS (See Gypsum Board section 092900)

2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer' s standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

2.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer' s standard pr oduct that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

2.6 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with require ments, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not l imited to, the following: a. Laticrete International, Inc.

2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

2.7 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.

B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.

C. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting m aterials for installations indicated.

B. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.


TILING 093000 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installati on tolerances an d other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm , dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete s ubstrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar with tro welable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive wa terproofing by applying a re inforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If i ndicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile su rfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceram ic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedul es. Co mply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Cera mic Tile" that are ref erenced in TCA installati on methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grout ing materials used.

1. For the foll owing installations, follow pr ocedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors in laundries. c. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. d. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interru ptions unless otherwise indicated. Term inate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.


TILING 093000 - 5

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without m arring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixt ures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid patte rn unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work an d center tile fields in both directions in e ach space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are l ess than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 3. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Provide expans ion joints and other sealant-fill ed joints, including contr ol, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicat ed. Form joints during i nstallation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to c omply with require ments in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

H. Grout Sealer: Apply grout seal er to grout joints according to grout-seale r manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, rem ove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

I. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for t ype of appli cation indicated. Use latex-portland ce ment mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

K. Install crack isolation m embrane to com ply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and c oordinating acoustical panel ceiling installation with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items:

C. Samples: For each exposed finish 6”x6” and 12” long samples of suspension system, moldings and trim.


E. Research/evaluation reports.



A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assem blies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Identify materials with appropriate marki ngs of appl icable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following:

1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension S ystems Requiring Seism ic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580.



D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products ins talled and th at are pack aged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantit y of each exposed com ponent equal to 2.0

percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five ti mes the desi gn load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

1. Size: Select wire diam eter so its stre ss at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

E. Seismic perimeter stabilizer bars, seismic struts, and seismic clips.

F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that com ply with seism ic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges o f suspension system runners.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

A. Available Products: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; As indicated on Drawings or approved equal. 2. USG Interiors, Inc.; As indicated on Drawings or approved equal.

C. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type as indicated on drawings.



D. Color, edge detail, thickness and size: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING



1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; As indicated on Drawings or approved equal. 2. USG Interiors, Inc.; As indicated on Drawings or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seism ic design requirem ents indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance b order widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building' s structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. S play hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resu lting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, inst all carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 1. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of ty pe indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of ac oustical panels. Screw att ach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undam aged edges and fit accurately into suspension s ystem runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each ty pe of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 8 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products.

B. Until Substantial Com pletion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install resilient products after other finishi ng operations, including pain ting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:




a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. c. Johnsonite.. d. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe) & Straight (flat or toeless).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

H. Finish: Matte.

I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patc hing Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or a pproved by m anufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that co mply with the follo wing limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to m anufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substr ates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.



C. Do not install resilient products until t hey are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

D. Sweep and v acuum clean substrates to be cove red by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and ot her permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practic able without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.


A. Comply with manufacturer's writt en instructions for cleaning and prote ction of resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT PLANK FLOORING 096516 - 1

SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT PLANK FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl plank floor covering.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering la youts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-b y-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.






A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor coverings.


C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials describe below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish and install not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each colr, pattern and type of floor covering installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING

A. Products: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, available product s that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amtico plank flooring – see finish schedule and Interior Finish Legend on the drawings.

B. Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 0.080 inch (2.0 mm thick.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Sheet Width: Planks.

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.



B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.



2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 l b of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m)] in 24 hours.

b. Perform tests as reco mmended by m anufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass test(s).

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substr ates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor coverings until the y are sa me temperature as space wher e they are to be installed.

1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be cove red by floor coverings immediately before installation.

3.2 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.

B. Lay out floor coverings as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.

C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor co verings as marked on su bstrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates per manufacturer’s written installation instructions.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor covering.



B. Floor Polish: If reco mmended by manufacturer. Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering before applying floor polish.

C. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each t ype of floor tile. Include floor tile lay outs, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.






A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile.


C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Armstrong World Ind ustries, Inc.; Standard Excelon ‘Im perial Texture’ or approved

equal.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.



B. Adhesives: Water-resistant t ype recommended by manufacturer to suit fl oor tile and subs trate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that co mply with the follo wing limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to m anufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.



3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform test s recommended by floor covering m anufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 l b of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substr ates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and v acuum clean substrates to be cove red by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles fro m center marks established with principal walls, discountin g minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles fro m cartons in the same s equence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Di scard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and perm anent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or m arked for future cutting by repeating on fl oor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or ot her nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a f ull spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a co mpleted installation witho ut open crack s, voids, rai sing and p uckering at joi nts, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.




A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Floor Polish: Rem ove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blem ishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes modular carpet tile.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 2. Pattern of installation. 3. Insets and borders. 4. Edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 5. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each color and texture required.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and ot her Accessory Stripping: 1 2-inch- (300-mm-) long

Samples.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced inst aller who is certified b y the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification progr am requirements.


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Hu midity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."



B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpe t tiles until wet work in spaces is co mplete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs un til slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range reco mmended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet til es, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace co mponents of carpet tile inst allation that fail in m aterials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, m ore than 10 percent loss of face f iber, edge raveling, snags , runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dim ensional stability, and delamination.


1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE


1. Lees

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. b. Pattern: Match Architect's samples. c. Source: Lees or approved equal.

B. Surface Pile Weight: As indicated on drawings.

C. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).

D. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.



E. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

F. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646. 2. Tuft Bind: Not less than 3 lbf (13 N) per ASTM D 1335. 3. Delamination: Not less than 3.5 lbf/in. (15 N/mm) per ASTM D 3936. 4. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) of specifi ed size di mensions, as

determined by physical measurement. 5. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less per ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). 6. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24. 7. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165. 8. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 4 0 AFU (AAT CC fading units) per

AATCC 16, Option E.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resi stant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Com ply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

D. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface prep aration and the application of paint sy stems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 4. Wood. 5. Plastic trim fabrications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

C. Product List: Print out of current "MPI A pproved Products List" for each pr oduct category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Com plying with MPI stan dards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workm anship: Co mply with requirem ents in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials describ ed below that are from same production run (batch m ix) as materials applied and that are packa ged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint sy stem that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint s ystem, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: Match existing.

2.2 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS

A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).

2.3 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS

A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5).

1. VOC Content: E Range of [E1] [E2].

2.4 ALUMINUM PAINT

A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for c ompliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Plaster: 12 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of subst rates, including surface conditi ons and co mpatibility with exist ing finishes and primers.



D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes C ontractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer' s written instructions and reco mmendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substan ces that could impair bond of paints, including dirt , oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other su rface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage fro m paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades b y cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved b y Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of constru ction activities of ot her trades, touch up and resto re damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss).

2. Aluminum Paint System: MPI EXT 5.1K.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A.

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.



c. Topcoat: Exterior latex semigloss.

2. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3H.

a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

3. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B.

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss)

C. Aluminum Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.4H.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.4F.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss). d.

D. Wood Panel Substrates: Including fascias & soffits.

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.4K.

a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat).

2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.4G.

a. Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat)



INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface prep aration and the application of paint sy stems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Gypsum board. 3. Spray-textured ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



C. Product List: Print out of current "MPI A pproved Products List" for each pr oduct category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Com plying with MPI stan dards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workm anship: Co mply with requirem ents in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL




1. Provide materials for use within each paint sy stem that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint s ystem, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following lim its for VOC content, exclusive of colorants a dded to a tint base, whe n calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these r equirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

2.3 METAL PRIMERS

A. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107.

2.4 LATEX PAINTS

A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Flat).

B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Satin).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of subst rates, including surface conditi ons and co mpatibility with exist ing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.



1. Beginning coating application constitutes C ontractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.


A. Comply with manufacturer' s written instructions and reco mmendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substan ces that could impair bond of paints, including dirt , oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other su rface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage fro m paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades b y cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved b y Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of constru ction activities of ot her trades, touch up and resto re damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S.

a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based). b. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex semigloss.

B. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex satin emamel.

C. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex flat.



STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1

SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the following substrates:

1. Interior Substrates: a. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry).

1.2 SUBMITTALS



C. Product List: Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Pr oducts List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: C omplying with MPI stand ards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workm anship: Co mply with requirem ents in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and finish systems indicated.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL




1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a finish sy stem, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-A pplied Interior Primers, Stains, and Transparent Finishes: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do n ot apply to primers, stains, a nd transparent finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 6. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 7. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

C. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 WOOD FILLERS

A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.

2.3 PRIMERS AND SEALERS

A. Alkyd Sanding Sealer: MPI #102.

B. Lacquer Sanding Sealer: MPI #84.

2.4 STAINS

A. Interior Wood Stain (Semitransparent): MPI #90.

2.5 SEALERS

A. Waterborne Clear Acrylic (Satin): MPI #128, Gloss Level 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




1. Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an electronic moisture meter.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including com patibility with existing finishes.

3. Begin finish application only after uns atisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

4. Beginning application of finish sy stem constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrate and conditions.


A. Comply with manufacturer' s written instructions and reco mmendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Apply wood filler paste to open-gra in woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.

C. Protect work of other trades against dam age from finish ap plication. Corr ect damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, an d refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in a n undamaged condition.

D. At completion of constru ction activities of ot her trades, touch up and resto re damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces.

3.3 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Finish Carpentry Substrates:

1. Waterborne Clear Acrylic Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.3W.

a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent). One Finish Coat: Waterborne clear acrylic satin.



WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Impact-resistant handrails.


A. Structural Performance: P rovide handrails capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. 2. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each im pact-resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specifi ed, 12 inches (3 00 mm) long.

D. Material certificates.

E. Material test reports.


G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As deter mined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.



C. Regulatory Requirements: Co mply with applicable provision s in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Co mpliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessib ility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer 's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection unit s that fail in m aterials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chem ical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant; with a minimum impact-resistance rating of 15 ft-lbf/in. (800 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fas teners compatible with ite ms being fa stened. Us e security-type fasteners where exposed to view.

D. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70g/L or less when calculate d according t o 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



2.2 HANDRAILS

A. Impact-Resistant Plastic Handrails: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or approved equal.

2. Cover: Minimum 0.078-inch- (2.0-mm) thick, extruded rigid plastic; in dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.

a. Single Handrail: C ylindrical tube prof ile cover with conti nuous retainer; with mounting brackets supporting bottom of rail.

b. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Retainer: Minimum 0.080-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum. 4. Mounting Bracket: Extended mounting on mounting brackets. 5. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; matching color cover;

field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover. 6. Accessories: Concealed splices, cushions, and mounting hardware.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install i mpact-resistant wall protection units level, plum b, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in l ocations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.

2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation.

a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice

aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches (305 mm).

c. Adjust end caps as required to ensure tight seams.

B. Immediately after co mpletion of installation, clean plastic covers and acc essories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.

C. Remove excess adhesive using m ethods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.



TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Private-use bathroom accessories. 4. Underlavatory guards.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Schedule:

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following named product or approved equal: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

2.2 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following named product or a approved equal: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or approved equal: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.


TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2

2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following named product or approved equal: 1. Truebro, Inc or as specified on drawings.

B. Underlavatory Guard:

A. Basis-of-Design Product: as indicated on drawings. 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain pi ping assemblies, that

prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow s ervice access withou t removing coverings.

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to m anufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and reco mmended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plum b, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.



FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirem ents in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

B. Coordinate size of fire pro tection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Products: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, provide the following or approved equal: a. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; as indicated on drawings



2. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with m inimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

C. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and peri meter door frame overl apping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.

D. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

E. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

F. Door Style: Flush opaque panel, frameless, with no exposed hinges.

G. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's stand ard door-operating hardware of proper type for cab inet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

H. Accessories: 1. Identification: Lettering com plying with authorities having jurisdiction for lett er style,

size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.

a. Identify fire extinguishe r in fire pr otection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Die Cut Letters. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

I. Finishes:

1. Stainless Steel: No. 4.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim , frame, d oor, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joi nts and grind smooth.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable fra ming depth and bl ocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed and prepare re cesses as required by type and size of c abinet and trim style.

B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated.

C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D. Identification: Apply lettering at locations indicated.

E. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate ea sily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

F. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extin guishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Li sted and labeled for t ype, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer 's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in material s or workm anship within spe cified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to com pliance with require ments, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not l imited to, the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictori al marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated as required nom inal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers in locations indi cated and in com pliance with r equirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 123530 - 1

SECTION 123530 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Kitchen cabinets.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For cabinets, and cabinet hardware.

B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler p anels, hardware, edge an d backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards:

1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1.

a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINET MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Certified Wood Materials: Fabricate cabinets with wood and wood-based products produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

2. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 3. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 4. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content.



5. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made without urea formaldehyde. 6. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made without urea formaldehyde. 7. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made without urea

formaldehyde. 8. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.

B. Exposed Materials:

1. Exposed Wood Species: Oak.

a. Do not use two adjacent exposed surfaces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings.

b. Staining and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects. 3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces

and Grade C backs of same species as faces.

C. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Solid Wood: Sound hard wood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects. Same species as exposed surfaces[ or stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces].

2. Plywood: H ardwood plywood with G rade C faces and not less than Grade 3 backs of same species as faces. Face veneers of same species as exposed surfaces[ or stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces].

D. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or pl ywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardboard.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE

A. General: Manufacturer' s standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Pulls: Back-mounted decorative pulls ADA Compliant.

C. Hinges: Concealed butt hinges.

D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy -coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and com plying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091.

2.3 CABINETS

A. Available Products: Subject to com pliance with requirements, cabinets that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. Merrilat or Approved equal.



C. Face Style: Reveal overlay.

D. Cabinet Style: Face Frame.

E. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails.

F. Face Frames: Solid wood stiles and rails.

G. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face.

B. Install cabinets without distortion so do ors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Com plete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.

C. Install casework level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m).

D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not les s than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws si zed for 1-inch (25-mm ) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not les s than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board.

E. Adjust cabinets and hard ware so doors and dr awers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended b y manufacturer.



HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 1

SECTION 142400 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators.

B. See Division 09 Section for finish flooring in elevator cars.

C. Unit Prices: Rock excavation for c ylinder well holes will be paid for under the unit price indicated in the Contract.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performan ces, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information.

B. Shop Drawings: Show pl ans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room lay out, coordination with building structure, re lationships with other construction, and lo cations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations fro m specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static load s imposed on b uilding structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.

C. Samples: For exposed finishes.

D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway , pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical s ervice, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.

E. Operation and maintenance data.

F. Inspection and Acceptan ce Certificates and Oper ating Permits: As re quired by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1. 1. Project's seismic design category is B.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Com ply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act ( ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."



1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agr ees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance S ervice: Beginning at Subs tantial Completion, provide one y ear's full maintenance service by skilled em ployees of elevat or Installer. Include m onthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective co mponents, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. KONE Inc. 2. Otis Elevator Co. 3. Schindler Elevator Corp. 4. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.

2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer' s standard elevator systems, including standa rd components published by manufacturer as included in standa rd preengineered elevator sy stems and as required for complete system.

B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide the following: 1. Submersible pump, suspended inside oil tank from vibration isolation mounts.

C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide h ydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit.

D. Hydraulic Fluid: Elevator manufacturer's standard fluid with additives as needed to prevent oxidation of fluid, corrosion of cylinder and other components, and other adverse effects.

E. Protective Cylinder Casing: PVC or HDPE pipe casing co mplying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size to provide not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance from cylinder and extending above pit floor. Provide means to monitor casing effectiveness to comply with ASME A17.1.

F. Guides: Provide either roller guid es or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, p rovide guide-rail lubricators or pol ymer-coated, nonlubricated guides.



2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system with provisions for connections to a single remote future elevator as required to provide type of operation system indicated.

B. Auxiliary Operations:

1. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is retu rned to a designated floor and parked with door s open. Car can be manually put in service on standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at fire command station or main lobby.

2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening de vices with unif orm array of 36 or m ore microprocessor-controlled, infrared light bea ms projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.

2.5 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

G. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS or HGL.

2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide wall panels as indicated on drawings, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.

1. Provide standard railings co mplying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required b y ASME A17.1.



2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. General: Provide m anufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections.

B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as s elected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 3. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated fro m cold-rolled

steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as sel ected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction. 5. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 6. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.

2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life incandescent lam ps and acrylic or other permanent, nonyellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.

B. Car Control Stations: Provide m anufacturer's standard car control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guide lines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and i dentifies elevator location to monitoring station. S ystem provides two-way voice communication without using a hand set and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. Sy stem is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.

D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car an d required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."

E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illum inated, digital-type car position ind icator, located above car door or above car control station. Also provi de audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served.

1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.



F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated.

G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows.

1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames. 2. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame.

H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lant ern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.

I. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.9 ELEVATORS

A. Elevator Description: 1. Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, telescoping, single cylinder. 2. Rated Load: 4500 lb (2043 kg). 3. Rated Speed: 100 fpm (0.51 m/s). 4. Operation System: Single automatic operation with toggle switch for future elevator. 5. Auxiliary Operations:

a. Standby power operation. b. Nuisance call cancel. c. Loaded-car bypass.

6. Car Enclosures:

a. Inside Width: 68 inches (1727 mm) from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 93-1/2 inc hes (2375 mm) fro m back wall to front wall (retu rn

panels). c. Inside Height: 76 inches to underside of suspended ceiling. d. Front Walls (Return Pane ls): Satin sta inless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car

door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. g. Door Faces (Interior): Baked Enamel with stainless steel kickplate. h. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at of car. i. Floor prepared to receive carpet (s pecified in Division 09 Section "Sheet

Carpeting"). j. Floor prepared to receive r esilient tile (specified in Division 09 Section "Resilient

Tile Flooring"). k. Floor prepared to receive sheet vinyl (specified in Division 09 Section "Resilient

Sheet Flooring").

7. Hoistway Entrances:

a. Width: 48 inches (1219 mm). b. Height: 84 inches (2134 mm). c. Type: Two-speed side sliding.



d. Fire-Protection Rating: 1 hour. e. Frames Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Doors Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

8. Hall Fixtures Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 9. Additional Requirements:

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

b. Provide blanket hooks and one complete set(s) of full-height protective blankets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm), up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.

B. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.


A. Acceptance Testing: On com pletion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and reco mmended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Com ply with the foll owing requirements for elevator used f or construction purposes:

1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage.

2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, de vices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment.

3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. 4. Engage elevator Installer t o restore da maged work, if any , so no evidence r emains of

correction. Return items that cannot be r efinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representa tive to train Owner' s maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and m aintain elevator(s). Refer to Division 01 Section "Dem onstration and Training."



COMMON WORKS RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 1

SECTION 210500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes General Provisions for Fire Protection Systems and the coordination and

administration of work.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. The work specified in this Section pertains to all Fire Suppression Work as indicated on Fire

Suppression Drawings and/or hereinafter specified in accordance with contract documents, including

all necessary incidentals, fittings, service, hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools, supervision, labor,

consumable items, fees, licenses, etc., necessary to provide complete systems and having compliance to

all applicable codes. Perform cleaning, testing and check out on each item of equipment and system to

provide fully operable systems.

B. Contractor shall visit the site before bidding the job to become familiar with conditions affecting his

work.

C. Fire Protection Contractor shall provide connection to capped fireline inside the building, post

indicator valve backflow preventer assembly with flow detection bypass meter, Fire Department

connection, alarm valves, flow pressure and tamper switches and other alarm initiating devices,

automatic wet and dry pipe sprinkler system and sprinkler heads in the building including test

connections, layout drawings, all design calculations and flow tests.

1.4 CODES, PERMITS, FEES AND TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. All work shall be installed in full accordance with latest codes, requirements of applicable laws,

ordinances, regulations, administrative orders or similar documents issued by public authorities, public

utility and all other authorities having jurisdiction over the premises. This shall include all

requirements of local City/County regulations, the State of Ohio, Safety Requirements of OSHA and

the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, all as interpreted by the local Inspection

Division.

B. All permits, services, Licenses and Certificates of Inspection incidental to this work shall be obtained

from authorities having jurisdiction and paid for by the respective Trade Contractor. All such

certificates shall be delivered to the Architect in duplicate, before final payment on Contract will be

allowed.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Product Data

1. Prepare shop drawings and product data for fire suppression equipment with adequate details

and scales as necessary to clearly show construction. Indicate for each item the operating

characteristics, the design conditions, features and optional items that are intended for

application on this project. Clearly identify each item on the Drawings as to mark, location and

use.

2. Contractor shall review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents.

Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to

Architect.

3. Shop Drawings and Product Data includes:

a. Valves

b. Fire suppression equipment and hydraulic calculations

c. Fire suppression system piping layout

d. Wiring diagrams, starters and controls for electrically-operated equipment furnished by

Fire Suppression Trades.

4. The submittals will be reviewed only for general compliance and not for dimension or quantities.

The submittals that are returned shall be used for procurement. The responsibility of correct

procurement remains solely with the Contractor. The submittals review shall not relieve the

Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions and deviations from the Contractor

requirements.

5. Shop drawings submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders. The purpose of

submittals is to demonstrate to the Engineer the understanding of the design by indicating which

equipment and material are intended to be furnished and installed and by detailing the

fabrication and installation methods intended for use.

6. Revise and resubmit as necessary to establish compliance with the specified requirements

7. Include with submittals manufacturer’s published descriptive literature, specifications, ratings,

installation data, maintenance data and parts lists. Upon ordering approved equipment, order

sufficient number of sets of the above literature for the operating and maintenance manuals.

8. All shop drawings must be reviewed and approved by Architect prior to submittal to the City of

Cleveland for review and permits.

B. Record Drawings

1. Contractor shall keep one (1) complete set of the reviewed shop drawing on the project site on

which shall be recorded any deviations or changes from such drawings made during

construction.



2. Record drawings shall indicate the location of all concealed fire service lines.

3. Record drawings shall be kept clean and undamaged and shall not be used for any purpose other

than recording deviations from working drawings.

4. After the project is completed, deliver these sets of drawings to the Architect in good condition,

as a permanent record of the installation as constructed. Drawings shall also be submitted

electronically to the Owner.

1.6 LOCAL CONDITIONS

A. Visit site, become familiar with conditions affecting this work. No additional payment will be made on

claims that arise from lack of knowledge of existing conditions

1.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. This Contractor shall be responsible for firestopping around all openings for pipes, conduits,

etc., installed by them at all fire walls and smoke walls. Firestopping shall be performed by an

installer who has been trained by manufacturer, or manufacturer's representative, in the

installation procedures based on published UL tested fire stop systems.

B. The Contractor shall provide firestopping details for all type of penetrations to be utilized on the

project and provide details to the Owner.

C. Quality assurance

1. Conform to applicable governing codes:

a. Ohio Building Code (OBC).

b. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

c. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

2. Meet requirements of ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 Fire Tests by recognized testing

agency.

3. Obtain firestop materials for each different system from a single manufacturer.

D. Sequencing

1. Coordinate work so firestopping materials are installed before the areas involved are

concealed by drywall and other finish work.

1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Provide to Owner after all equipment is in operation and at an agreeable time, instructions for the

purpose of training Owner’s personnel in all phase of operation and maintenance of equipment and

systems.



1.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall perform all cutting, fitting, and patching of surfaces required to install fire

suppression equipment, piping and materials.

1.10 GUARANTEES

A. Submit a single guarantee stating that all portions of the work are in accordance with Contract

requirements. Guarantee all work against faulty and improper material and workmanship for a period

of one (1) year from date of final acceptance by the Owner.

B. Responsible for all leaks due to workmanship/material failure in all pipes for a period of one (1) year

from date of acceptance of work under this Contract. Be responsible for any damage caused by such

leaks and repair thereof and reimburse Owner for all expenses incurred.

C. In the case of replacement or repair due to failure within the guarantee period, the period on that

portion of the work and material, shall be extended for a period of one year from the date of such

replacement or repair.

D. Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation,

without voiding Contractor’s warranty or relieving him of responsibility during warranty period.

E. Warranties on any equipment and installation included in this Division will commence upon the date

of acceptance or startup of the equipment/system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Bids shall be based upon the specified product or listed alternative. Drawings and Specifications are

based on the products specified by type, model and size and thus establish minimum qualities, which

substitutes must meet to qualify as acceptable.

B. Should the Contractor propose to furnish materials and equipment other than those specified, submit

a written request for substitutions to the Architect in Accordance with Division 1 requirements.

C. Acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitutions shall be subject to approval of the Architect,

Engineer or Owner. If requested submit inspection samples of both the specified and proposed items

for review.

D. In all cases where substitutions are permitted, bear all extra cost of evaluating the equality of the

material and equipment to be installed

E. Where only one make is named in the specifications or on the drawings, it shall be provided.



2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. All equipment and materials shall be new, full weight, of the best quality with the same brand or

manufacturer used for each class of material or equipment.

B. Provide material and labor which is neither drawn nor specified, but which is obviously a component

part of and necessary to complete work and which is customarily a part of work of similar character.

C. Provide incidental concrete, reinforcing steel, masonry, mortar, miscellaneous steel, paint and the like

required to complete installations; perform in manner specified in applicable Division of General

Trades Specification.

2.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Acceptable manufacturer’s products

1. Penetration sealants:

a. Dow Corning "Firestop Foam" and "Firestop Sealant".

b. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk.

c. 3M Brand Moldable Putty "Pads" and Moldable Putty "Stix".

d. Hilti FS One.

e. Metacaulk Series 835, 880, 910 and 950.

2. Intumescent sealants for use at openings and sleeves involving plastic pipe, insulated pipe or

flexible cable:

a. Dow Corning "Firestop Intumescent Wrap Strip".

b. Fox Coupling, Inc. "Cast-In-Place Firestop Coupling".

c. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk or Putty with FS-195 Wrap Strip and or CS-195

Composite Sheet.

d. Hilti FS One.

e. Hilti CP-642 and CP-643 Firestop Collar.

f. Metacaulk Series 880 and 950.

B. Submittals

1. Flame (F) rating minimum one hour but not less than fire resistance rating of assembly in which

installed, per ASTM E- 814.

2. Maintain effective barrier against flame, smoke, water and hot gases per ASTM E-814 and UL

1479.

C. Material Requirements






1479.

3. Suitable for firestopping of penetrations by steel, glass, plastic, and insulated pipe, flexible

cable, buss duct and cable tray.

4. Non-asbestos.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install all materials and equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner by competent specialist for

each subtrade. The installation of any material and equipment not meeting these standards may require removal and reinstallation at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Locate piping and other services in pipe spaces, to ensure maximum accessibility. Where necessary to cross pipe spaces, crossing must be made near the floor or six (6) feet or more above floor.

C. Install, connect equipment, services, materials according to best engineering practice and in

conformity with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Provide complete auxiliary piping, water seals, valves, electric connections, controls, etc., as recommended by manufacturer or required for proper operation.

3.2 PAINTING

A. Finish painting is included under Section 099100 – Painting, except where specifically called for

under this Section.

B. Materials and equipment installed under this Section shall be left free from dirt, grease and foreign

matter, ready for painting.

C. No equipment or piping shall be painted before being tested.

D. Damaged surfaces of prefinished materials and equipment shall be touch-up painted to match existing

finish.

E. All valves and similar devices shall be painted red.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Examination

1. Examine surfaces to receive penetration sealant or foam and report unacceptable conditions

before starting firestopping work.

2. Verify that penetration holes are approximately 1-1/2" larger diameter than the penetrating

element to allow space for wrap strip. Firestopping systems installed external to the opening

with a collar to hold in place are acceptable.



3. Start of work indicates acceptance of sizing of holes and application conditions.

B. Penetration

1. Clean penetration holes of dirt, loose materials, and foreign matter which may affect bond or

installation.

2. Remove coatings such as paint, curing compounds, water repellent, sealers, as required.

3. Install backing materials to prevent liquid material leakage.

C. Application

1. Prepare and apply penetration sealing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions.

2. Employ installation techniques which will ensure that firestopping is deposited to fill and seal

holes and openings.

a. Provide Flame (F) rating minimum one hour but not less than fire resistance rating of

assembly in which installed.

b. Ensure effective smoke seal and water seal.

3. Tool exposed surfaces of applied sealant to smooth finish.

4. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

D. Field quality control

1. Examine sealed penetrations to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing

areas.

2. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.

E. Clean-up

1. Clean surfaces adjacent to sealed joints free of excess sealant and soiling from this work as

work progresses, using solvent or cleaning agent recommended in writing by the sealant

manufacturer.

2. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition.

3.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify each new pipe as follows:



1. Color coded bands or marker backgrounds shall identify contents of pipe, in conformance with

Owner’s established color code schedule as follows:

COLOR CODE SCHEDULE

SERVICE BAND DESIGNATION

Fire Protection Fire Engine Red SPR

(all concealed sprinkler piping)

Fire Protection Fire Engine Red -

(all non-concealed sprinkler piping)

2. Background band: six (6) inch wide, stripes ¾ inch wide and as noted. Produce band and stripe

effect by use of plastic vinyl tape, similar to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company

Type 471 and/or 474, Thomas and Betts Type WCRT-075, Seton Bonding Tape, or approved

equal.

3. Apply tape so as to overlap on itself.

4. Provide identification marker near each valve and fitting on both side of pipes passing through

walls, on long runs at not over 20-foot intervals and at access door locations.

5. Indicate on pipe by stenciling with one (1) inch high letters, direction of flow and contents.

Place in location so as to be easily read from floor. Lacquer or vanish over stencils.

6. Color code schedule shown above is subject to approval by Owner, modify or revise color

coding as required to conform with system identification in existing hospital complex.

3.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify each piece of equipment as to nature of service and system number corresponding to

designation on design drawings, by stenciling with one (1) inch high letters or attached two (2) color

engraved plastic nameplates. Apply one (1) coat lacquer or varnish over the stencils.

B. Lettering shall include service designation.

C. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic with a black surface and white core. Use 1/16 inch thick

material for plates up to 2 inch by 4 inch. For larger sizes, use 1/8 inch thick material.

D. Lettering shall be condensed Gothic. The space between lines shall be equal to the width of the

letters. Use ¼ inch minimum height letter, which occupy four (4) to the inch.

E. Nameplates shall be attached to equipment with brass screws or rivets. No adhesive attachments will

be permitted.

3.6 OPERATING/MAINTENANCE MANUAL



A. Furnish complete bound sets of service manuals containing operating and maintenance instructions,

for all fire protection equipment, quantity as indicated in Division 1 Sections.

B. Bind the written operating instructions, shop drawings, equipment catalog cuts and manufacturer’s

instructions into a hard-backed binder where they can be accommodated into 8-1/2” x 11” size.

C. Submit one (1) copy to the Architect for approval. After approval, submit two (2) copies to the

Architect for delivery to the Owner. One (1) copy shall be retained by the Engineer or retuned to the

Owner.

D. Manuals shall include:

1. Title of project, Owner, address, date of submittal, name of Contractor and name of the

Engineer.

2. Index

3. Normal equipment operating characteristics.

4. Performance data, curves, ratings.

5. Wiring diagrams.

6. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature.

7. Manufacturer’s maintenance schedule and service manuals.

8. Spare parts and replacement parts list for each piece of equipment

9. Name of service agency and installer.

10. Final accepted shop drawings.

11. Maintenance and lubrication instructions.

12. Copy of all Guarantees and Warranties.

13. Copy of Equipment start-up Reports. 3.7 CLEANING

A. At all times keep premises and building in neat and orderly condition, follow explicitly any instructions of Architect, in regard to storing of materials, protective measures and disposing of debris.

B. Upon completion of work, remove all tools, equipment surplus materials, thoroughly clean all piping,

fixtures and equipment removing all dirt, grease and oil. Provide necessary isolation and drain valves to accomplish cleaning, without detriment to the existing system.



C. Provide chemical cleaning for piping systems with an approved detergent to remove pipe dope,

slushing compounds, oils, welding slag, loose mill scale and other extraneous materials. 3.8 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Obtain all inspections required by law, ordinances, rules, regulations of authorities have jurisdiction and furnish certificates of such inspections. Pay all fees and provide all equipment, power and labor necessary for inspections and test.

B. Perform all tests, including but not limited to those specified, make necessary adjustments to obtain

specified equipment and system characteristics.

C. Do not consider work under this Specification complete until required inspections have been obtained, tests performed, necessary adjustments made and satisfactory evidence of compliance has been submitted.

D. Pressure Tests:

1. Coordinate testing requirements with General Contractor.

2. All piping shall be given the following pressure test without appreciable pressure drop. Equipment which would be damaged by the required test pressure shall be isolated from the system during test:

SERVICE MEDIUM (PSI) HRS. Fire Protection Water 200 2

3. Correct minor leaks in welded joints by chipping out weld and rewelding. Correct leaks in screwed joints, by replacing thread or fitting or both. Caulking of threaded joints is not permitted. Repair leaks in copper tubing by sweating out joints, thoroughly cleaning both tube and fitting and resoldering.

4. Perform hydrostatic and air tests, before piping is concealed or covered.

5. Be responsible for completely draining the systems, after hydrostatic tests are performed. Any damage from freezing prior to acceptance of the completed installation, shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.



WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 – WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



and Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following for both the main building and detached townhouse building:

1. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.

2. Wet-pipe sprinkler system in entire building.

3. Dry-pipe sprinkler system the atticspace.

4. System design, installation, and certification

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration

seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.

Contractor shall submit complete Shop Drawings, supported by hydraulic calculations to the Architect

for review and approval prior to submission to City of Cleveland for review and permits. A Certified

Designer registered in the State of Ohio shall stamp the drawings.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to UL and/or FM, State Fire Marshal, Local Fire Department and insurance carrier.

B. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13, and Ohio Building Code.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.

D. Valves: Bear UL and/or FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating

marked on valve body.

E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified

and indicated.



211313 - 2

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The work specified in this section consists of furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment,

supplies, power, transportation, hoisting implements necessary for the completion of the fire protection

work in accordance with regulations of Ohio Building Code, the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ),

the Local Fire Chief, State Fire Marshal and NFPA-13.

B. The sprinkler system shall consist of wet and dry pipe sprinkler system and shall be designed by Fire

Protection Contractor under direct supervision of a State Certified Sprinkler Designer.

C. Sprinkler piping shall be sized using hydraulic calculations based on water available at site. Flow tests

shall be conducted by this Contractor. The fire protection work shall be subject to the approval of

Local Fire Department.

D. Design of the systems shall be such, as to keep all piping concealed in all areas of the buildings, except

areas with no ceiling.

E. Sprinkler heads shall be symmetrically located as required to provide proper coverage, approved by the

Architect, and to avoid interference with lights, diffusers, grilles or other ceiling mounted equipment.

Heads located in ceiling tile shall be installed in center of tiles or center of joists in exposed steel areas.

Architects shall approve locations of all heads. Furnish additional heads that may be required for

coordinated ceiling pattern without additional cost, even though number of heads may exceed

minimum code requirements.

F. Supervisory switches to be furnished and installed on all valves and wired by the Electrical Contractor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Manufacturer as noted below or approved equal.

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe, tube and fittings shall be welded or seamless steel as scheduled in NFPA-13.

B. Groove joining shall be done by an approved combination of couplings, pre-lubricated gaskets and

grooves. Grooves on pipe shall be dimensionally compatible with fittings. Acceptable suppliers are

Victaulic Company of American, Grinnell Mechanical Products, or Anvil International-Gruvlok.

C. Pipe and tube used in sprinkler system shall be designed to withstand a work pressure of not less than

175 PSI.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Conform to NFPA 13

B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½ to 1½ Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.



211313 - 3

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

H. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or

steel support.

2.3 VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Grinnell, Milwaukee, Nibco.

B. Valves shall conform to A.W.W.A. Specifications C500 for double disk, parallel seat valves. Valves

shall be rated at cold water non-shock working pressure as noted. Buried valves shall be mechanical

joint or push-on joint, complete with roadway boxes labeled “water”. Valves in pits shall be of the

flanged O.S.& Y. pattern. Non-rising stem valves will be accepted for limited head room.

C. Shut-off valves in the fire protection system shall be UL approved OS & Y gate valves or butterfly

valves, 175 psi, WWP.

D. Check valves in fire lines and sprinkler lines shall be UL ductile iron body aluminum bronze or

elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc or bronze mounted checks, flanged or grooved ends, 175 psi,

WWP.

E. All valves shall be suitable for tamper switches.

F. Milwaukee No. BB-SC-S02 Slow Close Valve may be used, in lieu of OS & Y Gate Valves 2-1/2” and

smaller. Bronze or ductile iron body, UL, FM approved, threaded or grooved ends, 175 psi butterfly

valve with manual operator, position indicator and built-in supervisory switch with two (2) sets of

contacts. Equivalent valve manufactured by Grinnell or Victaulic is acceptable.

G. Fire protection sprinkler inspector’s test valves shall be ball valve type. Gate or globe valves are not

acceptable.

2.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Valve 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be butterfly type, ductile iron disc and body, extended neck,

geometric drive, molded in seat liner stainless steel stem, EPDM rubber liner, 250 pound lug or wafer

style. Provide valve with external temper in switch rated 115V AC, Nibco LD 3010, Milwaukee or

Keystone.

2.5 SPRINKLER HEADS AND CABINET



211313 - 4

A. Sprinkler heads shall be UL or FM approved and as manufactured by Viking Corp. Victaulic or Tyco

fire Suppression.

B. Provide upright spray type pendent sidewall or concealed ceiling type heads as noted:

1. Upright Sprinkler - Viking Model VK-300 with ½” standard orifice, ½” NPT inlet connection,

spray type outlet/deflector and natural bronze finish – “K” factor of 5.6.

All exposed areas in basement with no ceiling shall be provided with upright heads.

2. Concealed Pendant Sprinkler – Model VK-456 with ½” standard orifice, ½” NPT inlet

connection, drop down deflector assembly, two-piece adjustable escutcheon and cover plate for

flush ceiling installation. “K” factor of 4.9. Provide cover plate with teflon coated white color

except in First Floor pressed tin area ceiling shall be provided with custom color to match the

ceiling. Concealed heads shall be used in all areas of the building, except the basement.

3. Side wall concealed sprinkler head shall be Viking Model VK-480 with “K” factor of 4.0, ½”

standard orifice, ½” NPT inlet, adjustable escutcheon and white cover plate.

C. Quick response heads shall be acceptable. The Contractor shall increase pipe sizes as required.

D. Sprinklers shall be of the automatic spray type with a nominal 1/2" discharge orifice, unless otherwise

noted.

E. Sprinkler temperature ratings of heads shall be selected to compensate for the maximum temperature

in the space protected, in accordance with NFPA No. 13, Section 2640, temperature ratings.

F. Furnish extra standard sprinkler heads as required by NFPA No. 13, with wrenches for each type.

G. Provide sprinkler head cabinet and install in location selected by the Architect.

2.6 INSPECTORS TEST CONNECTION

A. Provide at each zone sprinkler tester Elkhart No. 112-1 by 1 inch UL listed, with cap and chain.

2.7 TAMPER SWITCHES

A. Furnish and install Potter Electric Signal Company, Notifier, NN1-Fire Guardian 115V gate valve

switch, provide with two (2) sets of SPDT contacts. Switches shall be UL listed and FM Global

approved

B. Tamper switches shall be installed as per manufacturer's recommendations. For outside valves or in

pits, provide weatherproof tamper switches suitable for outdoor use.

C. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install wiring to Fire Alarm System, under Division 26.



211313 - 5

2.8 WATERFLOW SWITCHES

A. Provide system sensor WFD or Potter Electric Signal Co. VSR-F, Notifier, size as required for piping

served. Provide with two (2) sets of SPDT contacts and incorporate an adjustable retard. Switch shall

be UL listed and FM Global approved.

B. Electrical Contractor to provide and install wiring to the alarm system as specified in Division 26 of

this specification.

2.9 DETECTOR CHECK ASSEMBLY

A. Double detector check assembly to be Watts Series 757 DCDA, Ames, Febco, Wilkins, or as approved

with two (2) check valves, two (2) O.S.&Y. isolation gate valves, test cocks and bypass with meter and

backflow preventer. Bypass backflow preventer assembly to be listed to same standards as primary

backflow preventer. Detector check to be an approved assembly as listed by the Division of Water.

Bypass meter to be approved by and/or obtained from the Division of Water.

Assembly to be in compliance with ASSE Standard No. 1048, U.L. listed and FM approved. Size as

indicated on plans.

2.10 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Wet pipe alarm valve similar to Reliable Model “E”, Viking, Tyco, or Victaulic variable pressure with

retarding chamber (for water motor alarm and electrical alarms) pressure switch, angle and globe

valves, strainer, gauges, orifice restriction, pipe nipples, and fittings. Run approved corrosion resistant

material type sensing line to Reliable Model “C” water motor gong. Drip cup assembly and main drain

(run all drain piping to floor drain). Contractor to provide any additional alarms or accessories

required to meet all requirements of approving agencies.

B. Dry pipe alarm valve – Reliable Model A, differential type, bronze seat with “O-ring” seals, strainer,

air gauges, water gauges, ball drip valve, relief globe, angle, check and 3-way valves required, flow

indicating pressure switch, priming cup, drip cup assembly, drains, piping, fittings an automatic

supervisory air maintenance accessories. Include accelerator assembly if required by installation to

comply with NFPA conditions for minimum water delivery time period.

2.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A, Free standing straightway siamese Fire Department connections 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” x 4” siamese body

with double clapper checks and 2-1/2” inlet thread, conforming to Local Fire Department threads

complete with sleeve sidewalk plate labeled “Automatic/Sprinkler” approved by Hudson Fre

Department. Two (2) 2-1/2” plugs with chains, 4” pipe and fittings, all exposed surfaces to be

polished chrome plated (see drawings for location site) - Elkhart No. 156, Potter-Roemer or Crocker

Corp. Install per Hudson Fire Department standard detail.



211313 - 6

2.12 AIR COMPRESSORS

A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall provide individual automatic air compressor assemblies required

for each air supervised dry-pipe system. The compressor shall be sized for specific installation

requirements as determined by the Fire Protection Contractor. The compressor assembly shall be

complete as required for system operation, including, but not limited to the follow:

1. Receiver tank mounted compressor unit.

2. Integral pressure switch for compressor control

3. Pre-piped and wired package assembly for single point connection.

4. Adjustable pressure regulation

5. Mounti9ng hardware.

B. The Fire Protection Contractor shall locate and install the compressor assembly at or near the dry-pipe

riser. Coordinate with structure and work of other trades as required for clearance and access.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE SIZING

A. Contractor shall be responsible to size the sprinkler piping, using hydraulic calculations based on water

flow test done on the site by the Contractor and density criteria given on the drawings. Provide 10%

safety factor in calculations.

B. The Contractor shall submit plans and hydraulic calculations for review and approval.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.

B. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.

C. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of

pipe level.

D. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are

welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to

welding. Refer to Division 09.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for installation of sleeves. When penetrating floors and walls the

Contractor shall coordinate with the General Trades Contractor for all locations. The respective Trade

Contractor shall seal pipe an- sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation



211313 - 7

required. .

F. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and

joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Insulate connections between pipe fittings, hangers of

dissimilar metal against direct contact. Use di-electric insulating flanges.

G. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings after

installation.

H. Provide OS&Y, gate or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service. All shut-off valves shall be

supervised open, electrically or by pad locking as shown on plans.

I. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.

J. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler

escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers.

K. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.

L. Provide cabinet-mounted on wall near sprinkler valve or as directed in field, containing extra sprinkler

heads, each type and wrench suitable for each head type as required by NFPA.

M. Provide inspectors test connection on each zone and system. All zones shall be drained in mop sink to

nearest Janitor’s Closet or to outside, as approved by the Architect.

N. All hangers shall be UL approved, galvanized as required. The hangers, exposed to view, shall be

primed by Fire Protection Contractor and painted by General Trades Contractor. See Division 09 for

painting required by the hangers.

O. Sleeves and escutcheons will be provided at all points where walls or floors are pierced. The space

between pipe wall and sleeve will be packed with non-flammable material such as, mineral wool or

glass fiber. Grouts shall not be acceptable.

P. Drain valve, test connections, control valves, alarm valves shall be identified with approved enameled

tags indicating their use. Signs shall meet Factory Mutual standards.

Q. Provide sprinklers under all exposed ducts over 48” in width, install sprinklers per NFPA.

R. A riser plate shall be permanently affixed to each calculated system riser, providing hydraulic data in

accordance with N.F.P.A. requirements.

S. Provide escutcheon plates at all points where pipes enter room exposed to view, chrome plated cast

brass escutcheons shall be provided.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS



211313 - 8

A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.

3.5 SPRINKLER SYSTEM TEST

A. Hydrostatic test shall be made on the system at 200 pounds for two hours and conforming to governing

testing agency.

B. All defects made evident by tests shall be properly repaired. Leaks in overhead lines shall be repaired

only by means of tightening or replacing the fitting.

C. All pressure testing and flushing shall be witnessed by the authority having jurisdiction. Submit

complete test reports.

3.6 FLUSHING

A. Provide all necessary temporary connections, valves, oversized flushing connections, pumps, and water

as required to properly clean and test the new system.

B. Protect all equipment and materials at all times. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during

installation. Cover and protect equipment and materials from dirt, water, chemical or mechanical

damage.

C. Prior to testing, clean the piping system by flushing with clean water, until it is free of all scale, slag,

dirt, grease, or other foreign material in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 13. Clean exterior

of pipe prior to painting.

3.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide a warranty of entire system for one-year from date of acceptance.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1

SECTION 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes General Provisions for plumbing systems and coordination and administration of

work.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. The work specified in this Section pertains to all Plumbing Work as indicated on Plumbing Drawings

and/or hereinafter specified in accordance with contract documents, including all necessary incidentals,

fittings, trim, carriers, service, hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools, supervision, labor, consumable

items, fees, licenses, etc., necessary to provide complete systems and having compliance to all

applicable codes. Perform cleaning, testing, start-up and check out on each item of equipment or

appliance and system to provide fully operable systems.

B. Contractor is recommended to visit the site before bidding the job to become familiar with conditions

affecting his work.

1.4 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Dimensions given on the plans shall take precedence over scaled dimensions and all dimensions

whether in figures or scaled, shall be verified with other trades and also in the field, before

fabrication/installation.

B. The drawings show approximate locations. The exact locations and mounting heights of apparatus,

fixtures, equipment and piping shall be ascertained by the Contractor in the field, and the work shall be

laid out accordingly. Should the Contractor fail to ascertain such locations, the work shall be changed

at his own expense.

C. The drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show general arrangement of piping, valves and

associated appurtenances. The drawings and the specifications shall be supplementary to each other.

In case the requirements of equipment/systems described in the specifications differ from those shown

on the drawings, the more stringent requirement shall apply at no additional costs.

1.5 PLUMBING COORDINATION AND SUPERVISION

A. It is very important that the Contractor shall also familiarize himself with the work to be done under

other Divisions of specifications and their related drawings and shall so coordinate and schedule his

work as not to cause duplication, delays, conflicts or interference with the work of others.

B. Wherever the work interconnects with the work of other trades, coordinate with the other Trade

Contractors to insure that the necessary information has been given to properly install the material,



connections, appliances and/or equipment.

C. Provide adequate competent supervision at all times, when work is being performed. Cooperate with

all trades to avoid interferences and delays.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. See Division 1 for coordination drawing requirements.





requirements of local City/County regulations, the State of Ohio, Safety Requirements of OSHA and

the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, all as interpreted by the local Inspection

Division.




allowed.

C. Refer to General Conditions and Division-1 for Temporary Facilities and Utilities.

D. See site drawings for cold water, fire line, sanitary and storm piping. The Installing Trade Contractor

shall connect utilities to outside site utilities.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions. Shop Drawings shall

consist of technical literature and shall include but shall not, necessarily, be limited to descriptive

specifications, physical dimensions, electrical requirements, weights of all equipment, performance

charts and curves, operating instructions, maintenance instructions and maintenance schedules.

B. Shop Drawings are required for all basic materials, all equipment, valves, fixtures, specialties, piping,

materials, gauges, and schedules, insulation and other products specified under Division 22.

C. Make certain that the materials selected directly or selected by suppliers confirm to requirements of the

drawings and specifications.

1.9 REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES

A. The work described in any Shop Drawing submission shall be carefully checked for all clearances

(including those required for maintenance and servicing), field conditions, maintenance of architectural

conditions and proper coordination with all trades on the job.

Each submitted Shop Drawing shall include a certification that all related job conditions have been

checked and that no conflict exists.



B. If submittals differ from the Contract Document requirements, make specific mention of such

difference in letter of transmittal together with reasons for such variations.

C. Engineer's review of any submitted data or Shop Drawings for material, equipment apparatus, devices,

arrangement and layout shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing the

equipment/systems in compliance to the requirements and the intent of the Contract. Such approval

shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for errors, omissions or inadequacies of any sort

on submitted data or Shop Drawings.

D. Each Shop Drawing shall contain job title and reference to the applicable drawing and specification

section/ article.




1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Pay all costs for transportation of materials and equipment to jobsite.

B. Provide all scaffolding, tackle, hoists, rigging necessary for placing plumbing materials and

equipment in their proper place. Scaffolding, hoisting equipment: comply with applicable Federal,

State and Local regulations. Remove temporary work, when no longer required.

C. Arrange for packaging of equipment, which must be hoisted, so that there will be no damage or

distortion caused by hoisting operation. Protect all equipment from any damage during hoisting

operation.

D. Store controls, plumbing equipment, plumbing fixtures, etc., in dry location until building is ready to

receive them. Protect all openings, bearings, motor controls, etc., from dirt and moisture.




systems.

B. Training sessions when given to the Owner’s personnel shall be videotaped by the corresponding

contractor for future Owner reference. Turn one (1) copy over to the Owner upon completion.

C. Training of the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with

Owner’s Representative. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to

operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation and troubleshooting of the

installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Owner’s

Representative, after submission and approval of formal training plans.



1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall perform all cutting, fitting, and patching of surfaces required to install plumbing

equipment, piping and materials. 1.15 ROOF FLASHING A. Roof flashing of all pipes, drains, vents curbs and other equipment penetrating the roof, deck and

other waterproof surfaces shall be performed by the General Trades Contractor.

1.16 FOUNDATIONS, BASE, SUPPORTS AND PLATFORMS

A. The concrete pads for all floor-mounted plumbing equipment shown or not shown on the drawings

required for plumbing equipment, shall be furnished and installed by the respective Trade Contractor.

All housekeeping pads shall be concrete, mini mum six (6) inch high, unless shown otherwise on

drawings. All pads shall be at least 3” larger all around the equipment. The additional thickness of

concrete shall be provided, if so required, to support the weight of equipment and to prevent

transmission of vibrations to other areas from the equipment.

1.17 FIRESTOPPING

A. This Contractor shall be responsible for firestopping around all openings for pipes, conduits, etc.,

installed by them at all fire walls and smoke walls. Firestopping shall be performed by an installer

who has been trained by manufacturer, or manufacturer's representative, in the installation procedures

based on published UL tested fire stop systems.


project and provide details to the Owner.

C. Quality assurance


a. Ohio Building Code (OBC).

b. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

c. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

2. Meet requirements of ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 Fire Tests by recognized testing agency.

3. Obtain firestop materials for each different system from a single manufacturer.

D. Sequencing

1. Coordinate work so firestopping materials are installed before the areas involved are concealed

by drywall and other finish work.

1.18 GUARANTEES















of acceptance or startup of the equipment/system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS






a written request for substitutions to the Architect in Accordance with Division 1.

C. Where listed alternatives or substitutions alter the design or space requirements indicated on the

drawings, include all items of cost for the revised design and construction including cost of all allied

trades involved.

D. Acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitutions shall be subject to approval of the Architect or

Owner. If requested submit inspection samples of both the specified and proposed items for review.

E. In all cases where substitutions are permitted, bear all extra cost of evaluating the equality of the


F. Where only one make is named in the specifications or on the drawings, it shall be provided.








Trades Specification.



2.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Acceptable manufacturer’s products

1. Penetration sealants:

a. Dow Corning "Firestop Foam" and "Firestop Sealant".

b. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk.

c. 3M Brand Moldable Putty "Pads" and Moldable Putty "Stix".

d. Hilti FS One.

e. Metacaulk Series 835, 880, 910 and 950.

2. Intumescent sealants for use at openings and sleeves involving plastic pipe, insulated pipe or

flexible cable:

a. Dow Corning "Firestop Intumescent Wrap Strip".

b. Fox Coupling, Inc. "Cast-In-Place Firestop Coupling".

c. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" Caulk or Putty with FS-195 Wrap Strip and or CS-195

Composite Sheet.

d. Hilti FS One.

e. Hilti CP-642 and CP-643 Firestop Collar.

f. Metacaulk Series 880 and 950.

B. Submittals




1479.

C. Material Requirements




1479.

3. Suitable for firestopping of penetrations by steel, glass, plastic, and insulated pipe, flexible

cable, buss duct and cable tray.

4. Non-asbestos.


3.1 PAINTING


under this Section.







finish.

3.2 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify each new pipe as follows:

1. Color coded bands or marker backgrounds shall identify contents of pipe, in conformance with

Owner’s established color code schedule as follows:

COLOR CODE SCHEDULE

SERVICE BAND DESIGNATION

Cold Water Light Blue DCW

Domestic Hot Water Dark Blue DHW

Domestic Hot Water Recirculating Dark Blue DHWR

Natural Gas Green NG

2. Indicate on pipe by stenciling with one (1) inch high letters, direction of flow and contents.

Place in location so as to be easily read from floor. Lacquer or vanish over stencils.

3. Color code schedule shown above is subject to approval by Owner, modify or revise color

coding, as required to conform with system identification in existing hospital complex.

4. Provide identification marker near each valve and fitting on both side of pipes passing through

walls, on long runs at not over 20-foot intervals and at access door locations, all in conformance

with NFPA 99.


A. Identify each piece of equipment as to nature of service and system number

corresponding to designation on design drawings, by stenciling with one (1) inch high letters or

attached two (2) color engraved plastic nameplates. Apply one (1) coat lacquer or varnish over the

stencils.

B. Lettering shall include operational data pertinent to the equipment, such as but not limited to:

horsepower, voltage rating and service designation.







E. Nameplates shall be attached to equipment with brass screws or rivets. No adhesive attachments will

be permitted.

3.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Provide brass numbered tags approximately one (1) inch in diameter attached to hand wheel of each

valve with non-rusting ring or chain. Wiring on of tags is not acceptable. Local stop and shut-off

valve to an equipment item need not be tagged.

A. At completion of work, provide valve directory under glass in wood from giving number of valve,

service, building location by column coordinates, floor location, manufacturer’s figure number, size

and equipment controlled. For service, use designation shown in legend on drawings. Mount where

directed by Owner.

B. Accurately record numbers and locations on the “Record Drawings”.

C. Where valves occur above lay-in ceilings, fasten ¾” square plastic marker to panel below valve.

Marker shall have white background with black engraved letters and numbers identifying valve

concealed above.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Examination

1. Examine surfaces to receive penetration sealant or foam and report unacceptable conditions

before starting firestopping work.

2. Verify that penetration holes are approximately 1-1/2" larger diameter than the penetrating

element to allow space for wrap strip. Firestopping systems installed external to the opening

with a collar to hold in place are acceptable.

3. Start of work indicates acceptance of sizing of holes and application conditions.

B. Penetration

1. Clean penetration holes of dirt, loose materials, and foreign matter which may affect bond or

installation.

2. Remove coatings such as paint, curing compounds, water repellent, sealers, as required.

3. Install backing materials to prevent liquid material leakage.

C. Application

1. Prepare and apply penetration sealing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions.

2. Employ installation techniques which will ensure that firestopping is deposited to fill and seal

holes and openings.



a. Provide Flame (F) rating minimum one hour but not less than fire resistance rating of

assembly in which installed.

b. Ensure effective smoke seal and water seal.

3. Tool exposed surfaces of applied sealant to smooth finish.

4. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

D. Field quality control

1. Examine sealed penetrations to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing

areas.

2. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.

E. Clean-up

1. Clean surfaces adjacent to sealed joints free of excess sealant and soiling from this work as

work progresses, using solvent or cleaning agent recommended in writing by the sealant

manufacturer.

2. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition.

3.6 OPERATING/MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Furnish five (5) complete bound sets of service manuals containing operating and maintenance

instructions, for all plumbing equipment.

B. Assembly service manuals into one (1) book with written instructions, for each system listed in the

specifications.

C. Bind the written operating instructions, shop drawings, equipment catalog cuts and manufacturer’s

instructions into a hard-backed binder where they can be accommodated into 8-1/2” x 11” size.

D. Submit one (1) copy to the Architect for approval. After approval, submit four (4) copies to the

Associate Architect for delivery to the Owner. One (1) copy shall be retained by the Associate

Engineer.

E. Manuals shall include:

1. Title of project, Owner, address, date of submittal, name of Contractor and name of the

Architect.

2. Index

3. Identification, name, mark, number, as indicated on Drawings.

4. Step-by-step procedures for start-up and shut-down, on each system and piece of equipment



5. Normal equipment operating characteristics.

6. Performance data, curves, ratings.

7. Wiring diagrams.

8. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature.

9. Manufacturer’s maintenance schedule and service manuals.

10. Plumbing fixtures and equipment.

11. Spare parts and replacement parts list for each piece of equipment

12. Name of service agency and installer.

13. Final accepted shop drawings.

14. Maintenance and lubrication instructions.

15. Belt sizes, type and lengths, keyed to equipment.

16. Copy of all Guarantees and Warranties.

17. Copy of Equipment start-up Reports. 3.7 CLEANING




C. Provide chemical cleaning for piping systems with an approved detergent to remove pipe dope,

slushing compounds, oils, welding slag, loose mill scale and other extraneous materials.

1. Chlorinate all domestic water systems. Flush out system first, then hold a solution mixture of 500 ppm of chlorine in the water in system for a 24-hour period. Drain systems and flush. After flushing, chlorine residual shall not be in excess of 0.5 ppm at four (4) widely spaced check points. Chlorination procedures shall conform to AWWA Specification C651-86 and be accepted by Local Health Department. Repeat chlorination, if necessary, until accepted.

2. Provide test reports of certification to Owner prior to completion.

D. After initial period of operation, clean all strainers, traps and dirt legs.



3.8 LUBRICATION, PACKING AND SUPPLIES

A. Properly lubricate all rotating, reciprocating equipment, before it is started with correct grade, type and quantity of lubricant.

B. Check each shaft containing a packing gland for condition by backing parking gland off and examine

for proper grade, amount and type of packing, as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Maintain all lubrication, gaskets and packing during construction, assure that at the time of acceptance, all are in first class condition.

3.9 STARTING SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and system.

B. Notify Owner seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation,

belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions, which may cause damage.

D. Verify that tests, meter readings and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the Equipment or System Manufacturer.

E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractor’s personnel, according to

manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Refer to other specification Sections for requirements of the manufacturer to provide an authorized representative to be present at the site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation, prior to start-up and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning

correctly. Furnish report on manufacturer’s forms, intended for the purposed. 3.10 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Obtain all inspections required by law, ordinances, rules, regulations of authorities have jurisdiction and furnish certificates of such inspections. Pay all fees and provide all equipment, power and labor necessary for inspections and test.

B. During testing period, maintain on the project an Engineer thoroughly familiar with all phases for as

long a period as required to thoroughly adjust all systems and demonstrate that they are functioning properly.

C. Perform all tests, including but not limited to those specified, make necessary adjustments to obtain

specified equipment and system characteristics.

D. Do not consider work under this Specification complete until required inspections have been obtained, tests performed, necessary adjustments made and satisfactory evidence of compliance has been submitted. The Associate Architect reserves right to make spot checks to determine accuracy and completeness of final adjustments.



E. Pressure Tests:

1. Coordinate testing requirements with Construction Manager and Commissioning Agency. Testing shall follow the most stringent requirements between this specification and commissioning agent.

2. All piping shall be given the following pressure test without appreciable pressure drop.

Equipment which would be damaged by the required test pressure shall be isolated from the system during test:

TEST SERVICE MEDIUM (PSI) HRS. Domestic Water Water 125 6 Gas Lines Air 50 24 Sanitary and storm sewers, per State Plumbing Code or Local Authority.

3. Correct minor leaks in welded joints by chipping out weld and rewelding. Correct leaks in screwed joints, by replacing thread or fitting or both. Caulking of threaded joints is not permitted. Repair leaks in copper tubing by sweating out joints, thoroughly cleaning both tube and fitting and resoldering.

4. Perform hydrostatic and air tests, before piping is concealed or covered.

5. Be responsible for completely draining the systems, after hydrostatic tests are performed. Any

damage from freezing prior to acceptance of the completed installation, shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.11 FLUSHING AND STERILIZATION

A. With all outlets closed, fill system to working pressure and close valve at supply main.

B. A cleaning solution containing not less than 150 parts per million of chlorine shall be introduced into

the system.

C. Each outlet, hot and/or cold, shall be tested during fill to prove the presence of chlorine at that outlet

and valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times during the disinfecting time period.

D. Water piping systems shall remain filled for a period of 24 hours and each outlet shall be again tested

and shall produce not less than 100 parts per million of chlorine at the end of the retention period.

E. All outlets shall be opened wide and the main supply valves opened, flushing system with water until

chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million or until approved by the Health Department.

Flush drain valves.

F. After final flushing all aerators on plumbing brass shall be removed, cleaned and reinstalled.

G. Sterilization test may be performed at the same time the pressure test is placed on the system. END OF SECTION 220500


GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Valves.


A. The work specified in this section consists of furnishing, installing and testing of all materials and

equipment necessary to complete plumbing systems as indicated and shown on the drawing. Starting

from the existing system as shown and noted on the drawings but not limited to the following

interior systems:

B. All equipment and pipe branches shall have servicing shut-off valves with extended stems to keep

handles clear of the insulation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide

manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.


A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.

C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9.

D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES – Manufacturers as noted below or approved equal.

A. Provide all valves of the same manufacturer where possible. Manufacturers: Milwaukee, NIBCO,

Hammond, or Watts. All valves to be of domestic manufacture.



B. Valves in water piping two (2) inches and smaller: two-piece ball valves with cast bronze body.

Teflon seats, conventional port, blow-out proof stem, adjustable packing gland, chrome plated solid

bronze ball, soldered or threaded ends, minimum 150 WSP, 600 WOG. Milwaukee BA-150.

C. Valves in water piping 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be butterfly type, ductile iron disc and body,

extended neck, geometric drive, molded in seat liner, stainless steel stem, EPDM rubber liner, 250

pound lug or wafer style. NIBCO LD 3010, Milwaukee or Keystone.

D. Horizontal check valves two (2) inches and smaller, swing type design, Class 125, 200 WOG, with

bronze body and cap with threaded or soldered ends. Conform to ASTM B62. Milwaukee 509 or

1509.

E. Horizontal check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger: swing type design, Class 125, WOG, cat iron

body, flanged ends, bronze trim and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B. Milwaukee

F2974.es shall be Class 125#, Milwaukee Model BA-100/BA-150 or BA-475 or equal.

F. Vertical check valves two (2) inches and smaller: 250 WOG. Center guided, silent, non-slam type.

Bronze body, spring and disc holder, threaded ends. Metraflex 700.

G. Vertical check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger: 125 pound flanged ends, wafer style, silent type, cat

iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring. Metraflex 900.

H. Water Pressure Regulators

1. Two (2) inches and smaller: Bronze body construction, stainless steel integral strainer,

renewable stainless steel set, high temperature resistant diaphragm, threaded or soldered union

inlet, threaded outlet. Maximum inlet pressure: 300 psi, Maximum temperature: 160o F.,

Capacity: 65 GPM peak flow and 50 psi downstream pressure. Watts Series U5 o U5B or

equivalent by Fisher or Spence.

I. Gate valves 2-1/2” and smaller shall be all bronze, screwed, taper solid wedge disc, union

bonnet, rising stem, 200 psi non shock cold working pressure, industrial grade. Valves shall be

Milwaukee, Crane, Powell, or Hammond.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter and corrosion.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully “open” to full “closed”. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

C. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance and equipment removal without system shut down.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment:

1. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports.

2. Vertical piping clamps.

3. Building Attachments

4. Saddles & shields

5. Anchors

6. Miscellaneous materials

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

B. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.


A. Conform to applicable code for support of plumbing hydronic piping.

C. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: in conformance with NFPA 13.


A. Pipe attachment shall be copper plated for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct

contact with copper tubing.

B. Supports shall be suitably protected by recognized industry methods to prevent electrolytic action

between dissimilar metals.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Manufacturers as noted below or approved equal.


A. Manufacturers:

1. Amvil

2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. Globe Hanger.

b. Michigan Hanger

c. Modern Hanger

B. Pipe Hanger-Upper Attachments:

1. General: Except as otherwise noted install factory fabricated building attachments. Beam clamps,

anchor bolts or expansion shells shall be used by installer to suit building substrate condition in

accordance with manufacturers published data.

2. All beam clamps shall be installed with retaining strap to prevent possible movement of clamp due

to vibration.

3. Select size of attachment to suit hanger rod.

4. C-clamps shall not be permitted.

C. Pipe Hangers-Lower Attachments:

1. Perforated strap hangers shall not be used.

2. Unless, otherwise, noted individual hangers for pipe 3/4" to 1½" shall be carbon steel adjustable

swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for pipe sizes 2" to 4" shall be carbon steel adjustable clevis.

4. Hangers for pipes 6" and larger, not subject to thermal expansion shall be carbon steel adjustable

clevis.

5. Hangers for piping six inches and larger, subject to thermal expansion, shall have pipe roller

supports.

6. Piping over 2 inches, transporting steam and condensate (gravity or pumped) shall be supported

using adjustable roller type hangers.

7. For bare piping, size of hanger shall exactly fit pipe size.

8. For insulated piping, size of hanger shall fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield.

9. Cast iron pipe (all sizes) - use steel clevis.

10. Copper Tubing (all sizes): Copper plated steel clevis, except where hanger is installed around

outside of insulation, not in contact with pipe, steel clevis hanger may be used.

D. Vertical Piping Clamps:

1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory fabricated vertical piping clamps.

2. For bare piping use size to exactly fit bare pipe. For insulated piping use size of hanger to fit

around insulation.

3. At base of risers, use stiff leg pipe support immediately adjacent to elbow. For cast iron soil or

storm riser use solid concrete block.



E. Trapeze Hangers:

1. Where numerous pipes are run in parallel to one another, those may be supported from trapeze

type hanger arrangement. Roller supports shall be used to support each run of piping to permit

independent movement of individual pipes.

2. The piping supports shall consist of unistrut-P-300 (or equal), channels, fittings, pipe brackets,

pipe rollers, pipe clamps, post bases, stud nuts as required to properly support and hang piping.

3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Pipe Sizes to 4": Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger

rods.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6" and Over: Steel channels with welded spacers and

hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand.

F. Stiff Legs or Stanchions:

1. Stiff legs or two-leg stanchion supports shall be provided in case where support from overhead

structure is not possible. Pipe rollers shall be provided for pipe rigidly supported from floor.

2. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4": Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,

and concrete pier or steel support.

3. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6" and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and

concrete pier or steel support.

G. Field Fabricated Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes/Stanchions:

1. Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required. Weld steel in accordance with AWS D-

1.1.

H. Wall Supports:

1. Wall support for Pipe Sizes to 3": Cast iron hook.

2. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 to 5": Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 6" and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp;

adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.

2.2 ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. Guides to be constructed with steel base and T-bar with Teflon or graphite plates bonded to steel

components to allow minimum static friction and self-lubrication for unlimited movement. Units shall

be factory painted. Guide base shall be welded to pipe. Install as per recommendations of expansion

joint manufacturer's recommendations or as per guidelines of ASHRAE for expansion loops.

Manufacturers: F&S, Unislide, Elcen.

2.3 SADDLES AND SHIELDS

A. General: Provide saddles (MSS Type 39) or shields (Mss Type 40) under piping hangers and supports,

factory fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe

insulation.



B. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation.

C. Thermal Hanger Shields:

1. Construct of 360o insert of high density, 100 PSI, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased in 360

o

sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation with sufficient

width to prevent hanger bearing on insulation.

2. Hardwood insulated wood block saddle (minimum 6" long) with sufficient width to prevent hanger

bearing on insulation.

Manufacturers: ITT Grinnell Corp, Pipe Shields Inc., PHD Mfg. Inc.

D. Shield Span Schedule:

Pipe Size (NPS) Length (inch) Thickness (inch)

Up to 3 inches 12 0.048

4 inches 12 0.06

6 inches 18 0.06

8 thru 14 24 0.075

16 to 24 24 0.105

Pipes 8" and larger shall have wood inserts.

2.4 ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations in compliance to manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates & bars to piping and to structure.

Comply with ASME 31.9 and AWS D 1.1.

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated install anchors in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

D. Anchor spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at

intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of

anchors as required.

2.5 HANGER RODS

A. Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

2.6 INSERTS

A. Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral

adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded

hanger rods.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


3.2 INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete

beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4" (100 mm).

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with

recessed square steel plate and nut, flush with top of slab.


A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. Quantity and size shall be as required to carry the weight of

piping.

B. Install hangers to provide minimum ½” (13 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place hangers within 12" (300mm) of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1½” (38mm) minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet (1.5m) maximum spacing between

hangers.

F. Support fire protection piping independently of other piping/ductwork.

G. Do not support sprinkler piping from other piping/ ductwork.

H. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper piping by copper plating the hangers/supports.

I. Where aluminum ductwork is used, the hangers and supports shall be of aluminum construction and

shall be sized as per SMACNA Standards.

J. Install hangers to allow controlled movement of piping and to permit freedom of movement between

pipe anchors.

K. Install hangers and supports to allow indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe defections

allowed by ANSIB3-1 are not exceeded.



L. Insulated piping: Hangers shall be installed on outside of insulation with protection shields to protect

the insulation.

M. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

N. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze

hangers.

O. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

P. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

Q. Locations of hangers shall be coordinated with light fixtures. Provide all supplemental steel for

supports in shafts, ceilings, walls and between structural steel members. Install additional hangers as

required.

R. Hangers shall be supplied with lock nuts in sufficient number to lock all adjustments permanently at

the adjusted height. Two lock nuts shall be used unless nut tightens against a threaded socket.

S. Hanger rods shall not penetrate the ductwork.

T. Provide welded supports to piping and pump suction and discharge. Extend elbow support to

foundation or base.

U. Piping shall be supported so that no stress is imposed on the equipment.

V. Install anchors, guides, bracing to prevent lateral movement.

W. All hangers/steel shall be painted with one coat of rust inhibiting primer.

X. All copper piping shall have copper hangers.

Y. Pipe hangers and duct straps shall not be supported roof metal deck. Provide additional steel supports

for hangers.

3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Piping

Hanger Rod

1. Pipe Dia. Maximum Hanger Spacing (ft) Diameter

(Inches) Steel Copper Cast Iron (Inches)

½ to 1¼ 6.5 5 -- 3/8

1½ to 2 8 8 5 3/8

2½ to 3 8 9 5 ½

4 to 6 8 -- 5 5/8

8 to 12 10 -- 5 7/8



14 & over 16 -- 5 1

D. Spacing and Rod Size for CI Soil Pipe

PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING

3” ½” CI SOIL PIPE – 10’-0” maximum

4” to 5” 5/8” Provide a minimum of one (1) hanger per

6” ¾” pipe section at joints and also at change

8” to 12” 7/8” of direction and connection.


A. Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.

B. Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations.

C. Clean factory finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up

paint.

3.6 Pipes shall not be supported from existing metal deck.



PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1

SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Piping Insulation

2. Jacket and Accessories

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and

locations.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship

and installation standards will be achieved.


A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with tests by ASTM

E84.

B. Materials and installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 255 and UL723.


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of specifications.

B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification,

including product density and thickness.

C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Manufacturers as noted or approved equal

2.1 TYPE A - FIBERGLASS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Certainteed Corp.



2. Knauf Fiber Glass Corp.

3. Manville Products Corp.

4. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.

B. Insulation: ASTM C547; Class 1 (up to 450oF) rigid molded, noncombustible:

1. Maximum 'K' ('ksi') value: ASTM C335, 0.23 at 75o F.

2. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

3. Minimum service temperature = -20o F

4. Maximum service temperature = 300o F

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. ASTM C921, White Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.

2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches.

3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.

D. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

E. Tie Wire: 18 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12-inch (300 mm) centers.

F. Vapor barrier lap adhesive compatible with insulation.

G. Insulating Cement/Mastic:

1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool

H. Fibrous Glass Fabric: Cloth untreated 9 ounces/square yard and blanket 1.0 lb/ft³.

2.2 TYPE B - CELLULAR FOAM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Rubatex R-180-FS/R-1800-FS

2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:

a. Owens-Corning

b. Armstrong-Model Armaflex

c. Certainteed

d. Imcoa

B. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet.

1. Maximum "K" (ksi) Valve: ASTM C177 or C158; 0.28 at 75o F.

2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40o F.

3. Maximum Service Temperature: 220o F.

C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive

1. Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.



D. The insulation shall be fire rated and suitable for return air plenums.

2.3 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Thermal Corp., Bensenville, IL

b. Roc-co Company, Akron, OH

c. Flexpack

d. 3M Fire Barrier "Fire Master"

2. Jacket: ASTM C921, One-piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off white color.

a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40o F

b. Maximum Service Temperature: 300o F

c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inches.

d. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25.

e. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50.

B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209

1. Thickness: 0.025 inch sheet.

2. Finish: Smooth.

3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch (50 mm) laps.

4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; inch 0.38 thick aluminum.

2.4 THE FOLLOWING PIPING SYSTEMS SHALL BE INSULATED AS FOLLOWS:

A. Plumbing Piping

SERVICE PIPE

SIZE

(INCH)

INSULATION

THICKNESS

(INCHES)

TYPE

1.

Domestic cold water and domestic

hot water return.

Up to 1”

1-1/2” &

above

½”

1”

Type A or B

Type A or B

2. Domestic Hot Water Up to 2”

2-1/2” &

above

1”

1-1/2”

Type A or

B

Type A or

B

3. Roof drain bodies, overflow roof

drains, above ground horizontal

roof conductor from roof drain and

overflow drain to first vertical

All sizes 1” Type A or

B



offset.

B. Supplies, drain and trap on handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with fully molded, white, closed

cell vinyl insulation kit, Truebro, Model 120W-105


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been leak tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be done by Tradesman specializing in insulation work and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions and in conformance to Building Codes.

B. Examine area and conditions under which insulation is to be applied. Do not proceed until surfaces are

clean and dry.

C. No insulation shall be applied prior to pressure test completion, painting or heat tracing and acceptance

of respective piping.

D. All joints shall be butted firmly together. The surfaces shall be smooth and even. Insulate each

continuous run of piping with full length units of insulation with single cut piece to complete run. Do

not use cut pieces to complete run. Do not use scraps abutting each other. Butt pipe insulation against

pipe hanger insulation inserts. Longitudinal joints of the jacket shall be overlapping with factory

applied adhesive. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For

cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor

barrier tape or band.

E. All valves, fittings and flanges of the system shall be insulated using mitered sections of insulation

equal in density and thickness to adjoining insulation. The insulation applied to valves, joints, flanges

and fittings shall be covered with same type of covering as used on pipe insulation. Install factory

mounded, precut or job fabricated units except where specific form or type is included. Insulate

flanges, unions and strainers with oversized removable and replaceable covers. Provide end caps at

covers sealed to adjacent insulation with caulking.

Insulate valves with oversized valve or tee sections with top and end caps. Seal to adjacent piping. Do

not restrict valve operation in any way.

F. All insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed regardless of services.

G. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jackets and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. The

seams shall be on bottom side of horizontal piping. A continuous vapor barrier shall be required.

H. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, hangers/unistrut clamp supports

and similar piping support locations, except where otherwise indicated.



I. At all pipe hanger locations and unistrut supports, a hydrous calcium silicate load bearing 12.5 pounds

pcf insulation (kaylo) with shield shall be used on lower half, with vapor barrier and jacket placed

around full section. A steel shield 12" long shall be provided at these locations.

J. All hot water, cold water piping installed under counters and behind cabinets shall be insulated.

K. All insulation shall be applied so that there is no fiberglass exposed to the air stream. All fiberglass

insulation, including all exposed edges shall be coated or mylar or other suitable material shall be

provided between fiberglass and air stream.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

1. Domestic Water Piping System.



equipment necessary to complete domestic water piping systems as indicated and shown on the

drawing. Starting from the existing system as shown and noted on the drawings but not limited to the

following interior systems:

B. All hot, cold and recirculating water systems (interior), as shown and noted on drawings.

C. The rough-in and final connections to all equipment requiring the above services.

D. All equipment and pipe branches shall have servicing shut-off valves with extended stems to keep

handles clear of the insulation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS









A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable plumbing codes.

B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.

C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

installation of backflow prevention devices.



D. Secure and pay for all permits, services, licenses and certificates of inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn (inside building 4” and smaller)

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder (no lead allowed), Grade 95TA.

B. Pipes 4” and larger shall be galvanized steel, Schedule 40, ASTM-A53, Type E, Grade B. Fittings

shall be Class 150 LB malleable iron, galvanized, screwed. Fittings 6” and larger shall be cast iron

with Class 125 LB flanges.

2.2 SUPPORTING DEVICES: Refer to Section 220529.

2.3 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under:

1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions.

2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches:

1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene

gaskets.

2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene

gaskets.

C. Di-electric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,

water impervious isolation barrier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions, or grooved couplings to facilitate

removal.



3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.

D. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.

G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

H. Above Ground Installation:

1. Additional hangers shall be provided where movement of piping has been judged “undue” by

the Architect.

2. Vacuum breakers shall be installed on all faucets or valves with serrated or threaded spouts.

Unions shall be provided where necessary and as required to permit removal of equipment

readily.

3. All branch lines shall be provided with a ball valve whether or not shown on drawings, each

piece of equipment shall have a shut-off (ball valve) for isolation. Shut-off valves shall not be

used for balancing. Provide separate shut-off and balancing valves, in lieu of combination.

4 . All piping located in finished area with ceilings shall be concealed above ceiling and inside

wall construction.

5. Bending of pipe to accomplish alignment or other changes in direction of elevation shall not

be allowed. Pipe fittings shall be used to accomplish such changes.

6. No cold and hot water piping shall be installed in electrical rooms and above motors, panel,

starters and disconnect switches. Cold water piping shall not be installed in unheated places.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following water piping specialties:

Vacuum Breakers

Temperature – actuated water mixing valves

Water Hammer Arrestors

Trap Primers

Access Doors

Shock Absorber

Thermometers

Gauges

Balancing Valves

Strainers

Backflow Preventers

Wall Hydrant/Hose Bibbs

Unions

Dieletric Connections

Floor, Ceiling and Wall Plates

Sleeves

Equipment Pads

B. Related Sections, including the following:

1. Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.

B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Manufacturers as noted or approved equal.

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Vacuum Breakers: Conform to American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE) Standard 1011,

with finish to match hose connection. Device must be continuous pressure or non-continuous

pressure type, depending upon position in the system.

1. Non-continuous pressure (atmospheric) type:

a. Chicago No. 892G, bronze body, chrome finish

2.2 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES

A. Thermostatic mixing valves based on Lawler. Thermostatic mixing valves by the following

manufacturers of the same size, type, capacity and meeting other requirements may be furnished at

the contractor’s option:

1. Leonard

2. Powers

3. Symmons

4. Bradley

B. Master mixing valve for tempered water control at water heater shall be Lawler 801 thru 804 Valve

of the thermostatic type, capable of maintaining water temperature to setpoint within the parameters

set forth in ASSE 1017 from 70°F to 140°F. Valve must compensate for temperature fluctuations

due to inlet temperature, or pressure changes. It shall have bronze body construction with non-

corrosive parts.

C. Thermostatic mixing valves for point of use hand sink or lavatories in restrooms shall be as

manufactured by Lawler 516 with union connected inlet strainer check stops. Capacity of mixers as

scheduled on Drawings. Mixers must control down to 0.5 gpm, when tested in accordance to ASSE

1070. Control temperature must be adjustable between 85°F and 120°F and be locking type

adjustment. Adjustable high temperature limit shall be set for 110°F.

2.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. J. R. Smith


a. Precision Plumbing

b. Mifab

c. Wade

d. Watts Drainage

B. ANSI A112.26.1; sized, installed and certified in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable

for operation in temperature range -100 to 3000F and maximum 250 psig working pressure.



2.4 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Trap Primer (Type 1): Corrosion resistant brass fittings with clear plastic inspection cover on

reservoir. PVC diaphragm automatically adjusts to the line pressure of delivery amount. Precision

Plumbing Products, Inc. “Oregon” or as approved.

B. Trap Primer (Type 2): Electronically activated trap priming device requires 120 volt power source.

Provide with cold water connection, solenoid valve, air gap fitting, fused recycle times with manual

override and distribution unit. Precisian Plumbing Products, Inc. Mini-Prime Electric Trap Primer

MP-500, or as approved.

2.5 ACCESS DOOR PANELS

A. Access doors and panels – At all valves located above drywall or plaster ceiling and behind pipe

chases in plaster walls, a Mifab 24x24 CAD-FL-PL-C-AL, 24" square door (minimum), baked

enamel finish, cam lock shall be provided. In shower area, doors shall be aluminum construction.

For masonry construction, see Section 15010 for specification for access doors for shafts. The

General Trades Contractor shall install all access panels and doors shown, drawn, noted, indicated or

as required within the contract documents. The Installing Trade Contractor shall furnish access

doors and panels; the General Trades Contractor shall install access doors and panels. The access

doors manufactured by J.L. Industries, Jay R. Smith Co., shall be approved equal.

2.6 SHOCK ABSORBERS

A. J.R. Smith Series 5000 units shall be provided at all toilet room, science room locations on hot and

cold water lines. The shock absorbers shall be sized according to manufacturer’s fixture unit

method, located as recommended by manufacturer. A schedule shall be provided with Shop

Drawings giving room location, size and number of absorbers required. Units manufactured by

Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., and MIFB are acceptable.

276 THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometers shall be Ashcroft “Every-Angle” #9-200-36E with a nine-inch scale, 30 to 240º in 2

degrees Fahrenheit sub-divisions. These shall be located on inlet and outlet of each water heater.

The approved manufacturers shall be Terice, Weksler and Weiss. Thermometers containing mercury

are not allowed.

2.8 GAUGES

A. Pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft Series #A-1320 with 4½” dial, stainless steel case, range 0-160

psi. Provide gauge on main entrance to building with gauge cock and pulsation damper. The

approved manufacturers shall be Terice, Weksler and Weiss.

2.9 BALANCING VALVES

A. Balance valves shall be provided on hot water recirculating lines as shown on plans; DeZurik Series

#400 lever-operated valve, with bronze body and plug. Approved manufacturers shall be Nibco,

Armstrong International, ITT Industries and Watts Industries, Inc.



2.10 STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Mueller

2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:

a. Hoffman

b. Watts

c. A.W. Cash

d. Apollo

B. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with

1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch : Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64

inch stainless steel perforated screen.

2.11 WALL HYDRANTS/HOSE BIBBS

A. General

1. Provide all hydrants with an approved vacuum breaker.

2. Manufacturer: Hydrants indicated are Jay R. Smith. Other acceptable manufacturers are:

Jonespec, Josam, Wade and Zurn.

B. Hydrant Types

1. (NFWH) Wall Hydrant, non-freeze: Jay R. Smith’s Figure 5609QT, bronze nickel plated

quarter turn hydrant with ¾ inch hose connection and integral vacuum breaker with vandal

resistant cap. Valve length to suite wall thickness.

2. (HB-1) Single supply ¾ inch flanged female inlet, ¾ inch hose outlet, polished chrome finish,

vacuum breaker – Chicago Faucet No. 952.

2.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. BFP-1: 2 inches and smaller: Reduced pressure principle type. Differential relief valve located

between two (2) positive seating check valves and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard

1013. Bronze body construction with stainless steel internal parts. Maximum working pressure: 175

psi. Maximum water temperature: 140 degrees F. – Watts Regulator Co. Series 909 or equivalent

by Cla-Val, Wilkins, Febco or Hersey.

B. Reduced pressure principle type (2-1/2” and larger). Conform to American Society of Sanitary

Engineering (ASSE) Standard 1013. Reduced pressure zone assembly with two (2) independent

torsion spring check modules, a differential relief valve, two (2) shut-off valves and required torsion

spring check modules, complete with a single housing constructed from 304 (Schedule 40) stainless

steel pipe with groove and connections. Maximum working pressure: 175 psi, maximum water

temperature: 110o F. Provide indirect waste and pipe to drain. Watts Regulator Co. Series 957 or

equivalent by Wilkins, Febco or Hersey.

DSCA #10.133 Bath Creek Estates Skilled Nursing Facility 10.01.2011


C. BFP-2: Dual check valve type, bronze body, two (2) check modules, stainless steel springs, union

and “O” ring seals. Working pressure: 150 psi – Watts Regulator Co. No. 7 or equivalent by

Wilkins, Febco or Hersey.

2. 13 UNIONS

A. Unions in steel piping two (2) inches and smaller, malleable iron, ground joint brass to iron seat

suitable for 150 PSI working pressures.

B. Unions in copper piping two (2) inches and smaller, cast brass solder fittings with machined and

lapped seats suitable for 125 PSI working pressure.

C. Unions on all piping 2-1/2 inches and larger: use flanged connections. Gaskets used with flanged

fittings: 1/16 inch thick, ring type, compressed graphite sheet.

2.14 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS

A. Provide at connections between copper and ferrous metal piping materials in domestic cold water

system ASTM F441, Schedule 80, CPVC threaded pipe nipples, four (4) inches minimum length.

Provide for dielectric connections in pipe sizes two (2) inches and smaller.

B. Provide at connections between copper and ferrous piping in domestic hot water systems Victaulic

Clearflow dielectric waterway Style 47. Fitting consists of zinc plated casing with a chemically inert

NSF/FDA listed dielectric thermoplastic lining.

2.15 FLOOR, CEILING AND WALL PLATES

A. Fit all pipe passing exposed through walls, floors or ceilings in finished rooms with steel or brass

escutcheons. Where surface is to receive a paint finish, make escutcheons prime painted, otherwise

make escutcheons nickel or chrome plated. Where piping is insulated, fit escutcheons outside

insulation.

2.16 EQUIPMENT PADS

A. Except where otherwise noted, provide pads for all floor mounted equipment installed under this

Section.

B. Construct equipment pads of 3,000 –pound concrete complete with all necessary anchor bolts,

sleeves, anchor plates, washers and nuts. Smooth all exposed portions of pads and bevel corners.

C. Unless otherwise noted, make all equipment pads a minimum of four (4) inches. Thick.

2.17 SLEEVES

A. Where pipes pass through masonry or concrete walls, set machine cut steel pipe sleeves one (1) inch

larger than outside diameter of pipe, with ends of sleeves flush with wall faces. Sleeves in partitions

other than masonry or concrete where firestopping is required, 28 gauge galvanized steel sheet.

DSCA #10.133 Bath Creek Estates Skilled Nursing Facility 10.01.2011


B. Where pipes pass through floors, set Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves one (1) inch larger

than the outside diameter of the pipe. Top of sleeve to be four (4) inches above finished floor in

machine rooms and wet floor locations.

C. Where pipes are insulted, provide sleeves large enough to allow insulation to pass through sleeve.

Center pipes in sleeves.

D. Set sleeves true to line, grade, position and plumb or level and so maintain throughout construction

period.

E. Where concrete or masonry walls are core drilled for pipe passage steel sleeves are not required.

F. Provide fire stopping between pipe and sleeve or opening, as required to maintain the integrity of the

fire rating of all walls and floors.

G. Where pipes pass through exterior walls below grade, set Schedule 40 steel pipe or manufactured

castings or sleeves 1-1/2 inches larger than the outside diameter of the pipe. Make the pipe to wall

penetration closure with “Link-Seal” as manufactured by the Thunderline Corp. or Metraseal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply

piping to lavatories, sinks, and washing machine outlets.



DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 1

SECTION 221123 – DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following domestic pumps systems:

1. Recirculation Pumps

1.3 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install all domestic water pumps and equipment in the building included under

this Contract as follows:

1. Furnish and install hot water return pump as shown on the Drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide the following:

1. Recirculation Pumps

2. Operation and Maintenance Data for all above items.


A. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

B. Store pumps indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store pumps off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

D. Comply with pump manufacturer’s written rigging instructions for handling.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.


DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS – Manufacturers as noted or approved equal.

2.1 RECIRCULATION PUMPS

A. Recirculation pumps based on Taco. Recirculation pumps by the following manufacturers

of the same size, type, capacity and meeting other requirements may be furnished at the

contractor’s option:

1. Thrush

2. Bell & Gossett

3. Grundfos

B. Domestic hot water return and circulating pumps shall have model numbers, capacities, and

voltage as noted on the Drawings.

C. Pumps shall be all bronze construction with mechanical seals, oil lubricated bronze

bearings, and suitable for 125 psig working pressure. The motor furnished shall be non-

overloading at any point on the pump curve with built-in thermal overload protection, and

shall be open drip proof construction.

D. All pump motors shall be selected with sufficiently high horsepower, such as to be non-

overloading at all locations on the pump impellers operating curve.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Install pumps as indicated on Drawings to include gate valves on each side of pumps.

3.2 Hot water return pump to run through DDC control.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following soil, waste and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube and fittings



equipment necessary to complete sanitary systems as indicated and shown on the drawing.

B. Above and below grade sanitary sewer and vent system (interior) to connect to outside sanitary

system as shown and noted on the drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




A. Piping material shall bear label, stamp or other markings of specified testing agency.



B. Secure and pay for all permits, services, licenses and certificates of inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING AND BURIED

UNDER SLAB WITHIN THE BUILDING

A. Piping shall be PVC Schedule 40, with solvent joints per ASTM D2665, D2564 pipe, D1785 and

fittings ASTM 2466.

2.2 SANITARY AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Interior above ground soil, waste and vent piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent weld joints

ASTM D2665.


SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 2

B. Plastic piping is not allowed in the return air plenum. In return air plenum, provide “No-Hub” cast

iron standard weight with cast iron fittings or plenum rated plastic piping.

2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES: See Section 220529 - “Hangers and Supports”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 INSTALLATION


3.3 PIPING, GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Above Ground Installation:

1. For inside of the building, the cleanouts shall be installed at the base of each sanitary/soil

stack, at 100-foot interval on horizontal sanitary sewer at each change in direction and at other

points as shown or required by code.

2. Vent extension through roof and all roof drains shall be counter-flashed watertight.

3. PVC piping is not allowed in the return air ceiling plenum. Piping in the return air ceiling

plenum shall be “No-Hub” cast iron with cast iron fittings per Codes.



SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Floor Drains

2. Cleanouts

3. Floor Sinks

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and placement of openings and holes.




A. Drainage piping specialties bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.


2.1 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Zurn


a. Josam

b. Wade

c. Mifab

c. J.R. Smith

B. FD-1: (General Use) ANSI A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron body with membrane clamp and

adjustable nickel bronze strainer, round or square top to match the floor finishing, ½” trap primer

connection, vandal proof screws. Zurn Z-415.



C. FD-2: (Mechanical Rooms) Lacquered cast iron body with cast iron grate and sediment bucket; no

hub adaptor; ½” trap primer connection, vandal proof screws. Zurn Z-554.

2.2 FLOOR SINKS

A. FS-1: Cast iron body with inside caulk or no-hub bottom outlet, acid resisting enamel interior,

aluminum dome strainer, seepage flange, normal dimensions: 8-1/2” square, 6-inch depth, without

grate, vandal-proof, Jay R. Smith 3100, Josam or Zurn.

B. FS-2: Cast iron body with inside caulk or no-hub bottom outlet, acid resisting enamel interior

aluminum dome strainer, seepage flange, normal dimensions: 8-1/2 inch square, 6-inch depth, with

nickel bronze rim and nickel bronze half grate, vandal-proof, Jay R. Smith 3100-12, Josam or Zurn

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Zurn


a. Josam

b. Wade

c. Mifab

d. J.R. Smith

B. Straight Type shall be Series C1450 cast iron body and bronze plug.

C. Interior Finished Floor Areas (FCO): Cast iron, two piece body and round with adjustable scoriated

secured polished bronze scoriated cover in service areas Zurn Z-1400-16 and square with depressed

cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. (Zurn Z-1400).

D. Interior Finished Wall Areas WCO: Duco iron cleanout tee and counter sunk plug with stainless steel

round cover and vandal proof screws, Zurn Z-1446.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate cutting and forming of floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of

graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

C. All floor drains subject to evaporation shall be furnished with trap primers, per codes.



D. Where floor drains are specified without integral traps, provide deep seal pattern “P” trap primer

connection. Furnish traps three (3) inches in diameter or less above grade with cleanout plug.



BUILDING STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 1

SECTION 221413 – BUILDING STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building

1. Storm Water Piping System (Aboveground & Underground).



equipment necessary to complete plumbing systems as indicated and shown on the drawing. Starting

from the existing system as shown and noted on the drawings but not limited to the following

interior systems:

B. Above and below grade storm drainage systems. To connect to outside storm system as shown and

noted on the drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




A. Piping material shall bear label, stamp or other markings of specified testing agency.



B. Secure and pay for all permits, services, licenses and certificates of inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM PIPING, BURIED WITHIN FIVE (5) FEET OF BUILDING AND BURIED UNDER

SLAB WITHIN THE BUILDING

A. Underground soil, waste and vent piping and fittings shall be PVC Schedule 40 with solvent weld

joints, ASTM D2665.


BUILDING STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 2

2.2 STORM AND OVERFLOW DRAIN PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Interior above ground soil, waste and vent piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent joints

ASTM D2665.

B. Plastic piping is not allowed in the return air plenum. In return air plenum, provide “No-Hub” cast

iron standard weight with cast iron fittings or plenum rated plastic piping.

2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES: Refer to Section 220529 - “Hangers and Supports”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 INSTALLATION


3.3 PIPING, GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Above Ground Installation:

1. For inside of the building, the cleanouts shall be installed at the base of each storm conductor, at

100-foot interval on horizontal storm sewer at each change in direction and at other points as

shown or required by code.

B. PVC piping is not allowed in the return air ceiling plenum. Piping in the return air ceiling plenum

shall be “No-Hub” cast iron with cast iron fittings per Codes.

3.4 TEST, ADJUST, START UP AND FINISH

A. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Architect, Utility Representative and other

representatives of governing bodies having jurisdiction. Testing shall not be done without

representative of Architect. These people shall be notified in writing, at least one week in advance of

any scheduled test.



STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 1

SECTION 221423 – STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and placement of openings and holes.




A. Drainage piping specialties bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.


2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Zurn


a. Josam

b. Wade

c. Mifab

d. J.R. Smith

B. Straight Type shall be Series C1450 cast iron body and bronze plug.

C. Interior Finished Floor Areas (FCO): Cast iron, two piece body and round with adjustable scoriated

secured polished bronze scoriated cover in service areas Zurn Z-1400-16 and square with depressed

cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. (Zurn Z-1400).

D. Interior Finished Wall Areas WCO: Duco iron cleanout tee and counter sunk plug with stainless steel

round cover and vandal proof screws, Zurn Z-1446.


STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate cutting and forming of floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of

graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.



BUILDING NATURAL GAS PIPING 221616 - 1

SECTION 221616 – BUILDING NATURAL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following gas piping and specialties:

1. Gas Piping

2. Pipe and Pipe Fittings.

3. Valves.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Related Sections including the following:

1. Section 220500 – Common Work Results for Plumbing.

2. Section 220529 – Hangers and Supports.



specialties necessary to complete building natural gas piping system as indicated and shown on the

drawing.

B. Extend gas line from meter to H.V.A.C equipment, appliances and elsewhere as indicated on

Drawings.

C. Provide gas cock, union and dirt leg in convenient location, close to connection to each item of

equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS - Not Required.







A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable plumbing codes and local Gas Company requirements.




2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Gas Pipe in Exposed Locations - Standard weight black steel. Fittings and joints shall be standard

weight black malleable iron, screwed, except pipe 1-1/2" and larger shall be welded. Standard

weight welded fittings shall be used. Piping within last ten (10) feet of appliance may be screwed if

approved by Code authorities.

Exposed gas piping above roof and along exterior wall shall be of the same material as above and

shall be provided with X-Tru or Code approved corrosion resistance coating. Installation shall be

per International Gas Codes.

B. Gas Piping in Concealed Locations - Standard weight black steel. Standard weight welded fittings

shall be used except 1/2" pipe may be standard weight black malleable iron screwed fitting if

approved by Code authorities. Piping in concealed locations shall not have unions, tubing fittings or

running threads.

C. Gas Piping in Air Plenums - Shall be standard weight black steel with standard weight welded type

fittings. No valves are to be located in air plenums, all in conformance with International Fuel Gas

Code.

D. Gas Piping – Underground - ASTM 53 Type “E” electric resistance welded or Type “S” seamless

Grade B, Schedule 40 black steel. The piping shall have PVC coating per ANSI B3610. Joints shall

be welded and piping shall be protected with cathodic protection and anodes, as required by local gas

company. Contractor has the option to install PVC underground gas piping, in compliance to

requirements of local Gas Company.

E. All gas piping under the slab to be installed in a protective sleeve with welded joints and vented

outside of building through roof.

2.2 GAS SHUT-OFF VALVES

A. Valves ½” up to 4” shall be DeZurik Figure 425 with level operator gas shut-off valves 6” and large

cast iron flanged 175 psi. DeZurik Figure 118 with resilient plug RS24 and handwheel A996H6

operator, Hammond Corp., Milwaukee Valve Co.

2.3 GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Furnish and install gas pressure regulators when not furnished with equipment on appliance, to

reduce gas pressure as required for gas equipment. Gas pressure regulators shall have pressure taps

for measuring pressures. All gas pressure regulators sizes shall be as per Manufacturer’s

recommendations. All gas pressure regulators shall be vented to outside through roof, as required in

field. All gas pressure regulators shall have gas cocks on inlet and outlet of gas regulators. See

Plumbing Specifications for gas cock specifications. The gas pressure regulators shall be

manufactured by Maxitrol, Fishers or American Meter.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Use dielectric fitting for connection of copper pipe and black steel pipe.

3.2 All gas piping shall be installed level. Purge and vent all gas lines to outside as required by the Gas

Co., local codes, and NFPA 54.4.3.

3.3 Install pipe sleeves on gas piping through walls, and duct shaft. Where main enters building,

provide sleeve and vent to outside per Gas Company requirements.

3.4 Pipes that drop in block walls are to be welded steel pipe in a welded steel sleeve.

3.5 Pipes that drop in block walls over 5 psi are to be welded steel pipe in a welded steel sleeve vented to

the outside. If the pipes drop in a chase, then the chase must be vented to the outside. If the pipes

do not drop in a chase or wall, then neither the sleeve or vent is required.

3.6 All branch connections shall be made on the top or side of horizontal lines.

3.7 Install 6” dirt leg at all connections to equipment.

3.8 Valves shall not be located in any air plenum.

3.9 Before the gas service is turned on, the house lines shall be subjected to a 24-hour charted pressure

test, unless another test is requested by the Gas Company. Pressures as indicated below. The test

shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Gas Company. This Contractor to

initially pressurize system. Chart recorders provided by Gas Company, as applicable. Gas

Company to rule on acceptability of the piping system after the test.

A. Systems over 2 psig shall be tested with 50 psig air.

B. Systems 2 psig or less shall be tested with 5 psi air.



PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1

SECTION 224000 – PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Water Closets

2. Lavatories

3. Sinks

4. Electric Water Coolers

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide catalogue illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions,

utility sizes, trim, accessories, appliances, oppurtenances, equipment and supports.

Indicate materials and finishes, construction details and flow control rates.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.


2.1 WATER CLOSETS, URINALS AND LAVATORIES

A. Fixtures based on American Standard. Fixtures by the following manufacturers of the

same size, type, and meeting other requirements may be furnished at the contractor’s

option:

1. Kohler

2. Crane

3. Zurn

B. Flush valves and accessories based on “Royal” series as manufactured by Sloan. Flush

valves by the following manufacturers of the same size, type, capacity and meeting

other requirements may be furnished at the contractor’s option:

1. Zurn

2. Delany



C. Seats for Water Closets based on Bemis. All seats are to be furnished with self-

sustaining check hinges. Seats by the following manufacturers of the same size, type,

and meeting other requirements may be furnished at the contractor’s option:

1. Church

2. Olsonite

3. Beneke

D. Fixture carriers based on Zurn. Fixture carriers by the following manufacturers of the

same size, type, capacity and meeting other requirements may be furnished at the


1. Jay R. Smith

2. Josam

3. Wade

4. Watts Drainage

E. Faucets and accessories based on American Standard faucets. All faucets provided to

be furnished with ceramic disk cartridges. Faucets by the following manufacturers of

the same size, type, capacity and meeting other requirements may be furnished at the


1. Kohler

2. Sloan

3. Zurn

4. T & S Brass

F. Mop Basins: Fiat, Mustee, Stern-Williams, Zurn

G. Laundry Tub: Fiat, Mustee, Zurn

H. Electric Water Cooler: Halsey Taylor, Elkay, Haws

I. PLUMBING FIXTURES – (See SCHEDULE on Drawings)

1. Refer to the Plumbing fixture Schedules on the drawings for the model number and

manufacturer’s names given for each plumbing fixture, fitting and accessories. the

scheduled fixtures indicate the basis of design and configuration.

2. All plumbing fixtures and accessories shall include supply stop valves, check stops,

fixture supplies, traps, escutcheons, vacuum breakers, miscellaneous supports and

accessories, as required for complete installation.



2.2 WATER CLOSETS

A. Floor mounted close coupled tank type, vitreous china. Pressure assisted siphon jet

action with wall supply, ½” screwdriver angle stop with flexible tube riser, wall

escutcheon, tank liner and locking cover, chrome plated center/top pushbutton

actuator, white seat with extended back and open front, no cover, stainless steel hinge

post with self-sustaining check operation, 4” closet end, floor mounting plant with

hold down bolts and neoprene gasket fixture connector.

B. ADA compliant fixture shall have a seat height of 17”: to 19” above finished floor.

2.3 LAVATORIES

A. Public access wall hung, vitreous china fixture. Provide with splash back, front-overflow,

4” center set faucet deck, single level operated faucet, aerator (maximum .5 gpm) and

grid drain. Wall supplies for tempered water with loose key angle stops, flexible tube

risers, wall escutcheons and connecting hardware. 1-1/4” cast brass P-trap with integral

cleanout, 17 gauge 1-1/2” tailpiece, wall escutcheon and connecting hardware.

Concealed arm carrier with rectangular uprights and bases suitable for installation in 3-

5/8” stud wall.

B. Same as above except mounted at handicap access height.

C. Public access countertop mounted vitreous china fixture, provide with self rimming or

undermount installation, 4” center set deck faucet, front-overflow, single lever

operated faucet, aerator (maximum .5 gpm) and grid drain. Wall supplies for

tempered water with loose key angle stops, flexible tube risers, wall escutcheons and

connecting hardware. 1-1/4” cast brass P-trap with integral cleanout, 17 gauge 1-1/2”

tailpiece, wall escutcheon and connecting hardware. Provide under-counter mounting

hardware for installation in casework. Provide vandal-proof installation for all faucet

components.

D. Same as above except mount at handicap access height.

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL SINKS

A. Single or double compartment countertop-drop-in sink. Sink with 18 gauge type 302

(188) stainless steel construction, self-rimming installation, faucet deck, basket

strainers with 1-1/2” tailpiece and mounting hardware. Faucet with high arc swing

spout, aerator, concealed mixing assembly, single handle lever operation or gooseneck

spout and wrist blade handles. Provide 1-1/2” cast brass P-trap with cleanout, hot and

cold water wall supplies with angle stops and flexible tube risers.



2.5 MOP SINKS

A. Floor mounted terrazzo or molded stone one piece mop basin. Basin with stainless steel

drain body and strainer, neoprene gasket connector, stainless steel wall guards. Faucet

with hot and cold water inlet stops, wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end connection,

bucket hook, exposed mixing assembly and four-arm indexed handle operators. Provide

3” cast iron P-trap for underfloor installation.

2.6 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

A. Single or dual user with either manual or auto-sensing activation. Construction shall be

lead free ASME, NSF and UL compliant and utilizing 134a refrigerant. Configuration

shall be recessed, surface mounted or free standing. Fixture shall have stainless steel

top(s) and edge surfaces with shielded one-piece chrome plated bubbler(s). Inner framing

shall be heavy gauge galvanized steel with required installation brackets or tabs for frames

or masonry walls.

Wall hung fixtures shall be supported ASME A112.6.1M compliant concealed adjustable

carrier with steel uprights and block feet for securing to the floor. Masonry wall supports

to be similar less steel uprights.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Provide individual accessible stop valves on all fixture and equipment supply piping.

3.2 All exposed metal parts, accessories and fittings associated with plumbing fixtures (including

piping) shall be chrome finished unless another finish is specifically indicated otherwise.

Provide polished chrome plated brass escutcheons at all exposed piping structure penetrations

(wall, floor, ceiling, etc.) and fixture connections.

3.3 Furnish fixture carriers where specified to suit wall construction as indicated on Architectural

Drawings. Carriers to be anchored securely to floor.

3.4 Install all fixtures according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5 Mounting heights of fixtures and associated equipment as indicated on drawings.

3.6 Install vandal resistant .5 gpm flow restrictors on all lavatory faucets in public access areas,

similar to Chicago Faucet Model Number E-2805.

3.7 Provide insulation on supply (full range of hot and cold water) and drain piping exposed

below handicap access lavatories. See Section 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION for

requirements.



3.8 At all countertop or other casework conditions, verify exact location and installation of all

items with Architectural documentation before any work is performed. Coordinate

installation with the General Contractor. Where plumbing fixtures are installed in casework

and indicated to be “Handicap Accessible”, coordinate installation with General Contractor to

provide clearances and mounting heights as required.

3.9 All handicap access fixture controls, including faucets and flush valves, to be provided with

operators requiring 5 lb. pressure or less for operation.

3.10 When floor drains DIRECTLY connected to the Sanitary Waste system are provided in toilet

rooms, provide an individual trap primer accessory as specified herein for the flush valve

assembly on an adjacent water closet fixture. Extend a 3/8” trap primer supply line below

floor to the floor drain, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and the

requirements of the inspection/approval authorities. Floor drains INDIRECTLY connected to

the Sanitary Waste system do not require individual trap primers.

3.11 Sensor flush valve/faucet transformers and interconnecting fixture wiring and accessories to

be located in secure, restricted access areas (i.e.; an accessible chase, or casework super-

structure). Coordinate installation with General Contractor.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR H.V.A.C. 230500 - 1

SECTION 230500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR H.V.A.C.

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The work specified in this Section pertains to all H.V.A.C. Work as indicated on Mechanical Drawings

and/or hereinafter specified in accordance with contract documents, including all necessary incidentals,

service, hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools, supervision, labor, consumable items, fees, licenses, etc.,

necessary to provide complete systems and having compliance to all applicable codes. Perform

cleaning, testing, balancing, start-up and check out on each item of equipment or appliance and system

to provide fully operable systems.

B. Contractor is recommended to visit the site before bidding the job to become familiar with conditions

affecting his work.

1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Dimensions given on the plans shall take precedence over scaled dimensions and all dimensions

whether in figures or scaled, shall be verified with other trades and also in the field, before

fabrication/installation.

B. The drawings show approximate locations. The exact locations and mounting heights of apparatus,

fixtures, equipment, ductwork and piping shall be ascertained by the Contractor in the field, and the

work shall be laid out accordingly. Should the Contractor fail to ascertain such locations, the work

shall be changed at his own expense.

C. The drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show general arrangement of piping, ductwork,

valves and associated appurtenances. The drawings and the specifications shall be supplementary to

each other. In case the requirements of equipment/systems described in the specifications differ from

those shown on the drawings, the more stringent requirement shall apply at no additional costs.

1.4 H.V.A.C. COORDINATION AND SUPERVISION

A. It is very important that the Contractor shall also familiarize himself with the work to be done under

other Divisions of specifications and their related drawings and shall so coordinate and schedule his

work as not to cause duplication, delays, conflicts or interference with the work of others.

B. Wherever the work interconnects with the work of other trades, coordinate with the other Trade

Contractors to insure that the necessary information has been given to properly install the material,

connections, appliances and/or equipment.

C. Provide adequate competent supervision at all times, when work is being performed.

Cooperate with all other trades to avoid interferences and delays.







requirements of local City/County regulations, the State of Ohio and the requirements of the National

Fire Protection Association, all as interpreted by the local Inspection Division.




allowed.

C. Refer to General Conditions and Division-1 for Temporary Facilities and Utilities.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions. Shop Drawings shall

consist of technical literature and shall include but shall not, necessarily, be limited to descriptive

specifications, physical dimensions, electrical requirements, weights of all equipment, performance

charts and curves, operating instructions, maintenance instructions and maintenance schedules.

B. Shop Drawings are required for all basic materials, all equipment, valves, dampers, specialties,

ductwork, piping, materials, gauges, and schedules, insulation, temperature controls, sequence of

operation and other products specified under Division 23. All ductwork layouts (Shop Drawings) shall

be at scale of 1/4" = 1'-0".

C. Make certain that the materials selected directly or selected by suppliers confirm to requirements of the

drawings and specifications.

1.7 REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES

A. The work described in any Shop Drawing submission shall be carefully checked for all clearances

(including those required for maintenance and servicing), field conditions, maintenance of architectural

conditions and proper coordination with all trades on the job.

Each submitted Shop Drawing shall include a certification that all related job conditions have been

checked and that no conflict exists.

B. If submittals differ from the Contract Document requirements, make specific mention of such

difference in letter of transmittal together with reasons for such variations.

C. Engineer's review of any submitted data or Shop Drawings for material, equipment apparatus, devices,

arrangement and layout shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing the

equipment/systems in compliance to the requirements and the intent of the Contract. Such approval

shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for errors, omissions or inadequacies of any sort

on submitted data or Shop Drawings.



D. Each Shop Drawing shall contain job title and reference to the applicable drawing and specification

section/article.




1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Pay all costs for transportation of materials and equipment to jobsite.

B. Provide all scaffolding, tackle, hoists, rigging necessary for placing plumbing materials and

equipment in their proper place. Scaffolding, hoisting equipment: comply with applicable Federal,

State and Local regulations. Remove temporary work, when no longer required.

C. Arrange for packaging of equipment, which must be hoisted, so that there will be no damage or

distortion caused by hoisting operation. Protect all equipment from any damage during hoisting

operation.

D. Store controls, H.V.A.C. equipment, air outlets, etc., in dry location until building is ready to receive

them. Protect all openings, bearings, motor controls, etc., from dirt and moisture.




systems.

B. Training sessions when given to the Owner’s personnel shall be videotaped by the corresponding

contractor for future Owner reference. Turn one (1) copy over to the Owner upon completion.

C. Training of the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with

Owner’s Representative. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to

operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation and troubleshooting of the

installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Owner’s

Representative, after submission and approval of formal training plans.

1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall perform all cutting, fitting, and patching of surfaces required to install H.V.A.C.

equipment, piping and materials.

1.12 FIRESTOPPING

A. Each contractor shall be responsible for firestopping around all openings for pipes, conduits, etc.,

installed by them at all fire walls and smoke walls. Firestopping shall be performed by an installer

who has been rained by manufacturer, or manufacturer’s representative, in the installation procedures

based on published UL tested fire stop systems.




project and provide details to the Owner’s Representative.

C. Quality Assurance


a. Ohio building Code (OBC)

b. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

c. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code 2. Meet requirements of ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 Fire Tests by recognized testing agency.

3. Obtain firestop materials for each different system from a single manufacturer. D. Sequencing

1. Coordinate work so firestopping materials are installed before the areas involved are concealed by drywall and other finish work.

1.13 ROOF FLASHING A. Roof flashing of all pipes, curbs and other equipment penetrating the roof, deck and other waterproof

surfaces shall be performed by the General Trades Contractor.

1.14 FOUNDATIONS, BASE, SUPPORTS AND PLATFORMS

A. The concrete pads for all floor-mounted plumbing equipment shown or not shown on the drawings

required for plumbing equipment, shall be furnished and installed b the respective Trade Contractor.

All housekeeping pads shall be concrete, mini mum six (6) inch high, unless shown otherwise on

drawings. All pads shall be at least 3” larger all around the equipment. The additional thickness of

concrete shall be provided, if so required, to support the weight of equipment and to prevent

transmission of vibrations to other areas from the equipment.

1.15 GUARANTEES













of acceptance or startup of the equipment/system



PART 2 - PRODUCTS






a written request for substitutions to the Architect in Accordance with Division 1.

C. Where listed alternatives or substitutions alter the design or space requirements indicated on the

drawings, include all items of cost for the revised design and construction including cost of all allied

trades involved.

D. Acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitutions shall be subject to approval of the Architect,

Engineer or Owner. If requested submit inspection samples of both the specified and proposed items

for review.

E. In all cases where substitutions are permitted, bear all extra cost of evaluating the equality of the


F. Where only one make is named in the specifications or on the drawings, it shall be provided.

G. Verbal requests or approvals shall not be binding on the Architect, Engineer or Owner.








Trades Specification. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PAINTING


under this Section.







finish.


A. Identify each piece of equipment as to nature of service and system number corresponding to

designation on design drawings, by stenciling with one (1) inch high letters or attached two (2) color

engraved plastic nameplates. Apply one (1) coat lacquer or varnish over the stencils.

B. Lettering shall include operational data pertinent to the equipment, such as but not limited to:

horsepower, voltage rating and service designation.





3.3 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TRAINING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided on all equipment that is part of contract and

other authorized additions to contract. All manuals shall be in hard cover ring binder and all items

shall be indexed.

Furnish five (5) complete bound sets of service manuals containing operating and maintenance

instructions for all H.V.A.C. equipment and controls. Bind the written operating instructions, shop

drawings, catalogue cuts and manufacturer’s instructions into an 8-1/2” x 11” hard back binder

B. Prepare separate manuals for the following systems and for models actually installed:

1. HVAC systems.

2. Automatic Temperature Control systems.

C. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves,

engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

D. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine, and step-by-step

normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions;

and summer and winter operating instructions.

E. Maintenance procedures for routine, preventive maintenance and trouble-shooting, disassembly,

repair, reassemble, aligning and adjusting instructions servicing instructions and lubrication charts

and schedules.

F. Copy of all valves list.

G. A complete list of all belt drives listing drive size, bore size, keyway dimensions and manufacturer's

replacement belt number.

H. Automatic temperature control diagrams, part description and number, and a written description,

including sequence of operation. Diagrams shall be legible when reduced in size to fit in the manuals.



I. Final balancing and testing reports.

J. Final accepted shop drawings.

K. Name, address and telephone number for service on each manufacturer's equipment.

L. Listing of all Installing Contractors, including the day and night telephone numbers.

M. List of spare parts.

N. Warranties on all equipment.

0. Copies of all start up reports.

P. All the Shop Drawings included in the manual must bear the Engineer's approval Stamp and all

markups/corrections incorporated into the Shop Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING




C. Provide chemical cleaning for hot water heating piping systems with an approved detergent to remove

pipe dope, slushing compounds, oils, loose mill scale and other extraneous materials. D. After initial period of operation, clean all strainers, traps and dirt legs. 3.5 LUBRICATION, PACKING AND SUPPLIES

A. Properly lubricate all rotating, reciprocating equipment, before it is started with correct grade, type and quantity of lubricant.

B. Check each shaft containing a packing gland for condition by backing parking gland off and examine

for proper grade, amount and type of packing, as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Maintain all lubrication, gaskets and packing during construction, assure that at the time of acceptance, all are in first class condition.

3.6 STARTING SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and system.

B. Notify Owner seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation,

belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions, which may cause damage.

D. Verify that tests, meter readings and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the Equipment or System Manufacturer.



E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractor’s personnel, according to manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Refer to other specification Sections for requirements of the manufacturer to provide an authorized

representative to be present at the site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation, prior to start-up and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning

correctly. Furnish report on manufacturer’s forms, intended for the purposed. END OF SECTION 230500


TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-

1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


A. This section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC Systems to produce design objectives

including air distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus of H.V.A.C. work. The

work consists of setting speed, volume, dampers, sheaves, etc., provided for in the systems, confirming

proper system function and operation, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting

reports, and recommending modifications to work as required by contract documents. This work also

includes specified duct leak testing. Change pulleys/sheaves/belts, if required, at no additional cost to

meet the design flows under actual static pressure drop conditions. The Contractor shall make

provisions for necessary power, fuel and other services/instruments required.

B. Component types of testing, adjusting, and balancing specified in this section includes in general the

following as applied to mechanical equipment:

1. Fans

2. Hoods

3. Air Handling Units

4. Ductwork Systems

6. Duct Leak Testing

7. Electrical Measurement

8. Terminal Units

C. Refer to Division 23 sections for installation and start-up of equipment to be tested, adjusted, and

balanced; not work of this section.

D. Refer to Division 23 sections for pressure testing of piping systems; not work of this section.

E. The air and water balance shall be performed as a part of the HVAC contract.


A. Tester's Qualifications: Contractors shall be members in good standing and certified by AABC or

NEBB in those testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this project, with a

minimum of three years balancing experience and proven capability in work of the type and size as

presented by this project.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. AABC Compliance: Comply with AABC's AABC National Standards", as applicable to

mechanical air distribution systems, and equipment and apparatus, except where these



specifications exceed requirements.

2. Industry Standards: Comply with the latest ASHRAE systems volume testing, adjusting, and

balancing recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments, and testing, adjusting, and

balancing, except as otherwise indicated.

3. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with the latest edition of the SMACNA testing, adjusting,

balancing manual.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the same number of copies of the report as required for Shop Drawings on standard AABC,

NEBB or SMACNA forms. The results of the balancing work shall be submitted in report form to the

Architect no later than 14 days following substantial completion of the HVAC systems. Where test

results differ from specified design conditions, indicating a deficiency, include explanation comments

in report. The balancing foreman shall sign and date each form in the report under his responsibility

and the balancing supervisor's proof certification shall accompany the report.

1.5 CEILING ACCESS

A. Balancing Contractor shall be fully responsible for removal and reinstallation of lay-in ceiling and

replacement of any tile damaged by balancing technicians in the performance of this work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)


3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING

A. Perform these steps before operating the system:

1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design

intent.

3.2 AIR BALANCE

A. Balancing company shall perform all necessary tests and adjustments to balance the air and water

systems to design requirements, with permissible tolerances as follows:

1. Supply Fans 0% to +10%

2. Return/Exhaust Fans 0% to +10%

3. Diffusers/Supply Grilles -5% to +10%

4. Return Grilles +5% to -10%

5. Exhaust Grilles +5% to -10%

6. Minimum Outdoor Air -5% to +5%

B. Balancing company shall advise the Installing Contractor of any additional work or rework required to

obtain design performance during the course of the balancing work. Such additional work shall be

performed prior to the completion of balancing and submission of the balancing report.



C. Balancing Procedures

1. Air Handling Equipment: For each piece of air handling, this Contractor shall list the data of

the fan, motor and drive and shall obtain by measurement and furnish to the Associate the fan

speed, motor voltage, operating amps, cfm and static pressure as determined from the

manufacturer's fan curves and shall also determine the fan cfm by means of a velocity traverse

which shall be taken a minimum of three fan diameters from fan outlet. Before running any

tests, the HVAC Contractor shall have installed all the components of the system and shall

insure the cleanliness of the filters. In the event that the drive assembly requires a change in

belts or pulleys, the Balance Contractor shall advise the Contractor of the size of the

replacement equipment, and rebalance the air handling equipment after installation of new drive

assemblies. Drive and Drive changeout shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor.

2. Check for leaks in air handling unit casings, around doors, and coil connections. Report leaks to

HVAC Contractor and list uncorrected leaks in report.

3. Duct Systems: Adjust all duct dampers, proportioning airflow to minimize adjustments required

at individual grilles, registers, and diffusers.

4. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Shall be balanced using a flow measuring hood or an

anemometer as recommended by manufacturer. Area used in calculating airflow shall be net

core area. Test readings shall be taken for each supply, outlet, return or exhaust inlet. For each

of these units obtain and furnish information on manufacturer, testing equipment used,

procedure followed, location, size, average velocity, gross and net core areas, observed cfm and

specified cfm. Separate tabulations shall be furnished for each manufacturer, each system and

each type of register, grille and diffuser. Adjust registers, grilles and diffusers to obtain the best

airflow pattern and minimize drafts in all areas. Where balancing dampers are available in

ductwork, they shall be utilized for balancing in lieu of dampers furnished in necks of registers

and diffusers to limit sound in the space.

5. Mixing Dampers

Outdoor air, return air and relief dampers shall be set on their linkages by the Control

Contractor for proper operation. Minimum outside air position shall be calculated and

implemented by the DDC control system. The Balance Contractor shall work with the Control

Contractor at the job site to assure that the specified minimum outdoor air quantity is achieved.

3.3 POST BALANCING WORK

A. Balancing Contractor shall patch test holes in insulation, ductwork, and housings, which have been cut

or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer, with materials to match, or

plastic plugs.

B. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control

levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide

markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.

C. Retest, adjust and balance systems subsequent to significant system modification, and resubmit test

results.

3.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL, AIR TESTING AND BALANCING COORDINATION

A. The installation, programming, establishment of initial setpoints and debugging of all temperature

control system(s) shall be the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor. The testing of the

entire HVAC system, including the temperature control system(s) shall be the responsibility of the



testing and balancing agency. The balancing agent shall be available when required by the Automatic

Temperature Control Contractor.

B. During the testing and balancing phase of work, the Temperature Control Contractor shall provide a

technician at the request of the testing and balancing agency to operate the entire control system to

establish the mode of operation required for properly testing and balancing the system and for testing

and verifying temperature control operation. In addition Mechanical Contractor shall provide

Mechanical Equipment Technician during the TAB procedures to assist in the operation and

adjustment of the equipment.

C. Programming or setpoint changes required as a result of system analysis and balancing shall be made

by the Temperature Control Contractor.

D. The operation of the entire automatic temperature control system(s) during the entire test and balance

procedure is the responsibility of the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor.

E. Refer to Section 230993 of these specifications for automatic temperature control sequence.

F. Testing and balancing agency and the Temperature Control Contractor shall cooperate in a joint effort as

necessary to achieve properly tested and balanced system.

3.5 SERVICES

A. Instruction

1. Balancing agency shall instruct the Owner’s maintenance personnel in the proper setting and

adjustment of the equipment.

B. Reinspection

1. Balancing agency shall make one additional return inspection trips to the project, at no

additional costs; one during heating design conditions and one during air conditioning design

conditions for the purpose of checking out the entire system (or group of systems). Balancing

agency shall make any additional adjustments required during the reinspection.



H.V.A.C. INSULATION 230700 - 1

SECTION 230700 – H.V.A.C. INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

1. Ductwork Insulation

2. Duct Liner

3. Jackets and Accessories

4. Refrigerant Piping

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 230500.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and

locations.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship

and installation standards will be achieved.


A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating shall not exceed 25 and 50 respectively and shall be

in accordance with ASTM E84 and NFPA 255.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15010.

B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and

thickness.

C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Manufacturers as noted below or approved equal

2.1 INSULATION PRODUCTS

A. Provide the insulation products as manufactured y Owen-Corning, Certain Teed Corp., Knauf

Fiberglass or Manville Products Corp.



B. Type A – Cellular Form Pipe Insulation

1. Cellular elastomeric, flexible molded or sheet-insulation of 0.28 at 75o F. and suitable for

temperatures from –40o F. to 220

o F. Elastomeric form adhesive shall be air dried compatible with

insulation.

C. Fiberglass Flexible Duct Wrap

1. Flexible glass fiber, non-combustible blanket insulation shall be in compliance with ASTM C553,

having K-factor of 0.29 at 75o F., density at 1.0 lbs/cu. ft., suitable for temperatures up to 250

o F.

Vapor barrier jacket shall be Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum

film.

D. Fiberglass, Rigid Duct Insulation

1. Rigid, noncombustible blanket insulation with density of 3.0 lbs/cu. ft., in compliance with ASTM

C-612 having a K-factor of 0.29 at 75o F. and suitable for temperatures up to 250

o F. Vapor

barrier jacket shall be Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum film.

E. Fiberglass Duct liner, Rigid

1. Semi-rigid, non-combustible fiberglass insulation with density of 3.0 lb./cu. ft. in compliance with

ASTM C-612 having K-factor of 0.23 at 75o F. and suitable for temperatures up to 250

o F.

Waterproof fire-retardant type adhesive and galvanized steel, welded with press or head liner

fastners.

2.2 The following piping systems shall be insulated as follows:

A. H.V.A.C. Piping

SERVICE PIPE SIZE

(INCH)

INSULATION

THICKNESS

(INCHES)

TYPE

1. Refrigerant Piping All

½”

Type A

2. Copper condensate drain lines from air

conditioning unit

Up to 1”

1-1/2” & larger

½”

1”

Type A

Type A

2.3 THE DUCTWORK SHALL BE INSULATED/LINED AS FOLLOWS

Service Type Insulation Thickness

A. All outdoor air Flexible Outside insulation 2"

intake and air intake ducts fiberglass



B. All supply air Flexible Outside insulation 1-1/2"

ductwork of air fiberglass except noted otherwise

handling units &

makeup air ducts

above ceiling

Note: Provide 1” thick or as noted duct liner 3 lb., where indicated on the drawings.

C. All return air ducts Flexible Outside insulation 1-1/2"

of air handling unit fiberglass

(ACUs & RTUs)

installed above ceiling.

D. Neck of all supply diffusers shall be insulated with 1-1/2" fiberglass duct wrap.

E. All supply and return air duct work in Mechanical Rooms and also installed in unconditioned areas,

shall be insulated with 1-1/2” thick flexible duct wrap insulation. Ducts installed in air-conditioned

rooms without ceilings shall not be insulated.

2.6 TRANSFER AIR AND RETURN AIR BOOTS: All transfer air and return air boots shall be lined

with 1" thick fiberglass liner.

2.7 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUT DUCTWORK

A. Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork shall be insulated with Johnsville Fire Master Fast Wrap Type 2M-2-

hour rated insulation. all insulation shall be sealed at joints and installed per recommendations of

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be done by Tradesman specializing in insulation work and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions and in conformance to Building Codes.

B. Examine area and conditions under which insulation is to be applied. Do not proceed until surfaces are

clean and dry.

C. No insulation shall be applied prior to pressure test completion, painting or heat tracing and acceptance

of respective piping.



D. All joints shall be butted firmly together. The surfaces shall be smooth and even. Insulate each

continuous run of piping with full length units of insulation with single cut piece to complete run. Butt

pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. Longitudinal joints of the jacket shall be

overlapping with factory applied adhesive. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band

over the butt joints.

E. All insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed regardless of services.

F. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jackets and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. The

seams shall be on bottom side of horizontal piping. A continuous vapor barrier shall be required.

G. Extend insulation without interruption through walls, floors, hangers/unistrut clamp supports and

similar support locations.



CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 – CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions

and Division 1 Specification apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. The intent of this Division is to furnish and install a complete stand-alone HVAC Direct Digital Control of rooftop air conditioning unit split systems, VRF systems and

miscellaneous systems.

2. In addition, the following shall apply:

a. The work under this Section shall include all materials and labor to perform all

work required for the installation of the ATCC as specified. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that are required to meet

functional intent shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.

b. The drawings and Specifications are complementary to one another—meaning that what is called for on one is to be considered called for in both. Where

conflicts exist between the Specifications and/or drawings, the more stringent

requirement shall apply.

c. The ATC Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of site conditions and for gathering all necessary field data for all items to be provided under this

contract prior to submitting his or her bid. Where work specified under other

Sections of this Specification connects to equipment or systems that are listed and described in this Section, the ATC Contractor shall provide proper

connection(s) to such equipment, including trade coordination.

3. Abbreviations

a. ATCC = Automatic Temperature Control Contractor.

b. DDC = Direct Digital Control c. HVAC = Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning


A. Where work specified under other sections of these specifications connects to equipment or

systems, which are a part of this Section, provide proper connection(s) to such equipment

including trade coordination. The following sections may have direct links to the installation of the ATCC system.

B. General Conditions Analog:

C. Section 230500 – Common Work Results for H.V.A.C.



D. Section 230993 – Sequence of Operations

E. Section 233400 – H.V.A.C. Fans

F. Section 237413 - VRF and Packaged Rooftop H.V.A.C. Units

G. Section 238126 – Split System & Packaged Rooftop HVAC Units

H. Division 26 – Electrical


A. General

1. The Temperature Control System as specified herein shall be fully integrated and

installed as a complete package by the Temperature Control Contractor. The System shall include all wiring, piping, installation supervision, calibration, adjustments, and

checkout necessary for a complete and fully operational system.

2. The ATC Contractor shall be a factory owned branch office that is regularly engaged in

the engineering, programming, installation and service of Temperature Control

Systems of similar size and complexity.

3. The ATC Contractor shall have a local branch facility within a 75-mile radius of the

job site. Emergency service shall be available on a 24-hour, 7-day-a-week basis.

4. The ATC Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory

and neat workmanlike manner acceptable to the Owner/Architect.

5. The ATC Contractor will coordinate with other Trade Contractors regarding the

location and size of pipes, equipment, conduit, ducts, openings, switches, outlets, and

so forth, in order to eliminate any delays in the progress of the job.

B. The Temperature Control System Contractor and manufacturer shall be Trane, Johnson

Controls, Alerton, or as approved equal.

C. The ATC Contractor shall comply with all current Governing Codes Ordinances and

regulations, including UL, NFPA, the Local Building Code, NEC and ASHRAE.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples

1. The ATC Contractor shall submit within 30 days after award installation drawings

and control strategies for review.

2. Each submittal shall have a cover sheet with the following information provided:

submittal ID number; date; project name, address, and title; ATC Contractor name, address and phone number; ATC Contractor project manager, quality control

manager, and project engineer names and phone numbers.



3. Each submittal shall include the following information.

a. ATC riser diagram showing all DDC controllers.

b. One-line schematics and system flow diagrams showing the location of all

control devices. Schematic drawings shall include a legend detailing the

color coding scheme for wiring as well as a nomenclature specific to the ATC Contractor. The legend shall be consistent throughout the drawings.

c. ATCC Contractors own written description for each sequence of operations,

to include the following:

● Sequences shall reference input/output and software parameters by

name and description. ● The sequences of operations provided in the submittal by the ATC

Contractor shall represent the detailed analysis needed to create actual

programming code from the design documents.

● Points shall be referenced by name, including all software points such as programmable set points, range limits, time delays, and so forth.

● The sequence of operations shall cover normal operation and operation

under the various alarm conditions applicable to that system.

d. Detailed Bill of Material list for each panel, identifying: quantity, part

number, description, and associated options. e. Control Damper Schedules. This spreadsheet type schedule shall include a

separate line for each damper and a column for each of the damper attributes,

including: Code Number, Fail Position, Damper Type, Damper Operator,

Blade Type, Bearing Type, Seals, Duct Size, Damper Size, Mounting, and Actuator Type.

f. Cataloged cut sheets of all equipment used. This includes, but is not limited

to, the following: DDC panels, peripherals, sensors, actuators, dampers, control air system components, and so forth.

g. Range and scale information for all transmitters and sensors. This sheet shall

clearly indicate one device and any applicable options. Where more than one

device to be used is on a single sheet, submit two sheets, individually marked.

h. ATC Contractor shall provide training course outlines.

I. Testing procedures and testing documentation shall be included.

4. ATC Contractor shall not order material or begin fabrication or field installation until

receiving authorization to proceed in the form of an approved submittal. ATC Contractor shall be solely responsible for the removal and replacement of any item

not approved by submittal at no cost to the Owner.

1.6 O & M MANUALS

A. Submit three sets of each manual.

1. Include the following documentation in the Hardware Manual:

● General description and cut sheets for all components.

● Detailed wiring and installation illustrations and complete calibration procedures for each field and panel device.

● Complete trouble-shooting procedures and guidelines.



● Complete operating instructions for all systems.

● Maintenance Instructions: Document all maintenance and repair/replacement procedures.

2. Include the following documentation in the DDC Software Manual:

● Sequence of Operations ● Program Listing of Software Source Code or Flow Chart Diagrams of

Programming Objects.

3. Provide three (3) copies of all manufacturers manuals covering the installed system.

This shall include, as a minimum:

● System Engineering Manual ● System Installation Manual

● Programming Manual

● Engineering and Troubleshooting Bulletins

B. All manuals shall be provided in hard copy format and on a single Compact Disk (CD)

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Material and Labor:

1. The Control System shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under

normal use and service. If within one year from the date of completion any of the

equipment herein described is defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it

will be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the ATCC Contractor free of charge.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL FUNCTIONS

A. The control system shall consist of input/output modules to monitor and control a full array of ancillary (both analog and binary) devices and sensors. The system shall have independent

stand-alone capabilities.

B. The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in the specifications.

Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for

control of mechanical systems on this project.

The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to

operate under stand-alone control.

C. The microprocessor based control system panel shall provide the following control for each

zone and for all connected loads and HVAC equipment.

1. Time-of-Day Scheduling utilizing a 365-day clock

2. Occupied and Unoccupied Temperature Control Setpoints

3. Timed Override 4. Time and date

5. Alarm Log



6. Security

7. Remote monitoring – dial in/network 8. Communicate to equipment via a open industry standard protocol

D. All products used in this project installation shall be new, currently under manufacture,

and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of two (2) years. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products, unless explicitly

approved by the Owner’s Representative in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at

least five (5) years after completion of this control.

2.2 HVAC INPUT DEVICES

AA.. RRoooomm TTeemmppeerraattuurree SSeennssoorrss wwiitthh IInntteeggrraall DDiissppllaayy:: AAllll ddeevviicceess ttoo bbee nnoonn--mmeerrccuurryy

ccoonnttaaiinniinngg..

11.. RRoooomm sseennssoorrss sshhaallll bbee ccoonnssttrruucctteedd ffoorr eeiitthheerr ssuurrffaaccee oorr wwaallll bbooxx mmoouunnttiinngg..

BB.. OOuuttssiiddee AAiirr SSeennssoorrss

1. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions

to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield.

2. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate that surrounds the sensor element.

3. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for

ambient temperatures.

CC.. DDuucctt MMoouunntt SSeennssoorrss

1. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct, and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.

2. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly,

including lock nut and mounting plate. 3. For outdoor air duct applications, a weatherproof mounting box with

weatherproof cover and gasket shall be used.

DD.. AAvveerraaggiinngg SSeennssoorrss

1. For ductwork greater in any dimension that 48 inches and/or where air

temperature stratification exists, an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points shall be used.

2. For plenum applications, such as mixed air temperature measurements, a string

of sensors mounted across the plenum shall be used to account for stratification and/or air turbulence. The averaging string shall have a minimum of 4 sensing

points per 12-foot long segment.

3. Capillary supports at the sides of the duct shall be provided to support the sensing string.

EE.. LLooww TTeemmppeerraattuurree LLiimmiitt SSwwiittcchheess

1. The low temperature limit switch shall be of the manual reset type with Double

Pole/Single Throw snap acting contacts rated for 16 amps at 120VAC.



2. The sensing element shall be a minimum of 15 feet in length and shall react to

the coldest 18-inch section. Element shall be mounted horizontally across duct in accordance with manufacturers recommended installation procedures.

3. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of

the air stream, additional switches shall be provided as required to provide full

protection of the air stream.

FF.. DDuucctt SSmmookkee DDeetteeccttoorrss

1. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided, installed and wired to fire alarm panel

by the Electrical Contractor. Detector to include auxiliary contact for monitoring

by the ATC. 2. Air return distribution systems with capacity greater than 2000 CFM shall be

installed with approved smoke detector for installation to comply with

requirements of International Code and NFPA.

3. Upon activation, smoke detectors shall shutdown the units. Wiring shall be by the Electrical Contractor.

2.3 HVAC OUTPUT DEVICES

AA.. AAccttuuaattoorrss

1. General Requirements

a. Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic.

2. Electronic Damper Actuators a. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount.

b. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by

the sequence of operations. Damper sections shall be sized based on actuator manufacturer’s recommendations for face velocity, differential

pressure and damper type. The actuator mounting arrangement and

spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed

positions of the dampers, as required. All actuators (except terminal units) shall be furnished with mechanical spring return unless otherwise

specified in the sequences of operations. All actuators shall have external

adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction, and a gear release to allow manual positioning.

c. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply,

consume no more than 15 VA, and be UL listed. d. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC

power supply and be UL listed. Isolation, smoke, exhaust fan, and other

dampers, as specified in the sequence of operations, shall be furnished

with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop associated fan. Two-position actuators, as specified in

sequences of operations as “quick acting,” shall move full stroke within

20 seconds. All smoke damper actuators shall be quick acting. e. Acceptable manufacturers: Invensys, Belimo, Honeywell



BB.. CCoonnttrrooll DDaammppeerrss

1. The ACU unit manufacturing shall provide automatic control damper with units.

Exhaust fans provided with backdraft or motorized damper by Unit

Manufacturer.

2. All dampers used for throttling airflow shall be of the opposed blade type arranged for normally open or normally closed operation, as required. The

damper is to be sized so that, when wide open, the pressure drop is a sufficient

amount of its close-off pressure drop to shift the characteristic curve to near linear.

3. All dampers used for two-position, open/close control shall be parallel blade type

arranged for normally open or closed operation, as required. 4. Damper frames and blades shall be constructed of either galvanized steel or

aluminum. Maximum blade length in any section shall be 48”. Damper blades

shall be 16-gauge minimum and shall not exceed six (6) inches in width. Damper

frames shall be 16-gauge minimum hat channel type with corner bracing. Additional stiffening or bracing shall be provided for any section exceeding 48”

in height. All damper bearings shall be made of stainless steel or oil-impregnated

bronze. Dampers shall be tight closing, low leakage type, with synthetic elastomer seals on the blade edges and flexible stainless steel side seals. Dampers

of 48”x48” size shall not leak in excess of 8.5 cfm per square foot when closed

against 4” w.g. static pressure when tested in accordance with AMCA Std. 500. 5. Air foil blade dampers of double skin construction with linkage out of the air

stream shall be used whenever the damper face velocity exceeds 1500 FPM or

system pressure exceeds 2.5” w.g., but no more than 4000 FPM or 6” w.g.

Acceptable manufacturers are Johnson Controls D-1300, Ruskin CD50, and Vent Products 5650.

2.4 HVAC MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Local Control Panels

1. All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the Control

Manufacturer’s standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL

inspected and listed as an assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control panels shall be fully enclosed, with sub-panel, hinged door, and key-

locking latch.

2. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s) and I/O

devices—such as relays, transducers, and so forth—that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function.

3. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be extended to a numbered,

color-coded, and labeled terminal strip for ease of maintenance and expansion. Wiring to I/O devices shall be made from this terminal strip.

4. All other wiring in the panel, internal and external, shall be made to additional

line or low voltage color-coded and labeled terminal strips. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All terminal strips and wiring shall be UL listed, 300-

volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring.

5. All wiring for every control panel shall follow a common color-coded format. All

terminal strip color coding and numbering shall follow a common format. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped.



6. A convenience 120 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure,

fused on/off power switch, and required transformers.

B. Power Supplies

1. DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated load shall not exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the power supply.

2. Input: 120 VAC +10%, 60Hz.

3. Output: 24 VDC. 4. Line Regulation: +0.05% for 10% line change.

5. Load Regulation: +0.05% for 50% load change.

6. Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak. 7. An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to

the power supply.

8. A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply.

C. Thermostats

1. Electric room thermostats of the heavy-duty type shall be provided for unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, and ventilation fans, where required. All these items

shall be provided with concealed adjustment. Finish of covers for all room-type

instruments shall match and, unless otherwise indicated or specified, covers shall be manufacturer’s standard finish.

2.5 MULTI-INDOOR UNIT, VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW - HYPER HEAT

Y-SERIES HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

A. General: The City Multi Controls Network (CMCN) shall be Mitsubishi Electric and

shall be capable of supporting remote controllers, schedule timers, system controllers and centralized controllers.

B. Electrical Characteristics

1. General: The CMCN shall operate at 24VDC. Controller power and

communications shall be via a common non-polar communications bus.

2. Wiring: Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from

indoor unit to ME remote controller to indoor unit and to the outdoor unit.

Control wiring to remote controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that unit.

Control wiring for schedule timers, system controllers, and centralized controllers shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to

outdoor unit, to system controllers, to the power supply.

Control wiring for the Deluxe MA, Simple MA, and Wireless MA remote

controllers shall be from the remote controller to the first associated indoor unit

(TB-15) then to the remaining associated indoor units (TB-15) in a daisy chain

configuration.



The AG-150 GB-50ADA, GB-24 centralized controller shall be capable of being

networked with other AG-150 GB-50ADA and GB-24 centralized controllers for centralized control.

3. Wiring type: Wiring shall be 2-conductor (16 AWG), twisted, stranded, shielded

wire as defined by the Design Tool AutoCAD output.

Network wiring shall be CAT-5e with RJ-45 connection.

B. City Multi Controls Network: The City Multi Controls Network (CMCN) consists of

remote controllers, schedule timers, system controllers, centralized controllers, and/or

integrated web based interface communicating over a high-speed communication bus. The City Multi Controls Network shall support operation monitoring, scheduling, error

email distribution, personal browsers, online maintenance support.

C. CMCN: Remote Controllers

1. Simple MA Remote Controller (PAC-YT51CRB) shall be capable of controlling

up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). The Simple MA Remote Controller shall be compact in size, approximately 3” x 5” and have limited user

functionality. The Simple MA supports temperature display selection of

Fahrenheit. The Simple MA Remote Controller shall allow the user to change on/off, mode, temperature setting, and fan speed setting. The Simple MA Remote

Controller shall be able to limit the set temperature range from the Simple MA

The room temperature shall be sensed at either the Simple MA Remote

Controller or the Indoor Unit dependent on the indoor unit dipswitch setting. The Simple MA Remote Controller shall display a four-digit error code in the event

of system abnormality/error.

2. The Simple MA Remote Controller shall only be used in same group with PAC-

YT51CRB (Simple MA Remote Controllers), with up to two remote controllers

per group.

The Simple MA Remote Controller shall require no addressing. The Simple MA

Remote Controller shall connect using two-wire, stranded, non-polar control wire

to TB15 connection terminal on the indoor unit. The PAC-YT51CRB shall

require cross-over wiring for grouping across indoor units.

D. Centralized Controller:

2. AG-150 Centralized Controller: The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall be

capable of controlling a maximum of 50 indoor units across multiple CITY MULTI outdoor units. The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall be

approximately 7-1/2”x12” in size and shall be powered from a built-in power

supply unit (PAC-SC51KVA). The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall support operation superseding that of the remote controllers, system configuration,

daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and malfunction

monitoring. The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall have five basic operation

controls which can be applied to an individual indoor unit, a group of indoor units (up to 50 indoor units), or all indoor units (collective batch operation). This

basic control set of operation controls for the AG-150 Centralized Controller



shall include on/off, operation mode selection, temperature setting, fan speed

setting, and airflow direction setting. Since the AG-150 provides centralized control it shall be able to enable or disable operation of local remote controllers.

In terms of scheduling, the AG-150 Centralized Controller shall allow the user to

define both daily and weekly schedules with operations consisting of ON/OFF,

mode selection, temperature setting, vane direction, fan speed, and permit/prohibit of remote controllers.

2. All AG-150 Centralized Controllers shall be equipped with one RJ-45 Ethernet port to support interconnection with a network PC via a closed/direct Local Area

Network (LAN). The AG-150 Centralized Controller shall be capable of

performing initial settings via a PC using the AG-150 Centralized Controller’s initial setting browser.

3. Standard software functions shall allow the building manager to securely log into

each AG-150 via the PC’s web browser to support operation monitoring, scheduling, error email, and online maintenance diagnostics.

PART 3 – PERFORMANCE/EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION PRACTICES

A. Control System Wiring

1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the

installation of the Facility Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the ATC Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical

Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the

requirements of applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.

2. All system input wiring shall be twisted shielded pair, minimum 18-gauge wire.

All system analog output wiring shall be twisted shielded pair/3-wire as required, minimum 18 gauge wire. Preconfigured cables between Terminal Unit

Controllers and Thermostats are acceptable, minimum 24-gauge.

3. All internal panel device wiring for binary outputs and pilot relay shall be

minimum 16-gauge wire.

3.2 TRAINING

A. The controls contractor shall provide the following training services:

B. On-site training shall be performed by a factory-certified professional trainer, training

shall be one (1) eight-hour session. Training shall consists of:

1. Basic system operation.

2. Reporting and alarm management.

3. Scheduling and point trending



C. Operator Training: Operator training shall include the detailed review of the control

installation drawings, points list, and equipment list. The instructor shall then walk through the building identifying the location of the control devices installed. For each

type of systems, the instructor shall demonstrate how the system accomplishes the

sequence of operation.

3.3 ATC Contractor shall coordinate with Testing/Balancing Contractor and shall be available to

make adjustments as and when required by the Balancing Contractor and the Balancing

Contractor shall be available when required by ATC Contractor.



SEQUENCE OF OPERTION 230993 - 1

SECTION 230993 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



Division 1 Specification apply to this Section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the Sequence of Operation of the following:

1. Split Air Conditioning Units (Variable Volume and Constant Volume).

2. Variable Air Volume and Boxes with Electric Heating.

3. Section 237413 – VRF & Packaged Rooftop Units

4. VRF Heat Pump Units

5. Exhaust Fans

6. Cabinet Heaters/Unit Heaters


A. Section 230500 – Common Work Results for H.V.A.C.

B. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

C. Section 230900 - Controls and Instruments

D. Section 233400 – H.V.A.C. Fans

E. Section 233600 - Air Terminal Units

F. Section 23413 – VRF & Packaged Rooftop Units

G. Section 238126 – Split System Air Conditioning Units

H. Division 26 - Related section for equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring

connections.

I. Drawings and Division 1 General Requirements

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. DDC = Direct Digital Controls

B. BAS = Building Automation System.

C. HVAC = Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning



D. ATCC = Automation Temperature Control Contractor


A. The HVAC system controls shall be DDC based stand-alone controls. A complete functional and

operation system shall be installed by BAS Contractor.

B. All control wiring shall be the responsibility of BAS Contractor.

C. The 120V-1Ø-60 power wiring, beyond the scope of Electrical Contractor, shall be the responsibility

of BAS Contractor. See Electrical Drawings.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate mechanical system controlled and control system components.

1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Include written description of control

sequence.

2. Include control wiring diagrams for each control system on AutoCAD ViseoVersion. Submit

required number of drawing sets. The diskette of As-built systems shall be submitted for use of

Owner.

3. Three Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

4. Warranties for parts and labor for one year from date of acceptance.

5. Locations of panels, sensors, thermostats.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 REFER TO SECTION 230900


3.1 GENERAL

A. All sequences shall be accomplished through software resident within direct digital control (DDC)

panels and application specific controllers, unless otherwise indicated. Set points, intermediate

calculations, time delays, and other pertinent data shall be adjustable from the local DDC panel.

B. This section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type

of control system operation are specified. Specifications of equipment, devices and system

components required for control systems are specified in other sections. All additional accessories

devices, such as, sensors, wiring, relays, control transformers, switches required for complete

functional and operational system and shall be furnished and installed by the BAS Contractor.

C. The economizer controls of the heating ventilating and air conditioning units shall be set through DDC

Controller based on outdoor air temperature and return air temperature to determine the most

economical method of cooling. BAS Contractor shall furnish, install and wire space sensors.

D. When the units are disabled or when the power fails, the outdoor air dampers shall close.



3.2. AIR CONDITIONING UNIT ACU-1 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME, ROMOTE CONDENSING

UNIT CU-1

A. Control Sequence

1. ACU System is controlled from a DDC controller. The system will index the unit to occupied or

unoccupied mode based on a user adjustable weekly schedule, annual calendar and VAV zone

needs. ATCC Contractor shall furnish and install a DDC Controller for the unit. The ACU unit

manufacturer shall provide frequency drive for variable volume control.

2. When system is indexed to occupied mode the supply fan will start and run continuously.

3. Outside air damper will be modulated to maintain minimum outside air quantity as noted in the

Schedule on the drawings. Supply air temperature set at 55o F. during cooling mode and

60o F. during heating mode shall maintain the “setpoint” temperature by controlling the

temperature based economizer or refrigeration cycle for cooling and remote gas duct heater for

heating.

4. A DDC static pressure sensor, located approximately two thirds down the length of the supply fan

duct run with the greatest static pressure, shall maintain the minimum duct static pressure by

modulating the frequency drive.

5. In morning warm-up mode, return air sensor setpoint at 68o F. through DDC controller shall

modulate gas heater to maintain its “set” temperature. In morning warm-up cycle, the outside air

damper shall be closed, the return air damper fully open and all terminal boxes shall be full open.

The system shall be prevented from entering the morning warm-up mode more than once per

day.

6. During unoccupied times, the ACU fan will normally be “off”, outside dampers closed. VAV

boxes full open: If any VAV zone reports a room temperature below unoccupied heating

setpoint of 60o

F. (adjustable), the ACU will be indexed to the warm-up mode and remain in

warm-up mode until all room temperatures are above the unoccupied heating setpoint, minimum

“on” time will be 30 minutes.

7. Safety circuit, hard wired to ACU fan, with input to the DDC Controller will stop supply fan,

close outside dampers, heating and cooling stages and set an alarm, if high duct static pressure

limit, set 5” wg. (adjustable), opens or smoke detector senses products of combustion in the

return air stream.

8. A low temperature sensor located in the discharge of heating coil de-energizers (hardwired

interlock), the supply fan and indicate low temperature alarm, if the temperature drops below

38o F.

9. Smoke detector mounted in return air duct of unit shall be furnished and installed by Electrical

Contractor (Division 26). Smoke detector shall be hard wired to the Air Conditioning Unit, and

shall turn the unit “off” and close outside air damper on detection of particles of combustion.

10. ATCC Contractor shall program the DDC Controller to set an alarm for dirty filter and other

routine maintenance functions based on the differential pressure transmitter across the filter to



initiate the alarm.

11. The DDC control panels and related control wiring shall be furnished and mounted in field by the

ATCC Contractor.

3.3 NEW SINGLE DUCT TERMINAL (VAV) VARIABLE VOLUME BOXES WITH ELECTRIC

REHEAT

A. The temperature shall be controlled through DDC by modulating normally open (N.O.) volume damper

from maximum to minimum position on a fall in room temperature. On a continued fall in room

temperature for VAV boxes only, temperature below setpoint, the box damper shall adjust to heating

CFM and stages of electric heating coil shall be energized to maintain the desired room temperature.

Each zone shall have its own discreet and unique start/stop function controlled from the DDC and shall

have an independent start/stop schedule and individual room sensor. DDC Controller shall be

programmed for morning warm-up cycle, which shall drive all terminal boxes to their maximum

position, until the ACU return air temperature reaches the morning warm-up temperature, the terminal

boxes shall revert to their normal operating sequence. All boxes shall be adjustable for

maximum/minimum CFMs by ATC Contractor.

B. These boxes shall be controlled by stand-alone application specific DDC controllers and electric

actuators mounted on the unit.

C. ATC Contractor shall furnish room temperature sensors, direct digital controllers, electric damper

actuators and enclosures to the box manufacturer for factory installation. The box manufacturer shall

install this equipment at his cost. The installation shall consist of mounting and powering controller,

damper actuators and termination to the controller and terminating all control points within the box.

Box manufacturer shall provide 40 VA 120/24 volt transformers to power controller and auxiliary

equipment. Provide multiple point pick-up box velocity sensor and polyethylene leads and terminate at

controller. NOTE: Single point pick-up for velocity sensor is not acceptable.

D. During unoccupied mode, should room temperature fall below the unoccupied heating setpoint 60o F.

adjustable, or the room temperature sensor generates an unoccupied override request, this will signal

the ACU to start.

3.4 SPLIT HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ACU-2 AND ACU-3

A. Split Heating and Air Conditioning Units

1. The system includes indoor “furnace” with gas heat and DX cooling coil and remote air cooled

condensing unit and digital room thermostat with sub-base “Fan-On-Auto-Off”.

2. The unit shall be turned “ON” and “OFF” automatically from programmable room thermostat.

Room thermostat shall maintain its “set” temperature by controlling the stages of gas burner for

heating and refrigeration cycle for cooling.

3. During occupied times, room thermostat shall maintain the “set” temperature by controlling the

stages of gas heater for heating, and refrigeration cycle for cooling.



4. During unoccupied night set-back controls, room thermostat shall cycle stages of gas heater to

maintain its “set” temperature of 60o

F. (adjustable) and outside air damper shall be closed.

Minimum “on” time shall be 30 minutes. Units may operate in occupied mode throughout the

year at Owner’s option.

5. In morning warm-up cycle, the outside air damper shall be closed and return air damper full

open. In warm-up mode, return air stat set at 68oF (adjustable) shall energize gas heater stages

to maintain its “set” temperature.


Contractor (Division 26). Smoke detector shall turn ACU unit “off” and close outside air

damper on detection of particles of combustion.

3.5 MAKEUP AIR UNIT MAU-1 & EXHAUST FAN EF-4

A. Makeup Air Unit MAU-1 and Exhaust Fan EF-4 shall be interlocked. Provide “Hand-Off-Auto” one

for each fan by Electrical Contractor. furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.

B. In “Auto” position, EF-4 shall start and MAU-1 shall come on through its interlock. Discharge air stat

and low limit stat in supply air duct of MAU-1 shall modulate gas burner to maintain its “set”

temperature.

C. “Hand” position shall be used for manual operation or testing.

3.6. ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT RTU-1- CONSTANT AIR VOLUME

A. Control Sequence

1. RTU System is controlled from a DDC controller. Contractor shall furnish and install a DDC

Controller for the unit. RTU-1 shall run continuously year around to provide required outside

air to all resident units. The unit shall run in occupied mode throughout the year and does not

require night setback or morning warm-up cycle.

2. When system is indexed to occupied mode, the supply fan will start and run continuously. Fan

status will be monitored by the DDC Controller. Outside air damper will be modulated to

maintain minimum outside air quantity as noted in the Schedule on the drawings.

3. During occupied times, room thermostat and discharge air sensor through DDC Controller shall

maintain the set temperature by controlling the stages of gas heater for heating, economizer or

refrigeration cycle for cooling.


Contractor (Division 26). Smoke detector shall turn the Rooftop unit “off” and close outside air

damper on detection of particles of combustion.

5. ATC Contractor shall program the DDC Controller to set an alarm for dirty filter and routine

maintenance functions based on the differential pressure transmitter across the filter to initiate

the alarm.



3.7 VARIBLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMP UNITS-VRF 1 thru VRF-14, VRF-15 thru VRF-

30 & VRF 31 thru VRF-44

A. For Temperature Control System - refer to Section 230900, Item 2.5.

B. For Variable Refrigerant Flow, Indoor and Outdoor Units – refer to Section 237413.

C. Sequence of Operation – Variable Refrigerant Flow System

1. Outdoor Units:

a. The variable refrigerant flow system shall have factory packaged and pre-programmed

controls capable of continuously modulating compressor speed, condenser fan speed

(air cooled) and other integral refrigerant circuit valves, to continuously match

connected indoor system load.

b, All necessary refrigerant sensors for controlling superheat, sub cooling, and safety

lockouts shall be integral to the packaged equipment and packaged controls.

c, The packaged VRF control system shall provide internal continuous safety/alarm

monitoring and have the ability to continuously report all alarm/safety codes via an

available packaged central controller (AG-150).

2. Indoor Units:

a. Each zone shall operate continuously unless scheduled off by the web browser based

central controller (AG-150). Each zone shall have its own independent operating

schedule that can be modified and maintained at the web browser based central

controller.

b. Occupant remote controls of on/off, mode and setpoint for each zone shall be able to

be locked individually and independently at the AG-150.

c. Adjustment of occupant defined setpoints shall be able to be limited for each zone

independently at the AG-150.

d. Start/Stop, fan speed setting and zone setpoint for hating and cooling can be adjusted

independently at each Simple MA remote controller provided in each space. The

Simple MA remote controllers are wired to each indoor unit.

e. When zones are manually turned off or scheduled off, each zone shall have

independent setback setpoints for cooling and heating that will turn each zone back on

to maintain defined setback temperatures.

f. All indoor units and associated outdoor units shall have the ability to be placed into a

refrigerant test mode from the AG-150 to determine if the system refrigerant charge is

normal or low (indicating refrigerant leakage). A log in the AG-150 shall maintain a

record of the last 10 test results.



g. Each indoor unit shall display a filter alarm via the AG-150 to remind the user to

clean or change filters on a regular basis.

h. In the event that any fault or malfunction is detected, the AG-150 shall send an email

to a designated list of email recipients. Different levels/types of faults and

malfunctions shall be able to be identified by the AG-150 and sent to specific email

addresses to prevent nuisance emails.

3. Individual Unit Controls

a. Each VRF unit is provided with remote wall mounted Simple MA controller. MA

controller maintains its “set” temperature by controlling the “set” temperature of the

unit, as required. MA controller shall be easy to read with “large numbers” and easily

visible controls, 42 above finished floor mounting height

3.8 EXHAUST FANS

A. Local Wall Mounted Manual Start/Stop: The exhaust fan, as noted in schedule, shall be operated from

local switch. Switch shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. The starters and all

wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 26:

B. Thermostat Control: The exhaust fan as noted in Equipment Schedule shall be started/stopped from a

room thermostat. When the space thermostat senses the temperature above the set point temperature,

the fan shall start. Thermostat and wiring shall be provided by ATC Contractor. When the space

temperature is satisfied, the exhaust fan shall stop.

C. Interlock to ACU Unit: Control Wiring by ATC Contractor: The exhaust fans as noted in Equipment

Schedule shall be interlocked/wired to HVAC equipment. The DDC system shall start and stop

exhaust fan through a contact installed in the fan starter provided by the Electrical Contractor. The

exhaust fan shall be cycled “on” and “off” per the same schedule as ACU unit. Exhaust fan shall not

operate when ACU unit is operating in morning warm-up, or unoccupied cycle. Exhaust fan status

shall be monitored by current switch (typical).

D. Light Switch Control: The exhaust fans as noted in the Equipment Schedule shall be turned “on”

and “off” through light switch. Light switch and wiring shall be provided by Electrical Contractor.

3.9 UNIT HEATERS/CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. See plans for units furnished with unit mounted thermostats.

B. Wherever remote thermostats are shown, ATC Contractor shall furnish, install and wire the

thermostats. Room thermostat shall cycle the unit heater fan and electric heater, to maintain its “set”



REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 – 1

SECTION 232300 – REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



and Division 1 Specification apply to this Section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air conditioning applications.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide a complete system of refrigerant piping from outdoor condensing units to AC units as shown

on Drawings.

B. All refrigerant piping shall be installed for minimal pressure drop.

1.4 SUBMITTALS - None required

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Pipe – Type L-ACR hard dehydrated scale-free copper tubing.

2.2 Fittings – wrought copper, solder type.

2.3 Shut-off valves in refrigerant lines shall be similar to Henry, balanced-acting diaphragm type with

brass body, solder type ends, composition seat disc, a laminated metal diaphragm, positive back seat

with valve in full “open” position and ball check for sealing balancing channel during diaphragm

inspection.

2.4 Charging and drain valves shall be same as shut-off valves above, except one (1) end to have flare

connection with removable seal cap chained to valve body.

2.5 Filter dryers similar to Sporlan “Catch-all”, replaceable core type, solder connections, flanged end,

high capacity core.

2.6 Sight Glass similar to Sporlan “See-all”, moisture and liquid indicator with solder type connections.

Install sight glass of the same size as the liquid line.


3.1 GENERAL

A. Install all accessories furnished with equipment, including but not limited to:


REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 – 2

1. Solenoid Valves

2. Filter Dryers

3. Sight Glasses

3.2. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND/OR INSTALL THE FOLLOWING:

A. Contractor shall provide and/or install the following:

1. Refrigerant piping, valves and fittings.

2. Drain piping and fittings.

3. Pipe and fitting insulation.

4. Leak check all systems.

5. Replacement refrigerant driers, filters and oil filters.

6. Refrigeration specialty items, Unistrut, fasteners, bolts, hangers, etc.

7. Welding gases and materials.

8. All refrigeration system controls, including but not limited to all control conduit and wiring.

9. Appropriate installation equipment, miscellaneous fasteners, adhesives and blocking.

10. Check, start-up, test and balance procedures during scheduled start-up period

3.3 All joints shall be made with “Silfos”.

3.4 During construction, this Contractor shall take precaution to minimize contamination of system by dirt,

scale, moisture or other foreign matter. All foreign material and moisture in the system shall be

removed.

3.5 This Contractor shall provide oil for compressors and proper refrigerant charges for systems.

3.6 All brazing of refrigerant piping shall be performed with a nitrogen purge to prevent oxidation on the

inside of the piping.

3.7 Refrigerant (liquid) lines to condensing units located more than 20’ above AC unit coil shall be

trapped at base and minimum every 75’ of rise.

3.8 Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

NPS ½: Maximum span, 60”; minimum rod size, ¼”.

NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60”; minimum rod size, ¼”.

NPS 1: Maximum span, 72”/ minimum rod size, ¼”.


REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 – 3

NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96”; minimum rod size, 3/8”/

NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96”; minimum rod size, 3/8”.

NPS 2: Maximum span, 96”; minimum rod size, 3/8”.

NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108”; minimum rod size, 3/8”.

NPS 3: Maximum span, 10’; minimum rod size.

NPS 4: Maximum span, 12’; minimum rod size.

Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI:

1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator and safety devices from test pressure.

2. Test high and low pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of design

pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of system.

a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gauge throughout duration of

test.

b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution

over joint.

c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) or higher,

as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

3.10 ADJUSTING:

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

B. Adjust high and low pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air or chilled water controllers to the system design

temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer’s written instructions:

1. Open shut-off valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Check compressor oil level above center of sight glass.

3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

4. Open refrigerant valves, except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

5. Check compressor motor alignment and lubricate motors and bearings.


REFRIGERANT PIPING

232300 – 4

3.11 CLEANING:

A. Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with trichloroethylene.

B. Replace core of filter dryer after system has been adjusted and de sign flow rates and pressures are

established.

3.12 SYSTEM CHARGING:

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers. If

vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

4. Charge system with a new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide full operating charge.



DUCTWORK 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following

1. Metal Ductwork

2. Plenums

3. Duct Cleaning

4. Sealants

5. Fasteners

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Common Work Results for H.V.A.C. Section 230500.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gauges, sizes, welds, and configuration prior

to start of work. Indicates locations of volume dampers, fire dampers, grilles/diffusers, backdraft

dampers, motorized dampers, etc.

C. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials, duct liner, duct connectors, duct wrap.


A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible.

B. Maintain one copy of document on site.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with

minimum five years documented experience.

16 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90 and SMACNA standards, and ASHRAE.

B. OBBC Standards.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 2

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions are given on drawings. For acoustically lined or internally

insulated ducts, make allowance to increase sizes to maintain inside clear dimensions.

B. Low Pressure: Static pressure in duct up to 2" WG and velocities less than 2,000 fpm.

C. Medium Pressure: Static pressure over 2" and up to 6" WG and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm.

D. See HVAC equipment schedule sheet for pressure required for various systems.


2.1 METAL DUCTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Lewis and Lambert, Incorporated

2. United Sheet Metal Corporation

3. Semco Manufacturing, Incorporated

4. Johns-Manville Corporation

5. Shop Fabricated Metal Ducts & Fittings

6. Lindab Spiral

B. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality,

having zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90 for each side.

2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Wiremold

2. Clavaflex

3. Thermaflex

4. Flex Master

B. Two-ply flame-proof vinyl film or corrugated aluminum or multiple layers of aluminum laminate,

supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.

Insulation shall be 1" 0.75 pound density fiberglass blanket with vinyl or aluminum vapor barrier

jacket.

C. Pressure Rating: 10" WG positive and 1.0" WG negative without leakage. Minimum radius of bends

and turns shall conform to manufacturer’s recommendation.

D. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.

E. Temperature Range: -10ºF to 160ºF.

F. Ducts shall be listed by UL 181 and conform to NFPA 90A for flame spread and smoke developed

index of 25 and 50 respectively.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 3

G. Five-foot zero inch maximum length of flexible connection to each diffusers shall be allowed. Flexible

ductwork shall be strapped to rigid duct with plastic straps. Straps shall be tightened and all

connections shall be 100% leak-proof. Flexible ducts shall not be installed in ducts without ceiling in

rooms.

2.3 SEALANT

A. Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or

with tape, or heavy mastic. All horizontal and vertical joints shall be sealed. Duct sealant shall be UL

classified and tested in accordance with UL 723. Duct sealant shall meet NFPA 90A requirements.

B. Manufacturer: Hard cast tape as manufactured by Hard Cast Corporation, Dallas, TX or United Sheet

Metal or 3M.

2.4 HANGER RODS

A. ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. See

Section 15140 for supports and anchors.

B. For aluminum ductwork, use aluminum duct supports and hangers.

C. For stainless steel ductwork provide matching stainless steel support materials.

2.5 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Low Pressure Ductwork (Low Pressure Equipment)

1. All outside air ductwork of air handling units

2. Exhaust ductwork connected to the exhaust fans under 2” S.P.

3. All transfer air ducts.

4. All supply and return air ductwork from and to the air outlets.

5. All return air ductwork.

B. See ACU unit schedules for static pressures for various systems. Ductwork connected to exhaust fans

with over 2” static pressure shall have medium pressure ductwork.

C. ACU-1 variable volume system supply air ductwork to terminal units shall be medium pressure

ductwork.

2.6 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST SYSTEM

A. All exhaust ductwork connected to range hood and up to and including discharge outlets shall be

constructed of No. 16 gauge black steel with all joints welded grease-tight.

B. Pitch all ducts to the hood and provide drains where necessary on fans and ducts.

C. Exhaust ducts shall have cleanout doors (on side or top) located 8’ and 0” on centers.

D. Access openings shall be provided for cleaning, covers shall be grease-tight. Installation shall comply

with NFPA No. 96.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 4

2.7 DISHWASHER EXHAUST

A. 16 gauge Type 304 stainless steel fabricated watertight, exposed joints and seams to be welded, all the

way to fan. .

2.8 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating

pressures indicated.

B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1½ times width of duct on centerline. Use

long sweep round elbows for laboratory exhaust ductwork whether shown or not. Where not possible

to install long sweep elbows and where rectangular elbows are used, provide double thickness airfoil

turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with

glass fiber insulation.

C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15º divergence wherever possible; maximum 30º

divergence upstream of equipment and 45º convergence downstream.

D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings one gauge heavier than duct gages indicated

in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4" (100 mm) cemented slip joint, brazed or electric

welded. Prime coat welded joints.

E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs, unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee

connections may be used.

F. Complete metal ducts within themselves with no single partition between ducts. Where width of duct

exceeds 18", cross break for rigidity. Open corners are not acceptable.

G. Lap metal ducts in direction of airflow. Hammer down edges and slips to leave smooth duct interior.

H. Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced and stiffened

so as not to breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag. All horizontal and vertical duct joints shall be sealed.

I. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure where easements

exceed 10% duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.

J. Use a machine to fabricate transit ducts and fittings. Make only minor on site adjustments. Wipe clean

all surface being joined.

K. Wherever plans show rectangular ductwork, the Contractor has option to install equivalent round or flat

oval ductwork of equivalent sizes (as determined by SMACNA Methods) so that the strength is not

sacrificed and static pressure drops are not exceeded.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 5

2. 9 GAUGES: Ductwork shall be fabricated on following gauges, unless noted otherwise:

A. Low Pressure Duct Gauges:

1. Rectangular Ducts

Maximum Width In Inches Minimum USS Gauge

Up to 12 26

13 to 30 24

31 to 54 22

55 to 84 20

85 and over 18

2. Round Ducts

Duct Diameter In Inches Minimum USS Gauge

Up to 13 26

14 to 22 24

23 to 36 22

37 to 50 20

51 to 60 18

61 to 84 16

B. Medium Pressure Duct Gauges:

1. Rectangular Ductwork

Maximum Width In Inches Minimum USS Gauge

Up to 18 24

19 to 48 22

49 to 72 20

73 to 96 18

97 and over 16

2. Round and Oval Ductwork: Same gauges as for high-pressure ductwork.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, SMACNA standards, chapter 32 on 1989

Fundamentals & ANSI 29.2 standards, such that installation shall be airtight and without objectionable

noise. Install each run with minimum number of joints.

B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible. Seal all horizontal and vertical joints.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 6

C. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain clear sizes to allow for inside lining.

D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide

pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device

or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install

insulation material inside a metal ring.

E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance

activities.

F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8" and smaller with crimp in

direction of air flow.

G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

H. Contractor has option to connect terminal units to supply ducts with one foot maximum length of

flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.

I. Contractor has option to connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with 4 feet maximum length of flexible

duct held in place with stainless steel clamps. The flexible duct shall be properly supported to avoid

sharp bends, sagging or crimps.

J. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws and stainless steel clamps.

K. Set plenum doors 6" to 12" above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in

closed position.

L. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to

prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

M. At each point where ducts pass through partitions/walls, provide sleeves and seal around ducts with

non combustible material.

N. Install double thickness turning vanes in square or rectangular elbows whether shown on plans or not.

O. Where flat oval duct is used, use one gauge heavier. All reinforcing shall be on the duct exterior or

stiffening without obstructing flow, except that flat oval ducts with major axis greater than 50" in

length may have center spread bar if manufactured in airfoil pattern.

P. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type, which will hold ducts true

to shape and to prevent buckling under the pressure conditions. Support vertical ducts at every floor

and additionally as required.

Q. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel or

zinc plated fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. "C" clamps

without a beam retaining strap shall not be used to attach hanging devices.

1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork wherever shown/specified, provide matching stainless steel

support materials.


DUCTWORK 233113 - 7

2. For aluminum ductwork, wherever shown or specified, provide aluminum support materials,

except where materials are electrically separate from ductwork.

R. Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures,

unless ductwork serves these areas.

S. Insulating ends of all flexible ductwork shall be sealed with duct tape.

T. Do not use flexible ducts for 90o elbows.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide

pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal cap with spring device

or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install

insulation material inside a metal ring.

B. Clean new duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To

obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that may be harmed by

excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning.

C. All ducts passing through roof shall have minimum 16” high insulated duct curbs on roof.

3.3 DUCTS SUPPORTS

A. Ducts shall not be supported from metal deck. All ducts shall be supported from steel.



DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 – DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Air Turning Devices/Extractors

2. Backdraft Dampers

3. Duct Access Doors

4. Duct Test Holes

5. Fire and Smoke Dampers

6. Flexible Duct Connections

7. Volume Control Dampers

8. Access Doors in Ceiling/Walls

9 . Kitchen Hoods

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers duct access

doors and duct test holes, fire dampers, backdraft dampers and flexible duct accessories, smoke

dampers.

C. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including fire dampers, volume control dampers,

duct access doors, duct test holes and other hardware used. Include electrical characteristics, if any, and

connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate for fire dampers.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS


minimum of five years experience.




A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Titus

2. Anemostat

3. Kruger

B. Multi-blade device with double thickness airfoil blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction;

with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps, fabricated in compliance to SMACNA Standards.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ruskin

2. Louvers & Dampers

3. American Warming

4. Anemostat

5. Greenheck

B. The backdraft damper shall be multiblade, parallel action gravity balanced dampers with 14 gauge

galvanized hot channel with welded corners. The blades shall be 18 gauge galvanized on 6" centers

with extruded vinyl seals on blade edges. Axles shall be ½" diameter. Linkage shall be 16 gauge

plated steel commercial grade with stainless steel pivots machine riveted to blade. The linkage rod

shall be 1/4" diameter plated steel. Counter weights shall be adjustable and mounted to back of blades.

2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ruskin

2. United Sheet Metal

3. Louvers and Dampers

4. Cesco

5. Semco

6. Ward

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and

as indicated.



C. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For

insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch (25 mm) thick insulation with sheet metal cover. The

material of access doors shall be same as the material of ducts.

1. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Secure with sash locks.

2. Up to 18 Inches (450 mm) Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks.

3. Up to 24 x 48 Inches (600 x 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression latches with outside

and inside handles.

4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.

D. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

E. Access doors must be fitted for air tight closure and shall be easily opened/closed.

F. Access doors for high pressure supply ductwork shall be pressure relief type and shall be rated to +12"

W.G.

G. Provide access doors for proper inspection and cleaning and maintenance of all duct mounted devices

requiring maintenance, before and after backdraft dampers, filters, smoke detectors, smoke dampers,

volume dampers, motorized dampers, fire dampers and elsewhere as indicated.

H. Access doors shall be factory insulated for insulated ductwork. Access doors shall have flush frames

for uninsulated or lined ductwork and shall have extended frames for externally insulated ductwork

equal to insulation thickness.

2.4 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs,

threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended

neck fittings to clear insulation.

2.5 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance

2. Ruskin

3. Louvers and Dampers

4. Greenheck

B. Fire dampers shall comply with NFPA 90A and UL 555. Fire dampers shall be complete with

perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant spring, bearings,

bushings and hinges. The fire dampers shall be 2-hour rated.

C. Dampers shall include a 20 gauge galvanized steel frame.

D. Dampers shall include 24 gauge galvanized steel blade curtains.



E. Dampers shall include a 165 degrees fusible link.

F. All dampers shall be suitable for vertical or horizontal mounting.

G. This Specification is based on Ruskin Model 1BD2 Style B damper with blades located out of air

stream, for rectangular ducts and Ruskin Style CR for round ducts and Model CO for flat oval ducts.

H. The frame style shall be “C” for medium and high velocity and style “B” for low velocity.

I. Smoke damper shall be Ruskin Model SD-36 with frame, electric actuator, triple V-groove blade for

round and rectangular duct, as shown on drawings. Damper shall be UL 5555 Leakage Class 2.

Actuator shall be suitable for 120V/1phase power.

2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Duro Dyne Inc

2. Ventfabrics

3. American Elgen


as indicated.

C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. Attach to ducting and equipment by screws or

bolts at 6" intervals.

1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,

minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.

2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide.

3. Metal: 3 inch wide, 24-gauge galvanized steel.

2.7 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ruskin

2. United Sheet Metal

3. Fabco

4. Greenheck


as indicated.

C. Splitter Dampers:

1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches (600 mm) size in either direction, and two gages

heavier for sizes over 24 inches (600 mm).

2. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous



hinge or rod.

3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter rod in self-aligning, universal joint action,

flanged bushing with set screw.

D. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch (200

x 1825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame

with suitable hardware.

E. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12" and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade

dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.

F. Quadrants:

1. Provide self-locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers with

marked open/close positions.

2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or

adapters.

3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches (750 mm) provide regulator at both ends.

G. Construct dampers to provide positive shut-off.

2.8 ACCESS DOORS IN CEILINGS AND WALLS

A. The access doors in ceiling and walls required for access to mechanical devices shall be furnished

under Division 15 and installed by General Trades Contractor. All other access doors required, but

beyond the scope of General Trades Contractor shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.

B. HVAC Contractor shall coordinate with General Trades Contractor for locations and sizes of access

doors.

C. Access doors manufacturers shall be Nailor Industries Inc., Ruskin Manufacturing Co., Semco Inc. and

Cesco.

2.9 KITCHEN HOODS

A. Exhaust hoods shall be 18 gauge Type 304, stainless steel, Captive Airs Model BD & NDI or as

approved of size and type, as noted on Drawings. Each hood shall be complete with vapor-proof light

fixtures, grease filter, stainless steel mesh type and ANSUL R-102 wet chemical suppression system.

System shall include remote manual pull station, fusible link, releasing and detecting device tank,

piping, discharge nozzles and electric and gas equipment shut-down and as required for complete

system. Ventilation hood and suppression system shall meet oil requirements of State Building Codes,

NFPA 95, OBBC Section 507, 508 and 509, USDA and shall bear the Underwriter’s Label.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA

HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15890 for duct

construction, material and pressure class.



B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside discharge and where

indicated elsewhere.

C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic

dampers, at fire dampers and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8" x 8" size for hand access,

18" x 18" size for shoulder access, and as indicated.

D. Provide duct test holes where required for testing/ balancing purposes, temperature and pressure

measurement/ monitoring purposes.

E. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated rated components. Install with required perimeter

mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings

and hinges. Fire dampers shall be tested by the Contractor as required by governing authorities.

F. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.

G. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and

motorized equipment causing vibrations.

H. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken

from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.

I. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

J. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether

dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.

K. Where duct liners are specified to be used, size dampers to make allowances for duct liner.

L. Furnish and install manual balancing dampers, splitter dampers, and deflectors as shown on the

drawings and as required to properly distribute the air. All dampers and devices shall be of same

material as the surrounding ductwork, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. All manual balancing

dampers in ducts with area greater than one square foot shall be the multiple opposed blade type.

Balancing dampers in ducts one square foot and smaller may be of a single blade, minimum 18 gauge

galvanized steel or, duct gauge, whichever is heavier.

M. Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork indicating purpose of access

(to what equipment). Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar

concealment, plasticize tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at Installer's

option.



H.V.A.C. FANS 233400 - 1

SECTION 233400 – H.V.A.C. FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof Exhaust Fans

2. Ceiling Exhaust Fans

3. Motors and Drives

4. Fan Accessories.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes

C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.

D. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

14 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of fans and accessories including fan curves with specified

operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and

electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point

clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical

characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer shall provide alignment and documentation Installation Instructions.


H.V.A.C. FANS 233400 - 2


A. Replace pulleys/belts/drives to replace at no additional costs to achieve design airflow under actual

field conditions.

B. All exhaust fans serving locker rooms, preparation rooms, biology rooms, kiln room exhaust fans shall

have epoxy coating or heresite coating.

C. All exhaust systems shall have back draft dampers. Installed in downstream of exhaust (except for

kitchen exhaust) whether shown on drawings or not.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.

C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

D. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.

E. An electrical disconnect switch shall be supplied by the manufacturer for each fan.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS – as noted below or approved equal.

A. Greenheck

B. Cook

C. Jenco. Fan

D. Penn Ventilator Co

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF MOUNTED FANS

A. Exhaust fans shall be sizes and capacities as shown on plans. All fans shall bear AMCA certified seal

for sound and air performance.

B. Provide V-belt drives with fan and motor mounted to main housing through neoprene or rubber anti-

vibration pads. The fan motor is to be supported on rubber isolators and shall be open drip proof.

Motors shall be heavy-duty ball bearing type, and shall be readily accessibly for maintaining.

Manufacturer shall provide disconnect switch.

C. Fan wheel shall be centrifugal, backward inclined, constructed of aluminum. Wheels shall be statically

and dynamically balanced. Provide prewired disconnect switch and backdraft damper for each fan.

D. Fan housing shall be of heavy gauge aluminum. Reinforce aluminum dome-type housings. All fans

shall bear AMCA seal for sound and air ratings.


H.V.A.C. FANS 233400 - 3

E. The precision ground and polished shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow

block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum of (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours

at maximum catalog operating speed. Bearings shall have external lubrication fittings. Drives shall be

sized for minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of fully machined cast iron type,

keyed and securely attached to wheel and motor shafts. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final

system balancing.

F. Provide fans complete with minimum 14” high above finished roof, galvanized steel insulated roof

curb, rattle free backdraft dampers and pre-wired disconnect switch. The curbs shall be leveled to suit

the slope of roof. The curbs shall be supported from joints or structural framing as approved by the

Structural Engineer.

G. Fan housing shall have anti-condensation coating.

2.4 CENTRIGULAL CEILING EXHAUST FANS

A. Exhaust fan shall be of sizes and capacities as shown on drawings. Fans shall bear AMCA certified

seal for sound and air ratings.

B. Ceiling mounted exhaust fan shall be of the centrifugal direct drive type. The fan housing shall be

constructed of galvanized steel. The steel duct collar shall be four (4) inch or six (6) inch in diameter

and shall include a backdraft damper. The designer grille shall be constructed of non-yellowing high

impact polystyrene and attached to the housing with hidden attachment screws. The access for wiring

shall be external. The motor disconnect shall be internal and of the plug-in type.

The motor shall be mounted on vibration isolators. The fan wheel shall be of the forward curved

centrifugal type, constructed of calcium carbonate filled polypropylene and dynamically balanced.


3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install fans as specified, with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads.

C. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of

connectors are parallel with minimum one-inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

D. The pulleys/drives shall be changed at no additional costs, if so required, to achieve designed airflow

under actual field conditions.

E. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.

F. Provide and install: Factory prefabricated 16" high above finished roof insulated roof curbs. Curbs

shall be supplied by fan manufacturer and shall be compatible to the roof construction/ materials.

Relief hoods shall be provided with back-draft dampers.

G. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of all exhaust fans, whether shown on plans or not.



AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 1

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single Duct VAV Terminal Units with Electric Reheat

2. Sound Attenuator

3. Direct Digital Controller

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings and product data sheets indicating configuration, general assembly, and

materials used in fabrication.

B. Submit product performance data indicating design airflow, minimum static pressure drop, and

fan operating condition.

C. Submit installation, operation and maintenance documentation.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: The company manufacturing the products specified in this section shall have a minimum of ten years experience producing products of this type.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's parts warranty for one year from unit start-up.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS – Manufacturers as noted or approved equal

A. General

1. Single duct VAV terminal units shall be UL listed as an assembly.

2. An electric prewired motor rated toggle switch shall be supplied by the manufacturer for

each unit.

B. Specified Manufacturers

1. Trane Co. 2. Titus



3. Enviro-Tech

4. E. H. Price

2.2 SINGLE DUCT VAV TERMINAL UNITS

A. General: The terminal boxes shall be insulated, pressure independent, variable air volume with electric reheat, minimum setpoints, direct digital controllers and electric actuators. Direct

Digital Controllers, electric damper actuators, and enclosures shall be provided to the box

manufacturer by Automatic Temperature Control Contractor (ATCC) for factory installation.

The box manufacturer shall install this equipment at his cost. Installation shall consist of mounting and powering controller, mounting damper actuator and termination to controller, and

terminate to all control points within the unit. Manufacturer shall provide 40 Va 24 volt

transformer to power controller and auxiliary equipment. Manufacturer shall provide a multipoint averaging flow sensing ring with balancing taps for measuring + 5% of unit air flow

and polyethylene leads and terminate to controller.

ATCC shall provide and install communication trunk, wall-mounted temperature sensor, control system programming and start up.

B. Furnish and install boxes where shown on drawings. Boxes shall be complete with insulated casing, round/oval inlet rectangular outlet, volume control damper, sound attenuator, electric

heating coil (schedule on drawing), a complete electronic pressure independent control system

prewire disconnect switch, and insulated unit casing.

C. The casing shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge zinc-coated steel, mechanically

assembled and sealed to form an air tight casing. Maximum air leakage shall not exceed 2% at

6" WG. Interior casing shall be lined with 1" dual-density, fiberglass with 2-pound/cubic inch density glass fiber with foil facing. Insulation must meet all requirements of UL 181, NFBU

and NFPA 90A. There shall be no exposed edges of insulation.

D. Control damper shall be minimum 16 gauge of extruded aluminum, designed to operate through

a 45 to 60� arc and shall be bolted or welded to a continuous shaft which rotates in self-

lubricated nylon bearings. Multiple blade or 90 arc dampers are not acceptable. Blade shall close against a closed cell gasket seat.

E. Boxes shall be pressure independent with dual minimum setpoints. The controller shall

maintain setpoint CFM with 5% regardless of system pressure change. CFM limiting devices are not acceptable. The controller shall constantly monitor thermostat input, airflow (CFM),

and system static pressure and total pressure in a manner as to minimize under or over

controlling in relation to the space temperature requirements. The reset controller shall be capable of field adjustment of minimum and maximum CFM settings for heating and cooling

without the use of tools. Flow curve for field balancing shall be affixed to terminal casing.

Controller shall maintain pressure independence to as low as .03” WG. Averaging sensor shall

be mounted in the inlet of the terminal.

F. The electric reheat coil shall be factory installed, heater element shall be nickel chromium, U.L.

approved open type and shall be complete with air flow switch, thermal cutout, magnetic contactors, manual reset, electric heat transformer and disconnect switch. fins per inch. Coils

shall be proof tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 300 psig air pressure under water.




3.1 INSTALLATION




AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233713 - 1

SECTION – 233713 – AIR OUTLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Division 1 Specification apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceiling Grilles/Registers

2. Wall Grilles/Registers

3. Linear Diffusers

4. Wall Louvers

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with General Conditions and Section 230500.

B. Product Data: Provide shop drawings for grilles registers, diffusers, linear diffusers, verify with

reflected ceiling plans type of equipment furnished will fit in grids.


A. Base air outlets application on low space noise levels of NC as scheduled on plans.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS


minimum five years experience.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS – as noted below or approved equal.

A. Titus

B. E.H. Price

C. Anemostat

2.2 APPLICATION

A. Provide supply outlets with sponge rubber seal around edge.

B. Provide baffles to direct air away from walls, columns, or other obstructions within radius or diffuser

operation.



C. Provide plaster frame for diffusers and grilles located in plaster surfaces.

D. Provide anti-smudge frames or plaques on diffusers located in rough textured surfaces such as

acoustical plaster.

E. The material of grilles shall be same as material of ductwork.

2.3 DIRECTIONAL FLOW DIFFUSERS (TYPE A)

A. Contractor shall furnish and install air diffusers as manufactured by Titus Model TMS at each point

indicated on the plans.

B. Air diffusers are to consist of one expanding flared member with an inner plaque assembly. Flaring

member shall consist of a cone and transition from round to square outlet face. The air discharge

pattern shall be radial around the full perimeter of the air diffuser.

C. The diffuser shall be steel, painted white. The Architect shall select color from standard color charts.

D. Provide butterfly opposed blades dampers for adjustments of diffusers from diffuser face 24 x 24

panel.

2.4 DIRECTIONAL FLOW DIFFUSERS (TYPE B)

A. Contractor shall furnish and install air diffusers as manufactured by Titus Model TDCA at each point

indicated on the plans.

B. Air diffusers are to consist of one expanding flared member with an inner plaque assembly. Flaring

member shall consist of a cone and transition from round to square outlet face. The air discharge

pattern shall be radial around the full perimeter of the air diffuser.

C. An inner core assembly shall include adjustable vanes to provide full vertical as well as horizontal

projection for one, two, three or four-way patterns

D. The diffuser shall be steel, painted white. The Architect shall select color from standard color charts.

E. Provide butterfly opposed blades dampers for adjustments of diffusers from diffuser face 24 x 24

panel.

2.5 SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS A. Install wherever shown on plans.

B. Wherever registers are shown, the grilles shall be furnished with installed opposed blade dampers.

C. Provide aluminum grilles (registers) when installed on aluminum ductwork and provide steel grilles

when installed on galvanized steel ducts.

D. All models shall feature two sets of individually adjustable louvers of extruded aluminum, set in a 1¼"

20-gauge steel frame (or 1¼" radius aluminum frame .055 thickness for aluminum grilles).



E. The opposed blade damper shall be constructed of 20 gauge steel frame with roll formed galvanized

steel blades (opposed blade dampers shall be of all aluminum construction for aluminum registers)

F. Provide 1¼" margin frame with countersunk screw holes for 8 x 1¼" (oval head screws). Provide

border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems.

G. The finish shall be factory baked enamel finish. Architect shall select color from standard color charts.

H. The model shall be Titus 300 RS or RL steel register, or approved equal.

I. Provide front operated volume dampers where registers are to be installed.

2.6 DUCTED RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES (REGISTERS) AND WALL RETURN AIR

GRILLES

A. Wherever registers are shown, the grilles shall be furnished with installed opposed blade dampers.

B. Provide aluminum grilles (registers) when installed on aluminum ductwork and provide steel grilles

(registers) when installed on galvanized steel ducts.

C. For steel grille the frame shall be instructed of 20-gauge steel with 22 gauge fins. For aluminum

grilles the frame shall be constructed of extruded aluminum .055-inch thickness with 0.05-inch thick

extruded aluminum fins.

D. For steel registers, the grilles shall have opposed blade damper of 20 gauge steel frame with galvanized

steel blades. Furnish all aluminum dampers for aluminum registers.

E. Furnish 1¼" margin frame with counter such holes for 8 x 1¼" oval head screws. Provide border

styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems.

F. The finish shall be factory baked enamel finish. The Architect shall select the color from standard

color charts.

G. The model shall be Titus 350 RL or RS steel grille or register, as noted.

H. The exhaust air, return air grilles, registers in gymnasium shall be heavy-duty type, Anemostat

“EHDF”.

I. Provide front operated volume dampers where registers are to be installed.

2.7 WALL LOUVERS

A. All outside intake and exhaust louvers shall be furnished and installed under General Trades Contract.

B. The HVAC Contractor shall furnish and install sheet metal ductwork or plenums for louvers as shown

on plans.




3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to

architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers whether dampers are

specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly or not



VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW & PACKAGED ROOFTOP

HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

237413 - 1

SECTION 237413 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW & PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING &

AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART I – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop Units (Constant Air Volume D/X Cooling and gas heating) 2. Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pump Air Conditioning System

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 230500 - Common Work Results for H.V.A.C.

C. Section 230700 - H.V.A.C. Insulation

D. Section 230900 - Instrumentation and Control for H.V.A.C.

E. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operation for H.V.A.C. Controls

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The cooling capacities shall be in accordance with and tested to ARI Standard 210/240-89 OR

360-85.

B. NFPA 90A “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems”.

C. Unit shall be safety certified in accordance with UL standard UL 465 and/or ANSI Standard 221.47


A. Rooftop Unit and Constant Air Volume Units: Certify air volume, static pressure, fan speed,

brake horsepower and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 340. If air handling units

are not certified in accordance with ARI 340, Contractor shall be responsible for expenses associated with testing of units after installation to verify performance of unit(s). Any costs

incurred to adjust fans to meet scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the

Contractor.




237413 - 2

B. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with ARI

410-87.

C. Unit Shall Be 100% Run Tested by the Manufacturer with a copy of the run test report shipped

with the unit.

D. If the weight of rooftop units is more than shown in HVAC schedule, the HVAC Contractor

shall be responsible for the additional cost related to this change.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit unit performance including: capacity, nominal and operating performance.

B. Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction, components and options.

C. Submit Shop Drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and service clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations. Indicate unit shipping, installation

and operating weights including dimensions.

D. Submit data on electrical requirements and connection point. Include recommended wire and

fuse sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLNG

A. The Unit shall have lifting lugs or shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement

of unit.

B. Deliver units to site with fans fan motors, adjustable sheaves, belts, filters, coils, pre charged

with R-410A refrigerant controls completely assembled and mounted in units.

C. Store and protect products under provisions of Division I.

D. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish, all in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.8 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide one additional set of each type of filter for unit for future use by the Owners

maintenance personnel. Total two (2) complete sets of filters.

B. Filters used during construction shall be removed and replaced with new filters before handing

over the equipment to the Owner.

C. Provide additional pulleys/drives, at no additional cost to the Owner, to replace original

pulleys/drives if air balance and pressure drops under actual conditions cannot be achieved with

the original pulleys/drives. After adjusting and balancing is complete, replace adjustable sheaves in the unit with fixed sheaves of the appropriate size.




237413 - 3

1.9 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall provide the parts and labor warranty for the equipment. The said warranty shall cover replacement of all defective parts for a period of 12 months from the

equipment start up. The compressors shall have additional 4-year warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFTOP UNIT H.V.A.C. UNIT

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Unit design is based on Trane Co. 2. Other approved manufacturers:

a. Aaon, Inc. b. Carrier Corp.

c. York

d. McQuay

B. General

1. Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications. HVAC Contractors is responsible for expenses that occur due to exceptions made.

2. The smoke detectors in the return air stream of the system shall be furnished and installed

under Division 26. The Division 26 Contractor shall wire the smoke detectors to the fire alarm panel and Automatic Temperature Control Contractor shall wire the detectors to

fan starting circuits for unit shut down under smoke detection mode.

3. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof installation and consisting

of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters and dampers.

C. Construction:

1. Units shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and shipped in one section.

2. Units shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application with a full weatherproof cabinet.

3. Cabinets shall be constructed entirely of G90 galvanized steel with the exterior

constructed of 20 gauge or heavier material.

4. Paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2,000 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere accordance with ASTM

B 117-95 Test Procedures, Filters and Dampers.

5. The units roof shall be sloped or cross-broken to assure drainage. 6. Unit specific color coded wiring diagrams shall match the unit color coded wiring and

will be provided in both point-to-point and ladder form.

7. Diagrams shall also be laminated in plastic and permanently affixed inside the control compartment.




237413 - 4

8. Access to filters, blower, heating section and other items needing periodic checking or

maintenance shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn latches. Door

fastening screws are not acceptable. 9. Access doors shall have stainless steel hinges and full perimeter gasketing.

10. Openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2inch

height around the opening through the base pan. 11. No opening other than the pan drain will be permitted through the base pan on the leaving

side of the cooling coil.

12. Air side service access doors shall have rain break overhangs. 13. All access doors shall have an internal metal liner to protect the door 1/2 inch thick, 1-1/2

lb. Density fiberglass insulation.

14. The interior air side of the cabinet shall be entirely insulated on all exterior panels with 1

inch thick, 1-1/2 lb. density fiberglass insulation. 15. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting and rigging, service areas and

caution areas.

16. Unit exterior color shall be as selected by the Architect.

D. Supply Fans:

1. Blower shall be entirely self-contained on a slide deck for service and removal from the

cabinet.

2. All belt drive blower(s) shall have backward inclined airfoil blades.

3. All direct drive blower(s) shall have forward curved blades 4. Adjustable V-belt drive shall be provided with a minimum rating of 140% of the motor

nameplate brake horsepower, when the adjustable pulley is at the minimum RPM.

5. Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced.

E. Outside Air:

1. Shall be a fully modulating economizer for control by others with a DDC signal. The outside air damper and return air damper assembly shall be constructed of extruded

aluminum, hollow core, air foil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals.

Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 2.5 CFM of leakage per square foot of damper area, when subjected to 2 inch w.g. air pressure

differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to ensure closing of

outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut-down or power failure.

F. Condenser Section:

1. Air Cooled Condenser Section:

a. The condensing section shall be equipped with vertical discharge axial flow direct

drive fans. Direct drive fans shall be directly connected to and supported by the motor shaft.

b. The condenser coils shall be sloped at least 30 degrees to protect the coils from

damage. c. Condenser coils shall be copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to

the tubes.




237413 - 5

d. Condenser coils to be sized for a minimum of 10oF of refrigerant sub-cooling.

G. Filters: Four (4) inch thick, fiberglass, throwaway with a MERV 11 rating efficiency of 85% sized 3.0-10 microns. Direct dial reading magnehelic gauge mounted in the control

compartment.

H. Evaporator Coils:

1. Evaporator coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. Evaporator coils shall have galvanized steel end casings, equalizing type vertical

tube headers, furnished with a thermostatic expansion valve and be furnished with a

double sloped drain pan for the positive drainage of condensate.

I. Refrigeration System:

1. Compressors shall be scroll type with internal thermal overload protection and mounted on the compressor manufacturer’s recommended rubber vibration isolators. Each

compressor shall have independent refrigerant circuits.

2. All units over seven (7) tons shall be multiple stage and shall have a minimum of two (2) stages of capacity control.

3. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated compartment to permit operation of the unit

with out affecting air flow when the door to the compartment is open.

4. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan and supply air to avoid any transmission of noise from the compressor into the building area.

5. System shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control

6. System shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant controls.

7. Units shall be equipped with Schrader type service fittings on both the high side and low

pressure sides of the system;

8. Unit shall be equipped with refrigerant liquid line driers. 9. Units shall be a full factory charged with refrigerant.

Options:

a. Each compressor shall be individually staged for capacity control. b. All circuits shall be equipped with liquid line sight glasses.

c. Unit shall be equipped with a five (5) minute anti-short cycle delay timer for each

stage. d. Unit shall be equipped with a 20-second between stage delay times for each stage.

e. Each compressor shall be equipped with suction and discharge service valves

f. Unit shall operate on R-410A refrigerant.

J. Gas Heat Section

1. Unit shall heat using natural gas fuel and with a minimum number of stages of heat capacity, as indicated on drawings.

2. Unit shall be provided with a gas heating furnace consisting of an aluminized steel heat

exchanger with multiple concavities, an induced draft blower and an electric pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion




237413 - 6

air flow is established. Drum type heat exchangers or heat exchanger tubes with separate

internal turbulators are not acceptable.

3. Unit shall be provided with a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic igniter to a pilot system, which will be continuous when the heater is operating, but will shut off the

pilot when heating is not required.

4. Unit shall have gas supply piping entrances in the unit base for through the curb gas piping and in the outside cabinet wall for across the roof gas piping.

5. The gas heat exchanger shall carry a 15- year non-pro-rated warranty.

K. Roof Curbs:

1. Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel Curbs shall be fully gasketed between

curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit.

2. Unit shall be mounted on a factory furnished acoustical style solid bottom roof curb, fully

lined with one (1) inch of neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation and with a wood nailer strip. The curb shall be adjustable up to ¾” per foot to allow for a sloped roof. The curb

shall be minimum 14” high. The entire openings under units shall be filled with 16” high

fiberglass insulation to damper unit’s noise to space under units. 3. Provide sloped curbs to accommodate roof pitch at each location, field verify conditions.

L. Electrical:

A terminal block shall be provided from main power connection and terminal boards shall be

provided for low voltage wiring, knockouts shall be provided in the bottom of main control

panel for field wiring entrance. A separate key locked control panel shall house all controls for condensing section.

M. Warranty: Parts of the units shall be warranted for parts and labor for one (1) year from date of

acceptance by Owner. Unit manufacturer’s representative shall provide a complete service contract covering labor and refrigeration during first year. The compressors shall be warranted

for parts and labor for additional four (4) years.

N. The units shall be factory-run testing as a component, prior to leaving the factory. The units

shall be started and tested by the authorized representative of the factory.

2.2 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

A. System Description

1. The variable capacity, heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system shall be a

Mitsubishi Electric City Multi VRFZ (Variable Refrigerant Flow Zoning), The Hyper Heat Y-Series (cool/heat) split heat pump system

2. The Hyper Heat Y-Series system shall consist of a PUHY outdoor units, multiple indoor units (E models), and M-NET DDC Controls.




237413 - 7

B. Y-SERIES HYPER-HEATING OUTDOOR UNIT

1. The Y-Series PUHY outdoor unit shall be specifically used with CITY MULTI VRFZ

components. The PUHY outdoor units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards

that interface to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. Each outdoor unit module shall be completely factory assembled, piped,

wired, and run tested at the factory.

2. The model nomenclature and unit requirements are shown below. All units requiring a factory supplied twinning kit shall be piped together in the field, without the need for

equalizing line(s).

3. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 130%

of outdoor rated capacity.

4. Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 60 dB(A) down to -6°F. At -5°F or

less, the outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 65 dB(A).

5. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to indoor units shall be individually

insulated.

6. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls.

7. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over-current protection and

DC bus protection.

8. The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of

164 feet and have a total refrigerant tubing length of 984 feet. The greatest length is not

to exceed 492 feet between the outdoor unit and the indoor units without the need for

line size changes or traps.

9. The outdoor unit shall have rated performance for heat operation at -13°F ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. The unit shall maintain 100% heat

output at 0oF without a supplemental heat source or a second compressor to boost low

ambient heating performance. he outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional

logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained.

10. The outdoor unit shall contain a heat interchanger circuit for sub-cooling liquid prior to

entering the outdoor coil during the heating mode. The interchanger shall be of a copper

tube within a tube construction. The interchanger circuit refrigerant flow shall be controlled by an electronic expansion valve.

11. Unit shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with a powder

coated baked enamel.




237413 - 8

:12. Refrigerant shall be R410A. Coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing, refrigerant flow from the outdoor

unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor. Compressor shall be

inverter driven scroll hermetic and shall have flash injection for effective low outdoor temperature heating performance. Crankcase heater shall be factory mounted on the

compressor. Each compressor shall be capable of modulation down to 16% of rated

capacity.

13. The electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz, integral microprocessor, control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 24 VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair non-polar shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

C. Indoor Unit – Wall Mounted

1. Wall-mounted indoor unit (PKFY) shall have a modulating linear expansion device and a

flat front and individual control using M-NET DDC controllers.

The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the

unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device,

control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit

and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the

factory.

2. Indoor unit shall be complete with all casings, multi-directional drain and refrigerant

piping, direct driven fans, manual adjustable guide vanes, washable filters, non-ferrous

coils, condensate pan and drain and unit mounted condensate pump.

3. Electrical power shall be 208/230 volt, single phase.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as

indicated on shop drawings.

B. Contractor shall verify that proper power supply is available.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Mount units on factory-built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level.




237413 - 9

3.3 START-UP AND TESTING

A. Final checks before “Start-up”:

1. Verify unit is secure on mounting and supporting devices and connections for piping,

ductwork and electrical are complete. 2. Disconnect fan drive from motor and verify proper motor rotation direction and fan wheel

free rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts and

belt guards. 3. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts and other moving parts with factory recommended

lubricants.

4. Install clean filters.

B. Staring Procedure for:

1. Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and wheel. Adjust fan to indicate RPM.

a. Replace fan pulleys/sheaves as required, to meet actual field conditions at no

additional cost.

C. Shut down unit and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.

D. Refer to Section 230593 “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing” for procedures for air handling system testing and balancing and for control sequence.

3.4 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. The Contractor shall furnish Manufacturer complete submittal wiring diagrams of the package

unit as applicable for field maintenance and service.



SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 238126 - 1

SECTION 238126 – SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART I – GENERAL



and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Modular Air Handling Units

2. Air Cooled Condensing Units 3. Gas-fired Furnaces

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 230500 - Common Work Results for H.V.A.C.

C. Section 230700 - H.V.A.C. Insulation

D. Section 230900 - Instrumentation and Control for H.V.A.C.

E. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operation for H.V.A.C. Controls

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The cooling capacities shall be in accordance with and tested to ARI Standard 210/240-89 or360-85

B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

C. ANSI/ASHRAE 37 – Testing Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.

D. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Method for Sound Testing of Fans.

E. ARI 260P - Method for Rating Air Handling Units for Sound.

F. AMCA 301 – Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.

G. Unit shall be safety certified in accordance with UL standard UL 465 and/or ANSI Standard 221.47


A. Variable Air Volume or Constant Volume Modular Air Handling Units: Certify air volume, static

pressure, fan speed, brake horsepower and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 340. If air handling units are not certified in accordance with ARI 340, Contractor shall be responsible for

expenses associated with testing of units after installation to verify performance of unit(s). Any



costs incurred to adjust fans to meet scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the

Contractor.

B. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with ARI

410-87.

C. Unit Shall Be 100% Run Tested by the Manufacturer with a copy of the run test report shipped with

the unit.

D. Unit shall be shipped disassembled and to be assembled in the field.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit unit performance including: capacity, nominal and operating performance.

B. Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction, components and options.

C. Submit Shop Drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and service clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations. Indicate unit shipping, installation and

operating weights including dimensions.

D. Submit data on electrical requirements and connection point. Include recommended wire and fuse

sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLNG

A. The Unit shall have lifting lugs or shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement of

unit.

B. Deliver units to site with fans fan motors, adjustable sheaves, belts, filters, coils, pre charged with R-

407C refrigerant controls completely assembled and mounted in units.

C. Store and protect products under provisions of Division I.

D. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in

place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

1.9 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide one additional set of each type of filter for unit for future use by the Owners maintenance personnel. Total two (2) complete sets of filters.

B. Filters used during construction shall be removed and replaced with new filters before handing over the equipment to the Owner.



C. Provide additional pulleys/drives, at no additional cost to the Owner, to replace original

pulleys/drives if air balance and pressure drops under actual conditions cannot be achieved with the original pulleys/drives. After adjusting and balancing is complete, replace adjustable sheaves in the

unit with fixed sheaves of the appropriate size.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall provide the parts and labor warranty for the equipment. The said warranty

shall cover replacement of all defective parts for a period of 12 months from the equipment start up. The compressors shall have additional 4-year warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MODULAR AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Acceptable Manufacturers as noted or approved equal.

1. Unit design is based on Trane Company.

2. Other approved manufacturers:

a. McQuay

b. Carrier c. York

B. General

1. Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications. HVAC

Contractors is responsible for expenses that occur due to exceptions made.

2. The smoke detectors in the return air stream of the system shall be furnished and installed under Division 26. The Division 26 Contractor shall wire the smoke detectors to the fire alarm panel

and Automatic Temperature Control Contractor (ATCC) shall wire the detectors to fan starting

circuits for unit shut down under smoke detection mode.

3. Modular air handling unit section shall include fan section, DX-cooling coil and hot water heating coil section, filter mixing box sections with motorized outside air and return air damper,

filters, drain pan and frequency drive. All sections to be assembled in the field. Unit shall be

horizontal or vertical, as noted in the Equipment Schedule on drawings.

C. Casing Construction and Insulation

1. The casing shall be able to withstand up to six (6) inches positive or four (4) inches negative

static pressure. Exterior wall panels shall be made of G90 galvanized steel. Closed-cell foam

gasketing shall be provided where modules are joined.

2. All casings shall be double wall with insulation sandwiched between panels. All connecting channels shall be insulated. Insulation and insulation adhesive shall comply with NFPA-90A

requirements for flame and smoke generation. Insulation adhesive shall be UL listed.

3. All casings shall be insulated with two (2) inch, 1 -1/2 pound/foot3 density insulation.

4. All fan sections shall be provided with a perforated inner wall to enhance acoustical

performances. The perforations shall be of size and spacing to prevent deterioration of the

insulation when tested at 9,000 FPM per UL Specification 181. 5. All other sections shall have sold inner walls to facilitate cleaning.



6. Access doors shall be double-wall construction with solid galvanized steel interior and exterior

panels. Neoprene gasketing around the full perimeter shall be used to prevent air leakage. Doors shall have two (2) position, non-corrosive allow latches operable from inside or outside of

unit. A view window made of glass with safety wire reinforcement in door shall be provided in

all fan sections.

D. Supply Fans

1. All forward curved fans shall be a double-width, double-inlet, multiblade-type. The fan shall be equipped with self-aligning, antifriction bearings with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours as

calculated per ANSI/AFBMA Standard 430.

2. Fan shaft shall be properly sized and protectively coated with lubricating oil. Fan wheels shall be keyed to fan shaft to prevent slipping. Fan shafts shall be solid and designed so that fan shaft

does not pass through its first critical speed, as the unit comes up to it rated RPM. Fan shafts

shall not exceed 75 percent of their first critical speed at any cataloged RPM. Fan modules shall

be provided with an access door on the drive side of the fan. 3. All fan and motor assemblies shall be internally isolated from the unit casing with 2–inch

deflection spring isolators, furnished and installed by the Unit Manufacturer. The isolation

system shall be designed to resist loads produced by external forces.

E. Motors

1. Motors shall be mounted integral to the isolated fan assembly. Motor shall be mounted inside

the unit casing on an adjustable base to permit adjustment of drive belt tension. Motor shall be

high efficiency and have 1.15 service factor. Motor shall be a T-frame, squirrel cage, open drip-

proof with size as shown on Drawings. Refer to the Drawings for the electric characteristics of the motor.

2. Fan motors for use with variable frequency drives shall be rated for such use.

F. Coil Module

1. Coil module shall be provided with DX-cooling coil and coil holding frame and condensate

drain pan. Coils shall be manufactured by the supplies of an air handling unit. Coil shall be burst tested to 450 psig and proof tested to 300 psig air pressure under water. Suction header

shall be constructed of copper tubing. Coil capacity and size as noted on Drawings.

2. Coil module shall be provided with full insulated double wall stainless steel drain pan. The drain pan shall be sloped in two (2) planes to eliminate water conditions and to promote positive

drainage.

G. Mixing Box Module

1. Mixing box shall be provided with motorized outside air intake damper and return air motorized

dampers. 2. The dampers shall be of double-skin airfoil design with metal, compressible jamb seals and

extruded vinyl blade-edge seals on all blades. The blades shall rotate on the stainless steel sleeve

bearings. The dampers shall be rated for a maximum leakage rate of 5 cfm/ft.2 at 1 inch wg and 9

cfm/ft.2 at 4 inch wg. Dampers may be arranged in a parallel or opposed blade configuration.



3. The filters shall be four (4) inch thick synthetic fibers continuously laminated to a supported steel

wire grid with water repellent adhesive. Filters shall have rated average dust spot efficiency of not less than 35 to 40 percent when tested, in accordance with ASHRAE 52.1 Atmospheric Dust Spot

Method and MERV 8 rating based on ASHRAE Standard 52-2. Filters shall be capable of

operating up to 625 fpm face velocity without loss of filter efficiency.

H. Combination VFD, Disconnect with Bypass

1. A combination variable frequency drive, disconnect shall be provided for the fan motor, where shown on Schedules. VFD shall be properly sized, factory mounted and wired to the fan motor.

VFD shall include a circuit breaker disconnect with a thru-the door interlocking handle. Controls

shall be cover mounted. The VFD shall be UL 508C listed and CSA certified and conforms to applicable NEMA, ICS, NFPA and IES.

2.2 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

A. Acceptable Manufacturers as noted or approved equal.

1. Unit design is based on Trane Company 2. Other approved manufacturers:

a. McQuay

b. Carrier c. York

B. Condensing unit shall be packaged factory assembled prepiped and wired for outdoor installation.

Unit shall be complete with 3-D scroll compressors, coils, fans, refrigerant piping, refrigerant management, refrigerant valves and all unit controls.

1. Unit frame shall be constructed of 14 gauge welded galvanized steel with galvanized panels and access doors.

2. Compressors shall be 3-D scroll type with inherantly low vibration. The compressor shall be

suction gas-cooled, direct drive, 3600 RPM hermetic motors, complete with centrifugal oil pump,

oil level sight glass and oil charging valve. 3. Condenser coils shall be aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing with integrated sub-

cooler. The coil shall be burst tested and leak tested under water at 450 psig.

4. Condenser fans shall be direct driven with motor having thermal overload protection and permanently lubricated ball bearings.

5. Unit shall be complete with 115 volt control circuit fusing and control power transformers, across

the line starter and non-fused disconnect switch. 6. The unit shall be of size, capacity and make, as noted in the Equipment Schedule.

2.3 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING TYPE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers or approved equal.

1. Unit design is based on Trane Co.

2. Other approved manufacturers:

a. Carrier Corporation, Division of United Technologies Corp.

b. Rheem Manufacturing Company; Air Conditioning Division



c. York International Corp.; Division of Unitary Products Group

B. General

1. General requirements for gas-fired, condensing furnaces: Factory assembled, piped, wired and

tested, complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA2.3 “Gas-Fired Central Furnaces” and with NFPA 54.

2. Furnace shall be high efficiency condensing type.

C. Construction & Components

1. Cabinet interior around heat exchanger shall be factory insulated. Surfaces in contact with the air stream shall comply with ASHRAE 62-1, 2004..

2. Fan shall be centrifugal, factory balance, resilient mounted, direct drive.

3. Heat exchanger shall be aluminized steel complete with natural gas burner, safety controls,

combustion air centrifugal fan. 4. Furnace controls shall be solid state, heat, cooling and fan speeds and adjustable fan “ON” and

fan “OFF”, timing terminals for connection to accessories.

5. Accessories to include combustion air intake and vent, PVC plastic fitting to combine combustion air inlet and vent through roof.

6. Filters shall be washable 1” thick, urethane pad.

7. Thermostat shall be single stage, adjustable heating/cooling, wall mounted with “OFF-HEAT-COOL-AUTO” sub-base and control wiring.

8. Heating-cooling capacities as noted in Equipment Schedule.

2.4 REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS

A. General refrigeration Component Requirements:

1. Refrigeration compressor, coils and specialties shall be designed to operate with CFC-free

refrigerants.

2. Energy Efficiency: equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, 2007.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fin. Comply with ARI

210/240 – “Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Equipment”. Match size with furnace.

Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet complying with SHRAE 62.1, 2007.

1. Refrigerant Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching furnace and evaporator coil with access panel and

flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized

with nitrogen, seated and with suction line insulated. Provide an standard lengths for installation without joints, except at equipment connections.

1. Flexible Elastomeric: closed-cell, sponge or expanded rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534, Type I, 1/2 “ thick.



D. Air Cooled Compressor-Condensing Unit:

1. Baked enamel steel casing complete with hermetically sealed reciprocating compressor, R-410

refrigerant, refrigerant coil, propeller fan, permanently lubricated motor, low ambient control

to 30o F. Complete packaged unit including all piping and controls. Capacity as noted in

Equipment Schedule on Drawings.

2.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Parts of the units shall be warranted for parts and labor for one (1) year from date of

acceptance by Owner. Unit manufacturer’s representative shall provide a complete service contract

covering labor and refrigeration during first year. The compressors shall be warranted for parts and labor for additional four (4) years.

2.6 The units shall be factory-run testing as a component, prior to leaving the factory. The units shall be

started and tested by the authorized representative of the factory.


3.1 START-UP AND TESTING

A. Final checks before “Start-up”:

1. Verify unit is secure on mounting and supporting devices and connections for piping,

ductwork and electrical are complete.

2. Disconnect fan drive from motor and verify proper motor rotation direction and fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts and belt

guards.

3. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts and other moving parts with factory recommended lubricants. 4. Install clean filters.

5. A manufacturer’s representative should be present to supervise the terminations to BAS system,

as well as the equipment start-up. A start-up check list shall be included with the submittal

which includes modes of operation initiated by the BAS.

B. “Start-up Procedure”:

1. Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and wheel. Adjust fan to

indicate RPM.

a. Replace fan pulleys/sheaves as required, to meet actual field conditions at no additional cost.

C. Refer to Section 230593 “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing” for procedures for air handling system

testing and balancing and for control sequence.

3.2 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. The manufacturer shall furnish an alternative price for:

1. Extended compressor warranty for five (5) years. 2. Extended heat exchanger warranty for five (5) years.



3. Extended parts and labor by Manufacturer to be provided to the Owner for a period of two (2)

years.

B. The Contractor shall furnish Manufacturer complete submittal wiring diagrams of the package unit

as applicable for field maintenance and service.



ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS 238239 - 1

SECTION 238239 – ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install unit heaters and appurtenances with sizes and capacities as shown on drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions and Section 230500.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances and

location and size of each field connection, location and arrangement of integral controls, wiring

diagram including power, signal and control wiring.

C. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties and

accessories for each product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS: As noted below or approved equal.

A. Q-Mark Electric Heating, a division of Marley Engineered Products.

B. Berko Electric Heating

C. Markel Products

2.2 UNIT HEATERS

A. Horizontal electric unit heater shall be complete with electric heating coil, fan, adjustable

discharge louvers, mounting bracket or hanging rods, unit mounted thermostat and all controls

prewired, automatic reset linear thermal cut-out.

B. Unit shall have heavy gauge die-formed steel housing, completely enclosed fan motor, aluminum

finned, copper clad steel sheath heating element.


ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS 238239 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Wiring by the Electrical Contractor.

3.2 Support all units on rods from above. Furnish auxiliary steel where required. Mounting heights

indicated on drawings.



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: S ubject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated.

B. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: C omply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2 and Type SO.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456817811&mf=04&src=wd�








D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC and Type SO with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Solid or stranded for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid or stranded for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC.












C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: T ype THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC. Type MC-HFC in patient care areas and residents rooms per NEC 517.13 (A) and (B).

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. I f manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.



C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches 150 mm

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

of slack.

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.




A. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: F or grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Provide the items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,":


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: C opper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 k cmil, 14 s trands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm)

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

in diameter.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules;

thick.

1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)

C. Grounding Bus: P redrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper,

thick.

1/4 by 4 inches 6.3 by (100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm)

2.2 CONNECTORS

apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-bar Connectors: M echanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: C opper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 f eet (19 mm b y 3 m)

B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: C opper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts.

in diameter.



1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches 1200 mm

2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 3/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm)

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

below grade.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm)

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.



8. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: I nstall insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: I nstall a s eparate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: I nstall an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. I nstall fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

G. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A.

1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch (6.3-by-100-by-300-mm)

3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. grounding bus.

H. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: R oute along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below final grade unless otherwise indicated.



1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. M ake connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. W here a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: B ond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. I nstall tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

F. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet (6 m)

1. If concrete foundation is less than

of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.

20 feet (6 m)

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to grounding electrode external to concrete.

long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.

3.4 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed.

1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager."




A. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. V erify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a c alibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: D esign supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.



B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Q ualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: H ot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.










3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: F actory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: A STM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: S teel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.





http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1746&mf=04&src=wd�








4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: M SS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. C omply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm)

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

in diameter.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).



D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm)

5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts.

thick.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)

B. Use

larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bol t diameters from edge of the base.

3000-psi (20.7-MPa)

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. C oncrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. U se supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.



3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm)

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: C lean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: F or surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.







4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: Setscrew.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

I. Joint Compound for IMC, or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company.




















8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; a Hubbell company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. RNC: T ype EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: S urface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.













B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Prime coated, ready for field painting.

1. Manufacturers: S ubject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: B oxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular.

























4. Listing and Labeling: M etal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg)

I. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing

shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

70 lb (32 kg)

1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

.

J. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

K. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

L. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep)

M. Gangable boxes are allowed.

for light switches only.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

1. Manufacturers: S ubject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC.





c. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems. d. NewBasis. e. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products. f. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.". 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of polymer concrete.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems. d. NewBasis. e. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. f. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products. g. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Color of Frame and Cover: Green. 4. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 5. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 6. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 7. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.". 8. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC IMC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.














4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT .

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC IMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm)

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

trade size.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: U se threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C)

3.2 INSTALLATION

.

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm)

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. S upport within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.



G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

of enclosures to which attached.

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m)

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

intervals.

3. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: A pply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on c onduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm)

N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm)

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than

trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm)

R. Surface Raceways:

of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points.



2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm)

S. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

T. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

U. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m)

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

.

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight:

temperature change.

155 deg F (86 deg C)

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation:

temperature change.


d. Attics: temperature change.


3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least

temperature change.

0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

of temperature change for metal conduits.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

V. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm)

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

of flexible conduit for [recessed and semirecessed luminaires, ]equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

W. Mount boxes at heights indicated on D rawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to [center] of box unless otherwise indicated.



X. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Y. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on oppos ite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

Z. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

BB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

DD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm)

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." in nominal diameter.

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. A fter placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm)

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm)

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of

on each side of the coupling.

60 inches (1500 mm)

6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.



3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm)

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures

sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

1 inch (25 mm)

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.

above finished grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.



3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.



UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 - 1

SECTION 260543 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried duct, and in single duct runs. 2. Handholes and boxes.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and

solvent cement. 3. Accessories for handholes, boxes, and other utility structures. 4. Warning tape.

B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: I nclude plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Frame and cover design. 4. Grounding details. 5. Joint details.

C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Cover design.



3. Grounding details.


A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures.

1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings.

2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.

C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

D. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Comply with ANSI C2.



A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming.

B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. A rrange so identification markings are visible.

C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to handholes, and as approved by Architect.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NE MA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC and Type EPC-80-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES


1. ARNCO Corp. 2. Beck Manufacturing. 3. Cantex, Inc. 4. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 5. Condux International, Inc. 6. ElecSys, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. IPEX Inc. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 11. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

B. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: U nderground-line warning tape specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.3 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color: Green. 2. Configuration: U nits shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." "TELEPHONE." or cable caps. 6. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings

or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.














7. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound t ogether with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis.

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame.


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Christy Concrete Products. d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast.

D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of fiberglass.


a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. S trength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or the manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.














2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables Over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80-PVC,.

B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: R NC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, installed in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Underground Ducts Crossing Walks and Driveways: R NC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.

3.2 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data Wiring:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: P recast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-10 H-20 structural load rating.

2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: P recast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20 Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 Fiberglass enclosures with polymer concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 15 Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, SCTE 77, Tier 15 High-density plastic, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-10 Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 Heavy-duty fiberglass units with polymer concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 8 High-density plastic, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin High-density plastic, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf (13 345-N)

3.3 EARTHWORK

vertical loading.

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 312000 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.



C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. R estore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" and Section 329300 "Plants."

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 017329 "Cutting and Patching."

3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward handholes and away from buildings and equipment.

B. Curves and Bends: U se 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. U se manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches (1220 mm)

C. Joints: U se solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Duct Entrances to Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm)

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing

ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

10 feet (3 m)

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole.

from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet (3 m)

F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. U se sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least

outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. I nstall conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

15-psig (1.03-MPa)

G. Pulling Cord: Install

hydrostatic pressure.

100-lbf- (445-N-)

H. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:

test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.

1. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

2. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 5 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. S ecure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to



expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches (150 mm)

3. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench bottoms as sp ecified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipes less than

between tiers.

6 inches (150 mm)

4. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." in nominal diameter.

5. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand-place backfill to 4 inches (100 mm)

6. Install ducts with a minimum of

over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3 inches (75 mm) between ducts for like services and 6 inches (150 mm)

7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least between power and signal ducts.

36 inches (900 mm)

8. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below the frost line.

below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated.

9. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. E ncase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

10. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm)

C. Elevation: I n paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes

sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

1 inch (25 mm)

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, 42 inches below grade.

above finished grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.



G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth.

1. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa)

2. Dimensions:

, 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," with a troweled finish.

10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep)

3.6 GROUNDING

.

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. P rovide mandrel equal to 80 p ercent fill of duct. I f obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

3. Test and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260544 - 1

SECTION 260544 -

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: A STM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm)

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.



260544 - 2

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: R emovable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm)

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter .

50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm)

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

.

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Presealed Systems.









260544 - 3

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa)

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

, 28-day compressive strength.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. T ool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm)

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm)

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.



260544 - 4

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. T ighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for conductors. 2. Underground-line warning tape. 3. Warning labels and signs. 4. Equipment identification labels. 5. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.



B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: C olored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm)

B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted,

wide.

3-mil- (0.08-mm-)

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: S lit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: F lame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. S ized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C)

F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

. Comply with UL 224.

G. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)

1. Marker for Tags: P ermanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

2. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.

2.2 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.



3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

C. Tag: Type I:

1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Thickness: 4 mils (0.1 mm)3. Weight:

. 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9.0 kg/100 sq. m)

4. .

3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf (133.4 N), and 2500 psi (17.2 MPa)

2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

.

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm)3. Nominal size,

grommets in corners for mounting. 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm)

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

.

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm)

2.

galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm)

3. Nominal size, grommets in corners for mounting.

10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm)

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

.

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."



2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: M achine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm)

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Ma chine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be

.

3/8 inch (10 mm)

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be

. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

3/8 inch (10 mm)

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be

.

3/8 inch (10 mm)

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be

.

1 inch (25 mm)

2.5 CABLE TIES

.

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm)2. Tensile Strength at

. 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa)3. Temperature Range:

. Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C)

4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding. .

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.


. 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa)3. Temperature Range:

. Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C)

4. Color: Black. .

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.


. 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2

MPa)3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.

.

4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C)5. Color: Black.

.



2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: C omply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

G. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 i nches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches (400 mm)

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

overall.

A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: F or conductors in pull and junction boxes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: U se colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208Y/110-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.



2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White. 5) Ground: Green

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: A pply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm)

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in pull and junction boxes, and handholes, use write-on tags.

from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

C. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

D. Locations of Underground Lines: I dentify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

E. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. D o not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: S elf-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,



lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm)

b. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

high.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. P anelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchboards. e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. f. Enclosed switches. g. Enclosed controllers. h. Power transfer equipment. i. Contactors. j. Power-generating units. k. Monitoring and control equipment.



OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 1

SECTION 260573 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

1. Coordination of series-rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals may be in digital form.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. 3. Coordination-Study Report.


A. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

B. Product Certificates: F or coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: A n entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.



C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Available Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, companies offering computer software programs that may be used in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. CGI CYME. 2. EDSA Micro Corporation. 3. ESA Inc. 4. Operation Technology, Inc. 5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.








3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other electrical Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. U se equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance. 3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. c. Cables: I ndicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation, and length. d. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

c. Generator thermal-damage curve. d. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. e. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

f. Panelboards, switchboards, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. T he calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a t hree-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:

1. Distribution panelboard. 2. Branch circuit panelboard.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

1. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.



2. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

D. Study Report:

1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

E. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-

circuit currents. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 141 IEEE 241 IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

C. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. D emonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

D. Coordination-Study Report: P repare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag. b. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous

settings. c. Fuse-current rating and type. d. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.



2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. d. Cable damage curves. e. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

E. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.



LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

SECTION 260923 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Time switches. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Indoor occupancy sensors.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: F or each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES


1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.

B. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Comply with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Contact Configuration: 3PST. 3. Contact Rating: 40-A inductive or resistive, 120-V ac. 4. Circuitry: A llows connection of a p hotoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off

function of a program. 5. Astronomic time dial. 6. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays. 7. Skip-a-day mode. 8. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures,

minimum of 16]hours.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected load, complying with UL 773.


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lux)

3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.

, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type. 5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.









2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 12. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.


2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: E xternally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm)

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

knockout in a standard electrical enclosure.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: A djustable from 2 to 200 f c (21.5 to 2152 lux)

C. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected ultrasonic energy .

; turn lights off when selected lighting level is present.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).















2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-)

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of

high ceiling.

1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-)4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of

high ceiling.

2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-)5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within

high ceiling. 90 feet (27.4 m)

when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet (4.3 m)

D. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s)

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of

.

1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-)

2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

high ceiling.


1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 12. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C)3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V and 800-W incandescent.

.

C. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1:















1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m)

2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic. .

3. Switch Type: SP. 4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage 120 V dual-technology type. 5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150

fc (108 to 1600 lux)

6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.

. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.

7. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes. 8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.

2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: N ot smaller than No. 12 AWG. C omply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than [No. 18] AWG. C omply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch (13 mm)

B. Wiring within Enclosures: C omply with NECA 1. S eparate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.



D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 m onths from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.



PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PANELBOARDS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: F or each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. S how tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

C. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.



D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.


D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C)

b. Altitude: Not exceeding .

6600 feet (2000 m)

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

.

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Ma nufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Fuses for Fused Switches: E qual to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and

type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Hinged Front Cover: E ntire front trim hinged to box a nd with standard door within

hinged trim cover. 3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: S teel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.



B. Incoming Mains Location: Top or bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: M echanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Basis of Design)

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Mains: Lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Basis of Design)



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Plug-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units for load centers only.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm)

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Stub four 3/4-inch (27-GRC)

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Retain option in first paragraph below if retaining "Load Balancing" Paragraph in "Adjusting" Article.

I. Comply with NECA 1.



3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. O btain approval before installing. U se a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."


A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included. I nclude notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Load Balancing: A fter Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.



3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.



WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

WIRING DEVICES



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Snap switches. 4. Communications outlets. 5. Cord and plug sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.





B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: S hortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: C omply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.








1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590.

2.5 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description:

1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.6 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


1)

Single Pole:

Cooper; AH1221. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221.















3) Leviton; 1221-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

5)

Double Pole:

Cooper; AH1222. 6) Hubbell; HBL1222. 7) Leviton; 1222-2. 8) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.

9)

Three Way:


13)

Four Way:


C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221L. b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. c. Leviton; 1221-2L. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120 /277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.


a. Cooper; 1995.

































b. Hubbell; HBL1557. c. Leviton; 1257. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: N EMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:






1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

in length.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, a nd on ho rizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.




A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

B. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

FUSES



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits and enclosed switches.


A. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 4. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: F or fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. I n addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


FUSES 262813 - 2


A. Source Limitations: O btain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C)

1.7 COORDINATION

, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: S ubject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: N EMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2150&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd�

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456803154&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd�





FUSES 262813 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. R eject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Service Entrance: Class L, time delay or Class RK1, time delay. 2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 3. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. A rrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 1

SECTION 263213 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

ENGINE GENERATORS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency standby power supply with the following features:

1. Natural gas fueled engine. (Diesel fueled engine – Electrical Alternate # 2) 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Outdoor level II (-25dba) sound attenuated enclosure.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a p arameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.


A. Product Data: For each type of package engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement

to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Warranty: A one year warranty for the generator set and automatic transfer switch shall be included to guarantee against defective material and workmanship in accordance with the manufacturer’s published warranty from date of start-up..


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: F or packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.


A. It is the intent of the specifications to secure an electrical power system that has been tested during design verification, production and at the final job site. All finished equipment shall be of the latest commercial design and will be complete with all the necessary accessories for complete installation as shown on the plans and specifications herein. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, along with all applicable local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new and of current production of a national firm that manufactures generator sets and controls and assembles them as a complete and coordinated system. There will be one source of responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a local representative with factory trained servicemen.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 150 miles

C. Source Limitations: the equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment for a period of at least 10 years and who maintains a service organization available 24-hours a day throughout the year.

of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.



D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with ASME B15.1.

F. Comply with NFPA 37.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.

I. Comply with UL 2200.

J. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

K. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.


A. Environmental Conditions: E ngine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 30 to plus 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet (300 m)

1.9 COORDINATION

.

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: The engine-generator supplier shall furnish factory trained personnel and maintain a 24-hour parts and service capability, and show, at time of submittal that they are regularly engaged in a maintenance contract program to semi-annually inspect and test run the generator to perform manufacturers recommended preventative maintenance service on the equipment furnished. This service shall be provided at no additional charge to the Owner for a period of one year from date of start to of the generator set. At the Owner’s option, the service contract shall be renewable on a y ear-to-year basis, thereafter, with costs being paid by the Owner. The equipment supplier agrees to provide labor, test equipment and/or replacement parts so as



to perform Preventative Maintenance. In performing its Preventative Maintenance Program, the equipment supplier shall make schedule visits consisting of the service outlined below: Semi-annual Service – Services provided in each Servicing Agent’s Maintenance Trip will include the following:

• Inspect air cleaner

• Test antifreeze and adjust

• Check coolant level

• Inspect belts and hoses as required

• Check engine heater operation

• Check generator set for fuel, oil, coolant leaks

• Check air intakes and outlets

• Check transfer tank operation

• Drain exhaust line

• Inspect silencer

• Check battery charger operation and charge rate

• Check battery electrolyte levels and specific gravity

• Clean battery terminals as necessary

• Check generator output voltage and adjust as necessary

• Emergency system operation without load transfer

• Frequency check/governor adjustment, as required

• Check transfer switch and accessory operation

• Check engine alternator charge rates

• Check engine and generator gauge and indicator operation

• Check generator set controller operation including shutdown functions

• Perform engine checks per manufacturer’s recommendations



Annual Service – Services provided in Servicing Agent’s Annual Maintenance Trip will include the following:

• Lube oil and filter(s) change

• Fuel filter(s) change

• Engine tune-up with parts (to include points, condenser, rotor, cap, and spark plugs) for gas or gasoline engines only as required

• Lube oil analysis

• Air filter Change (as needed at an additional cost)

• Load Bank Service in accordance with N.F.P.A. 110 (Diesel units only)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kohler model 200REZXB with a 4UA13

1.

Alternator or a comparable product by one of the following:

Generac2.

Power Systems, Inc. Kohler Co.; Generator Division.

3. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: 200 kW @ 130C , 2502. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.

kVA, at 208y/120 volts.

3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component.

D. Generator-Set Performance:

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.







3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no r andom speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. F requency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.

6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: F or a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components.

8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements. 9. EPA certified and compliant with NFPA 110 L evel 1 w ith regards to single step

acceptance in 10 seconds.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Natural Gas (Base bid), Fuel oil, DF-2 (Electrical Alternate # 2)

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: C ontrol flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: A rranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no di sassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

D. Engine Fuel System:

1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.

2. Relief-Bypass Valve: A utomatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.

E. Coolant Jacket Heater: E lectric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

F. Governor: Electronic isochronous, capable of +0.5% steady state frequency regulation.

G. Cooling System: C losed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.



1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: C onstructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: F lexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F (82 deg C)

b. End Fittings: F langes or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

, and noncollapsible under vacuum.

H. Muffler/Silencer: C ritical type, sized as r ecommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. The silencer shall be installed inside the sound attenuated weatherproof enclosure.

I. Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

J. Starting System: 12 -V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified 60 seconds. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project

Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice three times without recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery Compartment: F actory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 70-A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:

2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE (Provide as part of Electrical Alternate # 2)

A. Comply with NFPA 30.

B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank. Features include the following:



1. Tank level indicator. 2. Capacity: Fuel for eight hour’s continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output. 3. Vandal resistant fill cap. 4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in the automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: S witching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.

D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common wall-mounted monitoring panel.

E. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Start-stop switch. 11. Overspeed shutdown device. 12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. 13. Coolant low-level shutdown device. 14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device. 15. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 16. Fuel tank level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 17. Generator overload.



F. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data-link transmission of indications to remote data terminals.

H. Common Remote Audible Alarm: S ignal the occurrence of any events listed below without differentiating between event types. C onnect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset.

1. Engine high-temperature shutdown. 2. Lube-oil, low-pressure shutdown. 3. Overspeed shutdown. 4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown. 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm. 6. Lube-oil, low-pressure prealarm. 7. Fuel tank, low fluid level. 8. Low coolant level.

I. Remote Alarm Annunciator: An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. S ilencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. C abinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.

J. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.

2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: 100 and 600 amperes. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. E xciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.



C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: B rought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up t o 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 pe rcent of rated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Drip proof.

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.

J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.

2.8 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure.

1. Louvers: F ixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. S torm-proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.

C. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.

2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the engine-alternator and heavy-duty steel base.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: M anufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.




A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator on 4-inch- (100-mm-)

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.



3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

D. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.

E. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

F. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: E ngage a f actory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: E ngage a f actory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to

those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test. 3. An installation check, start-up, and building load test shall be performed by the

manufacturer’s local representative. The engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and date of the site test. The test shall include: a. Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze shell be checked for conformity to the manufacturer’s recommendations, under the environmental conditions present and expected.

b. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. These shall include: block heaters, battery charger, alternator strip heaters, remote annunciator, etc.



c. Start-up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage and frequency, and phase rotation. 4. An external load bank shall be connected to the system to load the generator set to the

nameplate kW rating per NFPA-110 section 7.13 Installation Acceptance.

D. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

F. Operational Test: A fter electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. R eplace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

I. Retest: C orrect deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. R efer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."



TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 1

SECTION 263600 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

TRANSFER SWITCHES



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. Remote annunciation systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: D imensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.


A. Qualification Data: To insure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliability and quality standards, the manufacturer and/or local representative shall be responsible for three separate tests: design prototype tests, final production tests and site tests.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The automatic transfer switch manufacturer and its distributor shall maintain a 2 4-hour parts and service organization. This organization shall be regularly engaged in a maintenance contract program to perform preventative maintenance and service on equipment similar to that specified.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches and remote annunciators through one source from a single manufacturer.


D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Comply with NFPA 110.

G. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Contactor Transfer Switches:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. b. Generac Power Systems, Inc. c. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division. d. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 100 Amps, and 600 Amps with 10 second delay. 2. 3 pole. 3. 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.







1. The withstand and closing rating with Class J current-limiting fuses shall be 200,000 Amps.

2. The withstand and closing ratings with specific protective devices shall be 30,000 Amps. 3. The automatic transfer switches shall be rated to withstand RMS symmetrical short

circuit current available at the automatic transfer switch terminals, with the type of overcurrent protection shown on the plans.

C. Microprocessor Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. C omponents shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. Switch Characteristics: D esigned for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: S witches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: S ilver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. C onventional

automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries.

1. Float type rated 10 A. 2. Ammeter to display charging current. 3. Fused ac inputs and dc outputs.

I. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices, or annunciators, panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device.

J. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.



K. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. In-Phase Monitoring shall continuously monitor the contactor transfer times, source voltage, frequency and phase angle to provide a self-adjusting, zero crossing contactor transfer signal. A flashing LED on the user interface panel shall indicate active in-phase monitoring.

D. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: S ense low phase-to-ground voltage on e ach phase. P ickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 t o 100 pe rcent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 t o 98 p ercent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. P ickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 t o 100 pe rcent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: A djustable from 0 t o 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: O ne isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.



12. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

13. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 t o 30 days. R unning periods are adjustable from 10 t o 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings. c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not

available.

2.4 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM

A. Functional Description: R emote annunciator panel shall annunciate conditions for indicated transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following:

1. Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer-switch controls.

2. Switch position. 3. Switch in test mode. 4. Failure of communication link.

B. Annunciator Panel: LED-lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch.

1. Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored. 2. Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and identity

of load it serves. 3. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lamp Test: Push-to-test or lamp-test switch on front panel.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. E nsure proper operation. C heck transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.



B. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as r ecommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a f actory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. C omply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings.



e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. A ttach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.



LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264113 - 1

SECTION 264113 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for structures and rooftop elements



B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.


A. Qualification Data: F or qualified Installer and manufacturer. I nclude data on listing or certification by UL.

B. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing material.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

E. Other Informational Submittals: P lans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features, including the following:

1. Ground rods. 2. Ground loop conductor.




A. Installer Qualifications: Trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. UL Master Label. 2. LPI System Certificate. 3. UL Master Label Recertification.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and Installer.

C. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I, unless otherwise indicated. Match existing.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers that match existing.

a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Harger. d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc. e. Independent Protection Co. f. Preferred Lightning Protection. g. Robbins Lightning, Inc. h. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.

2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches

3. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-membrane roof system materials.

Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal.











C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Match existing.

D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.

E. Ground Rods: Verify existing remain, or provide Copper-clad 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet

F. Heavy-Duty, Stack-Mounted, Lightning Protection Components: A s required, shall match existing.

long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends.

C. Conceal the following conductors:

1. System conductors. 2. Down conductors. 3. Interior conductors. 4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet

D. Cable Connections: U se crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in underground portions of the system.

of building.

E. Cable Connections: U se exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components.

1. Exception: I n single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections may be used only below the roof level.

F. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Ground Loop: M aintain existing ground-level, potential equalization conductor around the perimeter of structure.

1. Verify or provide ground ring not less than 24 inches2. Verify or bond ground terminals to the ground loop.

from building foundation.

3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet

H. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at

of grade level.

60-foot intervals.





3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.


A. Notify Architect at least 48 ho urs in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate.



INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1

SECTION 265100 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

INTERIOR LIGHTING



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.


A. Product Data: F or each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Ballast, including BF.



3. Energy-efficiency data. 4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. T he adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Manufacturer Certified Data: P hotometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a cu rrent accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Installation instructions.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.



2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Incandescent Fixtures: C omply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: C omply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

F. Sheet Metal Components: S teel unless otherwise indicated. F orm and support to prevent warping and sagging.

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: S mooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

H. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 1 00 percent virgin acrylic plastic. H igh resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: A t least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm)

b. UV stabilized.

minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

I. Factory-Applied Labels: C omply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.



2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall

be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C)

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

A. Description: Electronic-instant-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. B allast shall be designed for full light output:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 0.98, except fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-power-

factor electronic ballasts or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: C omply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.



2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 de g C)

3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature:

for single-lamp ballasts.

104 deg F (40 deg C)4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.

.

5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Ma nufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise.

2.6 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: C omply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm)

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of

, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

24 inches (610 mm)

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature [3500] K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start.

, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.8 HID LAMPS

A. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

2.9 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.



C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm)

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel,

steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

12 gage (2.68 mm)

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel,

.

12 gage (2.68 mm)

F. Rod Hangers:

.

3/16-inch (5-mm)

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm)

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

from lighting fixture corners.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm)

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm)2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

, brace to limit swinging.

3. Continuous Rows: U se tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. C onnect support wires or rods to building structure.



E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.



EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1

SECTION 265600 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

EXTERIOR LIGHTING



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories.


1. Section 265100 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. HID: High-intensity discharge.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

F. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf (2224 N)

C. Ice Load: Load of

, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

3 lbf/sq. ft. (145 Pa), applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.



D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet (15 m) high or less is 90 mph (40 m/s)

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.

.

b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years. c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0.


A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles. 12. Manufactured pole foundations.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 3. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of

screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based.


A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: S igned by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4-M and that load



imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be based on design calculations by a professional engineer.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Store poles on de cay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches (300 mm)

B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Ma nufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Poles: R epair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in

finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than [three] years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: R igidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: S mooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: M anufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.



M. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: P rovide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: A A-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: m edium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: A rchitectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 m m or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color: Dark bronze.

N. Factory-Applied Labels: C omply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc (16 to 32 lx) and off at 4.5 to 10 fc (48 to 108 lx)

2.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS

with 15-second minimum time delay.

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: C omply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.



C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: H ot-dip galvanized after

fabrication unless otherwise indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches (65 by 130 mm)

E. Concrete Pole Foundations: C ast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

, with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws.

F. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.

2.5 STEEL POLES

A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig (317 MPa); one-piece construction up to 40 feet (12 m)

1. Shape: Round, straight.

in height with access handhole in pole wall.

2. Mounting Provisions: B utt flange for bolted mounting on f oundation or breakaway support.

B. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.

1. Adapter fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole mounted adapter, then bolted together with stainless -steel bolts.

2. Cross Section: T apered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.

3. Match pole material and finish.

C. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: W elded 1/2-inch (13-mm)

E. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

threaded lug, complying with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.



1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. G rind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection.

3. Exterior Surfaces: M anufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.6 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches (1520 mm)2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines:

. 10 feet (3 m)

3. Trees: .

15 feet (5 m)

C. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer.

from tree trunk.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.



2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. U se nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space.

3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a sh ort piece of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-)

D. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of

diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.

6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with [pea gravel] to a level 1 inch (25 mm)

E. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

below top of concrete slab.

3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-)

3.4 GROUNDING

thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

A. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.



DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1

SECTION 283111 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Magnetic door holders. 7. Remote annunciator. 8. Addressable interface device. 9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.


A. Noncoded, addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.



B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations.



4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. L ocate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

C. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction and include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of

the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.



B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: O n magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.

3. Smoke Detectors,: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Q uantity equal to 2 pe rcent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed. 7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: O btain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.

1.10 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.



C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. U pgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: S ubject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fire Control Instruments, Inc.; a Honeywell company. 2. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. 3. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 6. Heat detectors in elevator shaft. 7. Fire-extinguishing system operation. 8. Fire standpipe system.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciator. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Record events in the system memory.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.






2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices.

3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciator.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 2 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits:

1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: N FPA 72, Class B.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style B.



b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Y. c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 4. d. Install no more than 40 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

2. Serial Interfaces: one RS-232 ports for printers.

D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit.

2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector.

3. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 4. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a ANSI Temporal 3 pattern.

F. Door Controls: D oor hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

G. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. R ecord sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station to be selected by owner.

I. Primary Power: 2 4-V dc obtained from 120-V ac ser vice and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

J. Secondary Power: 24 -V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

K. Instructions: C omputer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a st ainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.



2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: C omply with UL 38. B oxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on r ecessed outlet box. I f indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. L ifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be four-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F (8 or 11 deg C)

b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at

per minute.

135 or 155 deg F (57 or 68 deg C)c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected.



e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a f ixed temperature of 135 deg F (57 deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C)

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

per minute unless otherwise indicated.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: F actory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Horns: E lectric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.



C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-)

1. Rated Light Output:

high letters on the lens.

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf (111-N)2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.

holding force.

3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: A nnunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. M anual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. P rovide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall and to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.



2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture [two] telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power. 5. Low battery. 6. Abnormal test signal. 7. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Install wall-mounted equipment, flush with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm)

C. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

above the finished floor.

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.



2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m)4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A or Appendix B in NFPA 72.

.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m)

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than

from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

12 inches (300 mm)

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

from any part of a lighting fixture.

E. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

F. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

G. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

H. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm)

I. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm horn and at least

below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

6 inches (150 mm)

J. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

below the ceiling.

K. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm)

L. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than


72 inches (1830 mm)

3.2 CONNECTIONS


A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet (1 m) from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system



being controlled. 1. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 2. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. C omply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. I nstall a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: E ngage a f actory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: E ngage a f actory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on c ompleted Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: C omply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.



5. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: P erform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. U se forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.


Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility: WESTERN RESERVE ......Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility: WESTERN...

Documents

Transcript of Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility: WESTERN RESERVE ......Proposed Skilled Nursing Facility: WESTERN...